Manual Halliburton en English

Slickline Operations Manual
Section 1 ..............................................................Surface Operations
Section 2 ....................................Downhole Service Operations
Section 3 .............Advanced Slickline Service Operations
Section 4 ........................................................ Technical Information
Section 5 ............................................................................................... Safety

Section
1
Surface Operations
SL 1.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slickline Standard Job Procedures - Introduction
SL 1.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Job Information
SL 1.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Job Preparation
SL 1.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireline Unit and Accessory Equipment Selection
SL 1.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Selection
SL 1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spooling Wire
SL 1.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Use and Inspection
SL 1.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Failure Procedure
SL 1.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Selection and Use of Lubricator Equipment
SL 1.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wellhead Connection
SL 1.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump-In or Flow Tee
SL 1.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricator Safety Valves
SL 1.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireline Valves (BOPs)
SL 1.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Control Equipment and Rig Up
SL 1.14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Catchers and Tool Traps
SL 1.15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricator Purge Valve
SL 1.16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical Injection Sub
SL 1.17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stuffing Boxes
SL 1.18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pack-Off and Grease Injection Heads
SL 1.19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chemical and Grease Injection Systems
SL 1.20 . . . . . . . . . . Slickline Hay Pulley and Braided Line Ground Block Sheave
SL 1.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight Indicators Selection and Use
SL 1.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireline Tool String Selection and Use
SL 1.23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“Tool Box” Safety Meetings
SL 1.24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spotting Equipment on Location
SL 1.25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Handling Apparatus
SL 1.26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wellhead Preparation (modify Oman WL 1.7)
SL 1.27 . . . . . . . . . . .Tool String and Lubricator Make-Up (modify Oman WL 1.8)
SL 1.28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigging Up the Lubricator Stack
(combine WL1.25a with Oman WL 1.9)
SL 1.29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Location Pressure Testing (formally WL1.26)
SL 1.30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Wire Running Operations (Section From WL 1.4)
SL 1.31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Change Outs and Lubricator Bleed-Off Operations
(combine WL1.27 with Oman WL 1.11)
SL 1.32 . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigging Down and Securing Well (modify Oman WL 1.12)
February 9, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-1

Slickline Operations Manual Surface Operations
SL 1.33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2S Procedures and Precautions (formally WL 1.28)

SL 1.34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydrate Precautions and Prevention (formally WL 1.29)
SL 1.35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricator Auto-Ignition Precautions and Prevention

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.0: Standard Job Procedures
SL 1.0: Standard Job Procedures

Standardized Job Procedures have been set up for two reasons. First is to establish
the best way to perform certain types of jobs and which equipment to use. The
second reason is to achieve some standardization of procedures throughout Halli-
burton’s Slickline Service operations. This Manual will include procedures for
slickline, braided line and Advanced Slickline Services operations.
The Standardized Job Procedure sections are set up to give procedural guidelines.
The Halliburton representative in charge on location can make the decision to
vary from the procedures, if a better and safer way is known. However the stan-
dard procedures marked “NV” (No Variation) will require approval from the
local Area PSL Manager before variance will be accepted. Additional information
such as references to existing policies, areas of responsibilities, and other general
information are included.
Local operational area and customer requirements, or government regulations

may dictate that additional procedures be followed for specific jobs or types of
jobs. In these cases, the standard procedures outlined herein should be considered
the minimum to perform wireline service operations.
This manual is divided into 4 different sections. The first section will cover gen-
eral wireline service and surface operations. The second section will deal prima-
rily with downhole operations. The third section will provide technical support to
the standardized procedures of the first two sections and the last section will pro-
vide various safety topics that can be used in the daily tool box safety meetings.
Detailed operating procedures on individual tools are not covered in this manual.
Downhole tool information is available in the Wireline Specialist Trainee manuals
as well as in the Basic Design and Maintenance Instructions (BDMI) that cover
specific tools being used.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.1: Pre-Job Information
SL 1.1: Pre-Job Information

1.0 Scope
Proper pre-job planning and preparation are important for the successful comple-
tion of any slickline service job.
2.0 General Information

Before any slickline service operation can commence, a certain amount of infor-
mation is required. This information should be gathered by the Technical Advisor,
Field Sales Representative, Service Coordinator, Dispatcher or other designated
person. Many locations have established a dispatch sheet, which prompts the
information taker to gather the proper information.
Minimum Information Requirements:

•Operator (customer) name
•Type of operation/job to be performed
•Field/area name - Where the well is located
•Well identification - Operator well name and/or number
•Well Environment - Presence and concentration of various well fluids that
might have an adverse effect if persons or equipment are exposed to it; such
as H2S, CO2, acids, chlorides, etc.
•Anticipated surface well pressure - Shut in and/or flowing depending on the
job being performed
•Tubing & casing type, size weight threads, and lengths
•Surface and bottom hole temperature
•Type and size tree connection
•Size and depth/location of various flow controls
•Size and depth/location of any other known restrictions
•Rig up equipment size and weight limitations
•Directions to location/dock or designated meeting area
•Date and time service operations will be required
•Well schematic and/or completion detail
•Customer contact and phone number
3.0 Procedure
1. Person designated to perform necessary communication with the customer
will record information on service instruction form. This form may also be
known as a job, data, dispatch, or call-out sheet.
2. Delivers form and other pertinate information to slickline operations person-
nel for equipment selection and to carry out SL service operations.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.2: Pre-Job Preparation
SL 1.2: Pre-Job Preparation

1.0 Scope
Proper preparation is the key to a successful slickline service job. Communication
of job specifics to the crew, selection and checking the function of the equipment,
and obtaining the proper work permits are part of this preparation.

Specific personnel must be appraised of the job, of any specific hazards, concerns,
or potential problems with the well, and must be informed of the equipment that
will be required to perform the service operation. The chain of communication
necessary to get the job information to the service supervisor or specialist per-
forming the job will depend on the size of the location. The job information may
be gathered by the operator that will do the job, another specialist, the salesman,
service coordinator, service supervisor, dispatcher, etc. Each NWA and corre-
sponding BD group shall set up their own procedure for gathering and communi-
cating job information.
Job information may be distributed via forms developed for this purpose. Some
locations may refer to these as Job Sheets, Data Sheets, Call-Out Sheets, Workover
Prognosis, etc. In addition, it may be necessary to obtain a work permit from the
customer before commencing any service operation. This is common with major
service contracts. In addition, travel permits may also be required in some parts of
the world. This is to keep both customers and our operations supervisory people
informed of where personnel will be travelling. This is common for some desert
operations and in Arctic operations, where hazardous travel conditions may exist.
The person(s) responsible for equipment preparation may also be someone other
than the crew that will perform the job. This is especially true in larger locations
where there is a Special Tool Person or some other dedicated person(s) whose
responsibilities are to prepare equipment for jobs and to maintain and refurbish
equipment as necessary.
3.0 Procedure
1. Designated person (Service Coordinator, Service Supervisor, Service Special-
ist, etc.) reviews job sheet.
2. Selects crew that will perform job.
3. Provides crew with Service Instructions/Job Sheet and discusses job specifics
with special emphasis on any hazards that might be present or potential prob-
lems customer has relayed.
4. The person(s) designated to get equipment together for the job will also be
given a job sheet.
Note In offshore and some land service centers it is the special tools person’s
responsibility to load out the tool container or truck with the necessary tools and
to prepare the unit for the job. Equipment may travel to location several days
before the crew arrives.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.2: Pre-Job Preparation
5. Provides crew with any work or travel permits as necessary and notes any
specific job site hazards on the work permit as well as the Job Sheet.
6. Crew or other designated personnel gathers all necessary equipment, includ-
ing any special downhole tools, surface equipment, tree connections, and spe-
cial safety equipment (H2S Monitors, Air Packs, Chemical Suits, etc.) This
equipment may be customer-owned in some areas of the world and will
require that the crew travel to customer’s warehouse to pick equipment up.
7. Crew or other designated personnel ensures that the proper equipment is
selected for the job and that it is in good operating condition.
8. Crew or other designated personnel load equipment on/in service unit, tool
truck, or in tool box, insuring that all equipment is secured properly for trans-
port. Fills out pre-job equipment check list and shipping documents as neces-
sary.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.3: Wireline Unit and Accessory Equipment Selection
SL 1.3: Wireline Unit and Accessory Equipment Selection

1.0 Scope
Wireline unit and accessory equipment selection should be based on well environ-
ment, well pressures, location and location conditions, well depth, and type of job
being performed.

Wireline service units and accessory equipment now exist to handle various ser-
vice conditions throughout the world, from Arctic operations in sub-zero condi-
tions on the North Slope and Siberia to 140°F in Oman and Saudi Arabia. In
addition, WL service units come in a variety of configurations and sizes to satisfy
most any need, skid mounted for offshore platform/rig operations, or mounted in
spud or life boats for inland water/bay operations. Some unit designs are heli-
portable for flying into remote land or offshore locations where normal land or
sea transportation is not available. Some land units come equipped with integral
masts or cranes. Offshore units can be self-contained with the power source as an
integral part of the skid or the reel and power source can be separated into two or
three skids. Reel packages can be acquired in single, double, or triple drum con-
figuration.
Accessory equipment as defined here will be nonpressure control equipment that

is used to facilitate rig up or offer enhanced or additional services when run in
conjunction with Wireline. This includes, but is not limited to, mast trucks or
skids, crane trucks, transfer or chemical injection pumps, pressure control or
grease injection systems, gin poles, etc.
Typically, Halliburton locations will have WL service units and accessory equip-
ment to address the specific needs of the customers in their area. On occasion, it
may be necessary to acquire equipment from other locations for particular jobs or
acquire new equipment. Before this equipment is put in operation, the Team or
Service Coordinators should ensure that all personnel required to run this equip-
ment become familiar with it and know how to operate it safely before it is put
into service.
3.0 Procedure
1. The Service Coordinator or other responsible person coordinates and inter-
faces with others as necessary to ensure that the right size and type of unit is
selected to accomplish the job.
2. The special tools person or other responsible person shall visually inspect all
equipment for obvious defects or damage and see to it that all repairs and
maintenance have been done prior to sending the equipment to location.
Note Under no circumstances should a piece of equipment with a problem that

could lead to the unsuccessful completion of a job or be potentially hazardous to
personnel be sent on the job before necessary repairs are made.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.3: Wireline Unit & Accessory Equipment Selection
3. The Team Coordinator and Service Coordinator should ensure that the per-
sonnel being sent on location have the training and the skill sets to operate the
equipment safely before they work with the equipment.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.4: Wire Selection
SL 1.4: Wire Selection

1.0 Scope
Selection of the proper wire for a specific job requirement and wellbore environ-
ment is critical for the successful completion of any wireline service job. Wire fail-
ures that lead to costly WL fishing jobs can be the result of improper wire
selection.

There are basically two different parameters used in selecting wire to be used in
wireline service operations. The first is to determine if the wire will have sufficient
strength to handle the tensile load that it will be subjected to during the job. This
should include the weight of the tool string and other tools suspended on the end
of the wire, any over-pull required to remove or pull objects from the wellbore
(including drag), and the weight of the suspended wire itself. Under normal cir-
cumstances, the maximum tensile load subjected to the wire should be no more
than 60 - 65% of its published minimum breaking strength.
Note The breaking strength of the wire is a function of its cross-sectional area
and its ultimate tensile strength. For example, higher tensile strength wire of a
particular diameter can be subjected to a larger tensile load then a lower tensile
strength wire of the same diameter. Conversely, a larger diameter wire of a given
strength can be subjected to a larger tensile load then the same wire of a smaller
diameter. Typically wireline used in slickline operations will have a tensile
strength between 220,000 and 260,000 psi.
Second, the wellbore environment can have an adverse effect on the integrity of
the wire due to corrosion. It is important to select a wire that is of a metallurgy
that will be able to handle the corrosive effects of wellbore fluids, or the wire
should be inhibited to eliminate these effects. Almost all wells exhibit some form
of corrosive environment either naturally occurring, like chlorides, H2S, or CO2,or
introduced to the wellbore during drilling or stimulation operations, such as HCl
or Fe acids or other chemicals.
3.0 Procedure
1. Determine the maximum anticipated tensile load that the wire will be sub-
jected to.
Note Include the weight of the wire, tool string, and anticipated overpull to
determine the maximum tensile load.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.4: Wire Selection
2. Determine if the well is corrosive.

•Chloride content and concentration
•H2S content and concentration (percent, ppm’s, grains, or partial pressure)
•CO2 content and concentration (percent or parts per million ppm’s)
•Any solvents or acids? (amines, paraffin solvents of HCl, Fe, hydrofluoric
acids, etc.)
•Determine the bottomhole temperature or anticipated temperature in the
wellbore during the slickline service operation.
3. Select proper wire to handle anticipated tensile load and well environment
based on charts and tables provided in Section 4.1
4.0 Appendix
Wireline Selection & Technical Information - Section 4.1.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.5: Spooling Wire
SL 1.5: Spooling Wire

1.0 Scope
Correctly spooling slickline on the service unit is extremely important. Wire incor-
rectly placed on the reel can be damaged or entangled in such a way as to prevent
the successful completion of wireline service operations.
Note It is recommended that braided line be spooled stet by an experienced per-

son that has been trained in the techniques required to get the proper tension and
lay of the line on the wireline drum. In addition, spooling braided line requires
some specialized equipment. Unless your location has the experienced personnel
and proper equipment, spooling braided line should not be attempted. Most Hal-
liburton locations contract this out to companies that specialize in this service.

Gloves and eye protection are required when spooling wire. Keep hands, rags,
and loose clothing away from the moving wire, drums, and storage spools during
wire spooling operations.
The wire should be firmly anchored to the drum. The wire must be placed on the
unit with a sufficient amount of tension to bend the wire around the core of the
drum and to prevent the upper wraps from pulling down into the lower wraps.
This tension must be maintained during spooling operations to ensure that the
wire doesn’t bury itself into the lower wraps when performing jarring operations.
If this occurs, damage could result to the wire, or it could become entangled in
such a way as to prevent the wire from spooling off of the drum freely.
In addition, the wire must be relatively smooth wrapped for many of the same
reasons. If the wire is allowed to build up too high on the drum in one spot, it can
become loose, which can cause damage or entanglement of the wire.
The correct and incorrect drum/spool arrangements for spooling new wire on a
unit to minimize stress are shown in Figure 1. The wire must always be spooled
on in the same direction that it comes off the storage spool. Figure 1B shows an
incorrect technique involving a reverse bend in the wire, which could lead to pre-
mature wire failure. Also shown is an alternative where the storage spool is laid
on its side. This arrangement is only recommended when one of the other meth-
ods mentioned later cannot be used.

2.1 Equipment Considerations

Various types of equipment are required to maintain the proper line tension in the
wire. Yard spooling units, spool-off devices, other WL units, manila rope, and
load cell/weight indicators may be used to maintain, control, and monitor line
tension.
2.1.1 Spool-Off Devices or Spooling Tensioning Units

The spool-off device that is optional on most Halliburton Wireline units and
spooling tensioning units have been used to apply tension to the wire. Hydraulic
back pressure is applied to the spool-off device to achieve the desired line tension.
Note As the Spool-Off device was not designed for this application, it should be
used sparingly and should never be used for spooling on any wire larger than
.108 in. (2.74 mm) diameter.
2.1.2 Other Wireline Service Units

Other wireline service units are generally used when switching out wire between
units, or when it becomes necessary to achieve a higher line tension that the stor-
age spool is capable of handling. In this case, the wire is first spooled onto another
wireline unit at a tensile load that will not cause damage to the wire or storage
spool. It is then spooled onto the service unit at the desired wireline tension from
the first unit. Hydraulic back pressure or braking on the wireline drum is used to
achieve the proper line tension.
To help assure the longest possible life of wirelines, care should always be taken
to keep the wire clean, to minimize stress on the wire, and to protect it from
mechanical damage. Because the operating characteristics of oil and gas well
wireline work are inherently destructive to wire, regular preventive maintenance
will help extend the life of the wire and detect any potential for problems before
they result in wire filure downhole.
Figure 1

2.1.3 Manila Rope

Manila rope has been used successfully to apply tension to the wire. Tension is
applied to the wire by braiding the wire into the rope. Tension is adjusted by add-
ing or taking off braids. Water or oil must be used on the rope to prevent excessive
heat build up and binding of the rope to the wire. The rope must be securely
anchored.
In some cases, manila rope is used in conjunction with one of the other line ten-
sional systems to achieve the desired tension. In this case, just enough hydraulic
back pressure is applied to the storage spool to keep the wire in tension. The
remaining tension is made up by braiding the wire into the rope. This is especially
helpful when working with storage spools where the wire is loosely wrapped and
too much line tension will cause the wire to bury itself into remaining wire on the
spool.
2.1.4 Load Cell/Weight Indicator

To ensure that the proper tension is being maintained on the wire when spooling,
a load cell/weight indicator system should be used. As the wireline builds up on
the drum, adjustments to the line tensional system may be required. This is best
observed and controlled by using a load cell and weight indicator.
2.2 Spooling Methods

There are several acceptable methods used to spool wire onto a unit:
2.2.1 Spooling 90o Between Units

With this method, the storage spool is placed on the spool-off device of another
unit or on a spooling unit. The wireline service unit is placed at a right angle (90o)
from the spooling unit. Line tension is maintained by adjusting the relief valve on
the spool-off device or spooling unit. A conventional load cell is placed between
the units so the line tension can be monitored during the spooling operation. The
units should be approximately 25 ft. (7.62 m) to 50 ft. (15.24 m) away from the hay
pulley/load cell, which must be securely anchored.
2.2.2 Spooling Between Units Side By Side

This method is similar to the previous one, with the exception that the spooling
unit is placed to the side of the wireline service unit. With this method an addi-
tional hay pulley and anchor point is required. Again, the units should be located
approximately 25 ft. (7.62 m) to 50 ft. (15.24 m) from the hay pulley. This method
affords better communication and visibility between the spooling unit and the
wireline service unit.
2.2.3 Spooling Direct

An alternative method for spooling on wire is to spool directly from the spooling
unit to the wireline service unit. With this method, a combination depth measure-
ment/load cell counter system is required to monitor line tension. The spooling
unit is placed approximately 25 ft. (7.62 m) to 50 ft. (15.24 m) directly in front of
the wireline service unit and the wire is spooled directly onto the service unit.

2.2.4 Spooling Using the Same Unit

Another acceptable method is to use the spool-off device on the same unit. With
this method the hay pulley/load cell is anchored approximately 25 ft. (7.62 m) to
50 ft. (15.24 m) from the unit. Line tension is controlled by adjusting hydraulic
back pressure to the spool-off device and/or use of a rope. Using the conventional
mechanical load cell/weight indicator system will give an inaccurate line tension
reading.
Note As the spool-off device was not designed for this application, it should be
used sparingly and should never be used for spooling on any wire larger than.108
in. (2.74 mm) diameter.
2.2.5 Spooling Direct from Storage Spool

This method is generally used when none of the other methods can be used or
when on location where field replacement of the wire on the unit is required. With
this method, the storage spool is laid on its side over a stake driven into the
ground. (In an offshore application a bar, stem, pipe, etc. should be welded to the
deck of the platform.) Rope is used to maintain the proper tension in the line.
3.0 Procedure
1. Select the proper wire for the intended application. (Refer to Technical Section
SL 4.1 for the proper selection of wire for different well environments, condi-
tions, and strength requirements.)
2. Storage Spool Requirements:
•Storage spools may either be made of wood or steel. Check the condition of
the storage spool to ensure that it can be used safely during the spooling
operation.
The spool should be mechanically sound without any loose parts that could fly off
while spooling.
•The wire on the spool should be smooth wrapped and reasonably tight on
the spool to prevent burying of the wire during the spooling process.
Note If the wireline on the storage spool is too loose, then it is recommended
that it be spooled onto a regular wireline drum first at a tension that will not allow
it to bury itself in the spool. The wire can then be transferred over to the wireline
service unit at the proper line tension without the fear of damaging the wire.
3. Wireline Unit Drum Requirements:

•Check the condition of the drum. It should be in good mechanical working
condition. The core surface should be smooth and straight. The flanges must
be perpendicular to the drum core. There should be no visible cracks in core,
flanges, shafts, or the core/flange or flange/shaft interface.
•The drum should be checked to determine if there is sufficient capacity to
handle the wire length requirements. Refer to Reel Capacity Calculations in
Section 4.9.

•The drum should be checked to determine if it has sufficient strength to han-

dle the wireline load requirements.
CAUTION Premature drum failure can result from using the wrong wire size on a drum. .
4. Determine the line tension requirements for the line being placed on the unit.
The line tension that should be maintained while spooling on the wire is 20%
of the minimum breaking strength of the wire.
5. Using one of the methods described earlier, string the wire between the ser-
vice unit and the spooling system being used with the proper hay pulley/
weight indicator arrangement.
6. Ensure that the wire is placed in the counterhead assembly and zero the
counter. This will allow for the wire to be counted as it is placed on the unit.
(Remember that the counter will be counting backwards when placing wire
on the unit. If using a panel-mounted Advanced Measurement System (AMS),
reverse the count direction switch. After spooling, return count direction
switch to original setting.)
7. Secure the wire to the drum through the hole provided on reel. A loop can be
tied in the wire or around the disc from an old knot type rope socket,
Ref: Halliburton Part No. 43B3, SAP #101017067, to secure the wire to the
drum.
8. Using a wooden mallet or piece of wood with a hammer, tap the first wrap of
wire tightly against the flange. Continue to periodically tap additional wraps
of wire over toward the flange, while spooling on the bed wrap. This ensures
that the bed wrap does not have any gaps. DO NOT use a metal punch or
hammer, as wire could be damaged. Make sure that the predetermined line
tension is being maintained on the unit and spool on a minimum of 2 smooth
wraps on the core of the drum, including the bed wrap. After 2 smooth wraps,
the wire should be spooled on at random making sure that it is fairly smooth.
Allow for at least 1/2 inch of freeboard on the flanges to prevent the wire from
falling off the drum.
Note The 2 smooth bed wraps have been arbitrarily picked as the Halliburton
standard. This will flag Halliburton wireline operators that they are approaching
the end of the wireline.
We do not recommend smooth wrapping slickline all the way up on the

drum. Smooth wrapping all the wraps increases the chances for the wire to
unravel when line tension is removed and may allow the wire to bury itself
in the lower wraps under the heavy load.
9. Lubricate each wrap/layer of wire when spooling the wire on the unit. A light
weight oil is recommended for this purpose. If the unit is expected to go off-
shore or it will not be placed into service immediately, it is recommended that
a protective coating of grease or lubricated cheese cloth be placed over the top
layer of wire for corrosion protection. This is especially recommended when
bright steel wireline is being used.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.6: Wire Use and Inspection
SL 1.6: Wire Use and Inspection

1.0 Scope
Proper use and care of wire along with periodic inspection will ensure its integ-
rity, extend its useful life, and help prevent premature failures.

A determination of remaining wire life is very important to wireline service oper-
ations. If the estimated time before failure is inaccurate, costs will rise either due
to premature wire replacement or expensive fishing jobs. Normally, a determina-
tion of wireline integrity, or remaining time before failure, has been based on
visual inspection, operator experience, keeping logs on wire usage, twist tests, or
metallurgical analysis. More recently, a non-destructive Eddy Current inspection
method has been developed to find defects, flaws, or wear in the wireline. It may
be used both to inspect new wire as it is originally spooled onto the unit and peri-
odically to inspect for wear and corrosion effects on existing wire.
1. Visual Inspection
Several nonscientific methods are commonly used to determine wire integrity, or
remaining wireline lift. The most common is a visual inspection of the wireline.
The wire is visually examined for pitting or mechanically produced damage, or it
is measured with calipers. Unfortunately, this will only find defects capable of
being detected with the naked eye. In addition, when moving the wire is normally
traveling at a high rate of speed. This makes it very difficult, if not impossible, to
visually inspect the wire. Another common visual inspection method is to observe
the wire’s springiness or tendency to form coils when relaxed. Work-hardened
wire tends to lay more flat with fewer coils. However, this type of examination
requires that the wire be stopped and have no tension on it. This only allows
examination of a small portion of the total length of the wire. Also, some of the
newer, more exotic wirelines do not react in the same way as bright steel wire-
lines.
2. Wire Use Log Book

Another method used by wireline specialists to estimate the remaining wire left is
to maintain a log book showing the number of cycles on the wire, the amount of
jarring, and the loads placed on the wire. Wireline replacement is then based
solely on some established norm for maximum allowable wire use. Unfortunately,
the estimation of wireline integrity based on its history can be inaccurate because
of many varying factors. They can easily lead to either underestimating or overes-
timating the remaining wireline lift. However, a written history of wire usage can
be quite useful, and keeping a log book is recommended.
Some companies require replacement of wireline based solely on either the time
of service or the number of operations performed. If the wireline being used is
inexpensive and most of the wells and operations are the same, this method can
prove to be cost effective. However, this practice can easily lead to an inaccurate
estimation or remaining wireline life.

3. Twist/Torsion Test
API-9A discusses a method to determine the relative wire fatigue or life of bright
steel wire. In this method, a twist test apparatus is used to twist a specified length
of wire under a specific load to the point of failure. A minimum number of twists
of the wire corresponding to the API-9A or manufacture’s specifications must be
achieved or the wire is considered fatigued or near the end of its useful life. The
wire twist test is a destructive test, so it cannot be used to inspect the entire length
of wire; therefore the condition of the wire further into the spool remains
unknown with this method of test.
A copy of API Specification 9A, “Specifications for Wire Rope,” can be ordered
from the API. Their Internet page is at http://www.api.org/. The web page for
finding and ordering API documents over the Internet is at
http://www.cssinfo.com/apigate.html.
Documents also can be ordered by mail:

American Petroleum Institute
Order Desk
1220 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 2005-4070
USA
Or the document can be ordered by telephone:

Call (202) 682-8375, 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Eastern Time.
4. Metallurgical Analysis
If requested, a metallurgical analysis can be performed on a sample of wireline.
This will involve the API 9A twist test mentioned above, tensile strength tests,
and microscopic examination of the wire’s metallic structure to look for impuri-
ties, inclusions, corrosion, and fatigue fractures. Unfortunately, this is a destruc-
tive examination and only examines a small portion of the wire. Portions of the
wireline further into the spool may have been subjected to many more cycles over
the sheaves during jarring and may, therefore, be closer to failure. As with the
twist test examination of the wire, further into the spool is not possible as these
tests will destroy the wire being tested.
5. Wireline Inspection Instrument

While not as thorough as a complete metallurgical analysis, the Halliburton Wire-
line Inspection Device provides a portable, nondestructive, on-the-spot method of
examining the entire length of the wire for defects. The inspection method indi-
cates manufacturing defects, pitting, mechanical damage, necked areas and cracks
in both ferrous and non-ferrous metal wires from .092 in. to .125 in. OD.
The system consists of the Eddy Current Inspection Instrument, an AC adapter/

charger and connecting cable in a carrying case, and hardware for mounting the
inspection coil to the wireline unit’s depth counter. A different coil is required for
each wire size and is ordered separately. The instrument can be programmed for
various wires.

For a more in-depth explanation of this wire inspection tool and how it is used,
see the Slickline Manual titled “Eddy Current Tester, Part Number 996.17363.”It
can be found at the Halworld web site that lists Slickline manuals:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_paslines_slickline_manuals.asp.
6. Wire Management Software

A slickline wire management program is available that tracks the life of wireline.
Using an Excel spreadsheet program, the operator records the wire history includ-
ing job details and well environment. The program uses this data to estimate and
to display a graph of the wire’s “used life.” Having the “used life” percentage, the
operator knows when to remove the wireline from service. The program also can
be used to help determine when to make adjustments in the length of the line or
to reverse the line on the wireline unit. By periodically cutting off a few feet of
wireline or reversing the wireline, the operator can increase the useable life of the
overall wire length.
Though the program does not predict the “used life” with 100% accuracy, the pro-
gram will show which wireline sections have been subjected to the highest num-
ber of cycles. Improving distribution of these cycles throughout the wireline is the
key to increasing wireline life. Long term use of the program and periodic testing
of used wireline samples will help improve the accuracy of the wireline manage-
ment program.
The program, instructions for its use, and a sample application can be obtained
from the Slickline Technology group in Carrollton, Texas.
3.0 Procedure
1. Visually inspect all wire the for indications of mechanical damage the first
time it is spooled onto the reel. Refer to Eddy Current Manual, API-9A, wire
management software, and recommended engineering documents.
2. Use Linetrak Eddy Current Inspection Device for microcrack and flaw detec-
tion when deemed appropriate.
4.0 Appendix
Twist/torsion test per API Specification 9A, “Specifications for Wire Rope” (see
above).
Eddy current wire inspection per manual “Eddy Current Tester, Part Number
996.17363” (see above).

4.0 Appendix
Wire Twist/Torsion Test Apparatus - Drawing/Chart
Figure 4.0 - 1 Slickline Management System Wire Tester
Note Cover wire length with safety shield when testing.
Note Use appropriate PPE when using tester.
Tester Specifications
Grade Min Breaking Weight

Min. Twists
Diameter Strength Required
.066 11.62 32 min
.072 13.83 29 min
.082 1239 17.93 26 min
.092 1547 22.58 23 min
29.41 20 min
2109 51.11 19 min
41.68 17 min

Wire Inspection System - Drawing
Instrument
Discontinuity
Wireline
Direction of Motion
Magnetic Field
Coil Assembly

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.7: Wire Failure Procedure
SL 1.7: Wire Failure Procedure

1.0 Scope
As with any other piece of equipment, when wireline fails, a CPI should be gener-
ated, followed by a report of a thorough metallurgical analysis. In order to per-
form this analysis, samples and certain information will be required from the field
location.

In order to properly analyze the cause of wire failure, the field location will need
to generate a CPI that documents not just what was occurring at the time of fail-
ure, but also a general history of the wire. This can be attached or included in the
CPI form. This section will attempt to describe the type of information needed. As
each report will be different, many of the questions asked here are in very general
terms.
The first portion of the report should describe the well on which the failure
occurred, as well as what operation was taking place at the time. Addressing the
following concerns will assist in determining whether the wire was over-stressed
or metallurgically incompatible with the well environment at the time of the fail-
ure. The wellbore environment as described on the next page is particularly
important to the analysis.

Note The following is to serve as a format or checklist of items and information

that needs to be placed in the report submitted to Technology. It is not intended to
be used as a form.
(* and bold print = minimum information required)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Customer: _______________________________________________________
Field Name/Well Name: __________________________________________
Size and type of wireline: __________________________________________
Size of measuring wheel, hay pulley, and stuffing box sheave: __________
________________________________________________________________
* Completion Equipment: _________________________________________
Tool String Configuration__________________________________________
Type of Well: _____________________________________________________

(gas, oil, injection, storage)
Artificial Lift Method: _____________________________________________

(if any)
WELL CONDITIONS
* Bottom Hole Pressure:________________________

* Bottom Hole Temperature: ____________________
* Wellhead Pressure: __________________________
* Wellhead Temperature: _______________________
Production Rates:Oil: _____________Gas:______________
Gas Condensate: ____________ Water: ____________
WATER ANALYSIS (Attach report if available)
Is Produced Water Formation Water?_____________

Or Condensed Water? ______________
* Chloride Content: ___________________________

* Acidity (pH): ________________________________
Bicarbonate Content: ___________________________
* Oxygen Content: ____________________________
(if injection well)

GAS ANALYSIS (Attach report if available)
* CO2 Concentration: __________________________

* H2S Concentration: __________________________
* Oxygen Concentration: _______________________
(if gas injection or storage well)
* Free Sulfur: _________________________________
* Mercury:____________________________________
Other Chemicals: ______________________________
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
What was the operating depth at the time of failure? __________________
Describe the operation at the time of failure: _________________________

________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Was heavy jarring involved? _______________________________________
What was the approximate load on the wire at the time of failure? ______
Where did the wire break (i.e.,on the surface at the hay pulley, at a certain down-
hole depth, etc.)? _________________________________________________
Were corrosion inhibitors present in the wellbore? If yes, list type. ______
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Did the wire contact acidizing fluids? If yes, list acid type and concentration:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Corrosion history of this or similar wells?____________________________

________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Describe the condition of the wire. (How old? Stored unprotected for a long
period of time? Exposed to salt water for long period of time?, etc.): _____
________________________________________________________________

3.0 Procedure
1. Mark failed end of wire by wrapping a piece of tape approximately 6 in. from
the failed end. If the end that was left in the well is recovered, mark each end
of failed wire as “In Hole” or “Out of Hole.”
2. Cut off between 6 and 10 ft of wire from the failure point.
Note Avoid wiping down wire because the well bore fluid residue on the wire
may give the metallurgist a clue as to failure mechanism.
3. Coil up wire and place in air tight plastic bag (freezer-type or something simi-
lar).
4. Answer questions from above and provide as much well information as possi-
ble.
5. Forward wire and documentation to Technology in Carrollton, Texas, USA
and include a copy of the CPI. Note the urgency of getting a report back and
provide local contact person’s name, phone no., fax no., Memo ID, etc.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.8: Selection and Use of Lubricator Equipment
SL 1.8: Selection and Use of Lubricator Equipment

1.0 Scope
Wireline lubricator equipment are critical pressure-containing components. Lubri-
cator equipment is often referred to as pressure control equipment. Proper selec-
tion, use, and maintenance of this equipment is essential in the safe and successful
completion of wireline operations performed under pressure.

Lubricator equipment is composed of tubular pressure-containing equipment
used to allow running a string of wireline tools into a well under pressure. There
are numerous components available, each with a specific function. Each of these
components will be discussed at length in succeeding sections of this manual.
However, certain general rules apply to all lubricator equipment.
3.0 Procedure
Each piece of Halliburton lubricator equipment must be clearly stamped with the
part number, working pressure, and type of service. In addition, each piece will be
color coded as per ES-C-62. A 12 in.wide painted bank indicative of the working
pressure will be placed near the upper end of each piece of lubricator equipment.
If the piece of equipment is approved for use in H2S or cold weather service, an
additional 4 in. wide green or brown band, respectively, will be centered in the 12
in. band.
As a further precaution against confusing H2S and standard service equipment,

most sour service equipment has Halliburton quick union (QUN) connections
that have threads that are incompatible with standard (sweet) services QUN’s.
Any sour service lubricator equipment requiring standard service QUN threads
will be a special order.
Note Halliburton and Bowen quick unions are not compatible and may not be
mixed. The lengths and ID of each piece of lubricator equipment must be carefully
noted to ensure its suitability for each wireline operation to be performed.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.9: Wellhead Connection
SL 1.9: Wellhead Connection

1.0 Scope
Wellhead connections, whether threaded or flanged, are critical pressure contain-
ing components.
2.0 General Informaion

The type of tree connection to be used must be determined during the pre-job
planning stage. The use of flanged tree connections are preferred; however, cus-
tomer requirements may at times dictate the use of threaded (screw-in) tree con-
nections.
Threaded Tree Connections

Threaded tree connections are not allowed for working pressures greater than
5,000 psi. Threaded tree connections can be used for H2S service only with the
Division Manager’s approval. Threaded tree connections with line pipe (LP)
threads can only be used for working pressures less than 3,000 psi, and then only
with the Division Manager’s approval. Threaded tree connections with non-upset
(NU) threads can only be used for working pressures less than 5,000 psi, and then
only with the Division Manager’s approval. Threaded tree connections with exter-
nal-upset (EU) or premium (VAM, Buttress, etc.) threads can be used for working
pressures up to 5,000 psi.
Flanged Tree Connections

Flanged tree connections must be used for working pressures above 5,000 psi.
During the pre-job planning stage, the flange size should be noted. A new ring
gasket of the proper size should be used each time.
All flanges should be color-coded per ESC-62, ESC-115-63, and CPS010 to reflect
pressure rating and service and both flanges and tree connections should be
tested and inspected. The flanges should have a metal tag attached with a prop-
erty number, which all testing and inspection will be recorded against. Threaded
tree connections should be particularly well inspected for thread condition and
any deterioration due to wrench marks.
3.0 Procedure
1. Check to ensure that threads or flange is the same as the wellhead upon
arrival on location.
2. Confirm that connection is marked with latest test date.
3. Confirm that proper quick union is being used for well application and pres-
sures.
4. Visually inspect tree connection for wear and cracks.
5. Inspect Quick Union Threads and Seal bore for wear, and clean as necessary.
6. Clean out threads on tree or flanged ring groove before installing threaded or
flanged connections respectively.
7. Make up tree connection to wellhead.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.9: Wellhead Connection
4.0 Appendix
Refer to CPS 010.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.10: Pump-In or Flow Tee
SL 1.10: Pump-In or Flow Tee

1.0 Scope
Pump-In or Flow Tees are considered critical pressure-containing components
and are used to facilitate the flow of fluids into and out of the well bore through
the lubricator stack.

If it is anticipated that a well must be pumped into or flowed back during wireline
operations and the wells flowline connection cannot be used, a flow tee should be
utilized. The flow tee should be placed below the wireline valve and should have
a working pressure equivalent to that of the rest of the lubricator equipment. Flow
tees are available for almost any specifications with Halliburton Quick Union
Connections (QUN) connections at either end.
Flow tees are used to prevent pumping or flowing through the wireline valve,
thereby eliminating any unnecessary corrosion or erosion. At least one quick-act-
ing valve, such as a Halliburton Lo-Torque valve, should be used. A hammer
union half is usually made up to the valve to facilitate quick rig up of flow or
pump in lines to the flow tee*. The ID of the flow tee should be noted so that an
unanticipated restriction is not created.
Refer to Rigup Guidelines for Pump-In Subs in Technology Bulletin CPS 023.
3.0 Procedure
1. Confirm compatibility of QUN’s with other lubricator equipment.
2. Confirm that Pump-In/Flow Tee is marked with latest test date.
3. Visually inspect for cracks, wire tracking, unusual wear in bore, QUN seal
area, QUN connections, and o-ring groove on QUN pin end. Replace o-ring as
necessary. Refer to CPS 010 for inspection guidelines.
4. Inspect hammer union, seal area, and replace as necessary.
5. If equipped with valve, ensure that valve is functional. Lubricate as necessary.
6. Make up pump-in tee onto tree connection or lubricator riser above the well-
head.
Note The pump-in tee should be placed below the Wireline Valve (WLV) to pre-
vent any flow through the valve.
4.0 Appendix

Flowback Operations
CAUTION
February 4, 2000
Wireline BOP’s (swabbing) 2 X 1 / Swing assembly
Blanking Cap (flowback) must be supported in Gas
some manner. Adjustable Choke Buster
Short Swing or 5’ loop
Pump-in Sub
2 X 1 Valve Any configuration of loops,

Tree Connection swings and straight
CAUTION Swab Tank

Secure flowback iron to
Swab Valve swab tank with chain
Halliburton
CAUTION
Flow Line Secure flowback iron to flow
line with chain if possible
Top Master
Chicksan
CAUTION
Bottom Master Secure with chain, flowback iron
to the deck/ground in at lease
two points. If possible at each 3" Discharge
connection
TREE
Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas)

1-29
Flowback Operations
CAUTION
February 4, 2000
Wireline BOP’s (swabbing) 2 X 1 / Swing assembly
Blanking Cap (flowback) must be supported in
some manner.
Short Swing or 5’ Loop
Pump-in Sub
2 X 1 Valve
Tree Connection
Any configuration of loops,

swings and straight
Swab Valve
CAUTION
Secure flowback iron to flow
Flow Line
Top Master
Chicksan CAUTION
Secure flowback iron with a chain to
the deck/ground in at lease
two points. If possible chain Production Test
at each connection Equipment
Bottom Master
Halliburton
TREE

1-30
Flowback Operations

Swabbing or Cirulating If possible go to the production system when swabbing or cirulating a well
Rigging up surface equipment on tree

1 If possible, rig up remote ESD
2 Secure tree connection on well head
3 Position pump-in sub on top of tree connection
4 Position Wireline BOP’s on top of pump-in sub
5 Position lubricator on top of Wireline BOP’s for swab operations.
6 Position Blanking Cap on top of tree connection for Cirulating Operations.
Rigging up Surface Flowback Equipment.

Pump-in sub - Chicksan - Adjustable Choke - Swab Tank
1 Secure 2 X 1 valve to pump-in sub
2 Attach ether short swing or 5’ loop to 2 X 1 valve. The short swing is preferable
CAUTION : The 2 X 1 valve and swing/loop assemble must be supported in some fashion to minimize the hanging weight.
* Supported assembly with a crane
* Supported assembly with a sling from overhead structural supports
* Braced on the deck or ground in a fashion to support the hanging weight.
* Secure vertical run to the flow line or structural support in a fashion to support the hanging weight of the assembly
3 Additional flowback iron may be of any configuration of intragal loops, swings, straights, double threads or double wings.
CAUTION:
* Secure vertical flowback iron to the flowline or a structural support with a chain if possible
* Secure flowback iron to the deck/ground at a minimum of two points with chain. If possible secure with a chain at each connection
* Secure flowback iron to swab tank with chain
Unloading Well (gas or fluids), Plug and Safety Valve Test If possible, go to the production system when unloading
a well or testing a down hole device
1 Secure tree connection on well head
2 Position pump-in sub on top of tree connection
3 Position blanking cap (nite cap) on top of pump-in sub
CAUTION:
* Do not use lubricator on flowback operations
4 Place a pressure gauge into the blanking cap
Rigging up Surface Flowback Equipment.

Pump-in sub - Chicksan - Adjustable Choke - Swab Tank
1 Secure 2 X 1 valve to pump-in sub
2 Attach ether short swing or 5’ loop to 2 X 1 valve. The short swing is preferable
3 Additional flowback iron may be of any configuration of intragal loops, swings, straights, double threads or double wings.
CAUTION:
* Secure vertical flowback iron to the flowline or a structural support with a chain if possible
* Secure flowback iron to the deck/ground at a minimum of two points with chain. If possible secure with a chain at each connection
* Secure flowback iron to swab tank with chain
CAUTION:When rigging down flowback equipment all valve on the tree must be closed. All valves located
within the flowback equipment must be open to insure there is no trapped pressure.
Note:
All flowback equipment / iron must have intregal unions. Proper working pressure must be verified.

Pumping Operations
Pressure Gauge
CAUTION
February 4, 2000
2 X 1 / Swing assembly
Blanking Cap must be supported in
some manner.
Pump-in Sub
2 X 1 Valve
Tree Connection

swings and straight
Swab Valve
CAUTION
Secure flow back iron to flow
CAUTION
Flow Line Secure with chain, flowback iron
Top Master two points. If possible at each
connection High Pressure / High Volume
Pump
Bottom Master
Manifold
Halliburton
TREE

1-33
Pumping Operations
February 4, 2000
Lubricator
CAUTION
2 X 1 / Swing assembly
must be supported in
some manner.
Pump-in Sub
2 X 1 Valve
Tree Connection

swings and straight
Swab Valve
CAUTION
Secure flow back iron to flow
CAUTION
Flow Line Secure with chain, flowback iron
Top Master two points. If possible at each
connection High Pressure / High Volume
Pump
Bottom Master
Manifold
Halliburton
TREE

1-34
Pumping into Well If possible tie pumping iron into the flowline

1) If possible, rig up a remote ESD system
2) Secure tree connection on well head
3) Position pump-in sub on top of tree connection
4) Position Blanking Cap on top of tree conection
5) Insert Pressure Gauge into Blanking Cap
Rigging up Surface Pumping Equipment.

Pump-in sub - Blanking Cap W / Pressure Gauge - Chicksan - Manifold - Chicksan
1) Secure 2 X 1 valve to pump-in sub
2) Attach ether short swing or 5’ loop to 2 X 1 valve. The short swing is preferable
3) Additional pumping iron may be of any configration of intragal loops, swings, straights, double threads or double wings.
CAUTION:
* Secure vertical pumping iron to flow line or structural support with a chain if possible
* Secure pumping iron to the deck/ground at a minimum of two points with chain. If possible secure with a chain at each connection
* Secure manifold to the deck/ground with a chain
Tubing Testing (test tool, cirulating plug or hole finder) If possible tie pumping iron into the flowline

1) If possible, rig up a remote ESD system
2) Secure tree connection on well head
3) Position pump-in sub on top of tree connection
4) Posiition wireline valve on top of pump-in sub
4) Position lubricator on top of wireline valve
5) Insert Pressure Gauge into lubricator
Rigging up Surface Pumping Equipment.

Pump-in sub - Lubricator W / Pressure Gauge - Chicksan - Manifold - Chicksan
1) Secure 2 X 1 valve to pump-in sub
2) Attach ether short swing or 5’ loop to 2 X 1 valve. The short swing is preferable
3) Additional pumping iron may be of any configration of intragal loops, swings, straights, double threads or double wings.
CAUTION:
* Secure vertical pumping iron to flow line or structural support with a chain if possible
* Secure pumping iron to the deck/ground at a minimum of two points with chain. If possible secure with a chain at each connection
* Secure manifold to the deck/ground with a chain
NOTE:
All pumping iron / equipment must have intragal unions. Proper working pressure must be verified.

Kerr Pump
HP Nipple Pressure Gauge Caution:
February 4, 2000
Needle Valve Manifold assembly should be
High Pressure Nipple rigged as close to the tree
Lubricator High Pressure "T" as possible
High Pressure Nipple
Needle Valve High Pressure Inline Check

High Pressure Nipple
High Pressure Connection
Wireline Valve
Tree Connection
1/2" Rubber Hose

Swab Valve
Flow Line
Top Master
Kerr Pump / Mustang Pump
Caution: Halliburton
Do not allow the rubber hose
Bottom Master to rub on sharp objects
TREE

1-36
Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.11: Lubricator Safety Valves
SL 1.11: Lubricator Safety Valves

1.0 Scope
Several lubricator safety valves have been designed and built. They are designed
to maintain pressure control in the event that the tool string becomes lodged
across the wellhead valves as well as the wireline valve.

During wireline operations, the lubricator is normally removed by closing one of
the wellhead valves or the wireline valve, and bleeding off the pressure. However,
if the tool string becomes stuck across the wellhead and the wireline valve, these
valves can no longer be closed. At this point, there are two methods of working on
the well and fishing out the tool string. The most common is to pump into and kill
the well. This will allow the lubricator to be removed and fishing to take place.
Another more efficient method would be to have a lubricator safety (ball) valve
located just below the stuffing box. When the valve is closed, it will cut the wire
and isolate the pressure below. The stuffing box would then be bled down and
removed and additional lubricator placed above the safety valve. After equaliz-
ing the pressure, the valve would be opened and fishing would take place as
usual.
Several design criteria should be considered. The safety valve should be able to
cut the wire without difficulty. It must be rated at the working pressure of the rest
of the lubricator equipment and have close to a full ID, yet be as lightweight and
slim as possible.
Lubricator valves are also used in situations where there is a need for a riser to be
placed on top of the wellhead to ease slickline operations. For example, it may be
safer and easier to rig up the wireline valve through the grating on an upper deck
to facilitate the removal of tools from the lubricator during multiple run opera-
tions. In this case, a riser made up of lubricator sections may be used to bring the
wireline valve up to a safe working level. If this is the case, then a lubricator safety
valve could be added to the stack just above the tree.
3.0 Procedure
Note Refer to CPS 010 for inspection procedures.

2. Confirm that Pump-In/Flow Tee is marked with latest test date.
area, QUN connections, and o-ring groove.
4. Inspect o-ring groove on QUN pin end and replace o-ring as necessary.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.11: Lubricator Safety Valves
5. Make up lubricator valve onto tree connection or lubricator riser above the
wellhead.
Note The lubricator valve should be placed as near to the top of the tree as pos-
sible.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.12: Wireline Valves (BOPs)
SL 1.12: Wireline Valves (BOPs)

1.0 Scope
Since wireline valves are a critical part of a wireline lubricator rig up, it is impera-
tive that they be maintained in excellent condition. It is of vital importance that
the proper wireline valve or combination of wireline valves be selected prior to
rigging up for the wireline job. Proper testing procedures must be observed.

Wireline valves in the lubricator stack are an integral part of the pressure-contain-
ing function of the stack with the additional ability to close off flow from the well
with or without wireline across the rams in the valve. When pressure is bled off
above the closed rams, the valve must have the ability to hold maximum differen-
tial pressure up to the working pressure of the valve and have an equalizing
device to allow for equalizing pressure above the rams prior to reopening them.
Since wireline valves come in many sizes, services, and pressure rating, it is
important that the valve be properly color coded per ESC-62 and ESC 115-63 and
that a metal tag with the properly number of the valve be attached. The scheduled
pressure testing and inspection for this unit will be conducted and recorded
against this property number.
Wireline valves are available to meet almost any specific need. The following table
lists some of the options available.
Sizes 2 1/2” - 6 3/8”

Pressure Rating 5,000 - 20,000 psi WP
Type Service Standard and H2S
No. of Rams 1,2 and 3
Closure Manual or Hydraulic
Material Alloy Steel or Corrosion-
Resistant Alloy
Manual Vs. Hydraulic

•Manual wireline valves are smaller, lighter, and easier to handle. However,
for the larger sizes and/or higher pressure ratings, even with torque reduc-
ers, they are difficult (and slow) to close. Each set of rams should be fully
closed and reopened before the valve is placed on the well.
•Hydraulic wireline valves, although heavier and bulkier than their manual
counterparts, have a great advantage in that they can be shut in from a
remote location. With a properly designed wellhead control panel, the wire-

line valve, as well as other mechanisms, may be controlled from the opera-
tors console. Hydraulic wireline valves can be closed quite rapidly.
Before placing the wireline valve on the well, each set of rams should be actuated
and visually inspected to ensure full closure and opening. Indicator pins should
be operational. NO hydraulic leaks are allowed. The ram stems should be run in
with the rams closed to test the mechanical locking mechanism, and then backed
out.
Dual and Triple Ram Wireline Valves

•Dual and triple ram valves allow the use of more than one type of ram. Three
different types of wireline ram assemblies are available. All are designed to
seal against a differential pressure from the bottom equivalent to the work-
ing pressure of the valve.
The most common type of ram is a blind/slickline ram, This type of ram is
designed to seal as a blind ram if no wire is present, but due to the resilience of the
ram face will also seal with multiple stands of slickline ranging in size from .072
in. to .125 in. The ram body is designed to center the wireline for a better seal.
Braided-line ram elements are designed to seal on braided wireline ranging in
size from 3/16 in. to 9/16 in. Each size braided line requires a different ram element.
Braided-line ram elements will not seal when the wireline is not present. The third
type of ram is a cutter ram. Cutter rams are designed to cut any size wireline
present and then seal against itself as a blind ram.
•Stripping slickline through the ram elements requires no special preparation.

However, if braided line is to be stripped through the rams, grease injection
will be required. Dual and triple wireline valves come with a grease injection
port between the sets of rams. It should be noted that the rams are designed
to hold pressure only from the bottom. Therefore, the lower ram assemblies
must be inverted to hold a grease seal.
Flow Tees
•The grease injection port should not be used as a kill line or a flow-back line.
This will unnecessarily introduce foreign matter into the valve, as well as
cause erosion. If pump-in or flow-back work is anticipated and the flowline-
wellhead connection cannot be used, a flow tee should be installed below the
wireline valve. The flow tee should have at least two properly sized quick-
acting valves, such as Halliburton Lo-Torque valves. Make sure that the flow
tee does not create an unanticipated wellbore restriction.
Emergency Overnight Shut-in
•If the well is to be shut-in overnight with wire in the hole or in the event of
an emergency, the wireline valve rams should be closed on the wire. If possi-
ble, the ram stems on hydraulic wireline valves should be screwed in com-
pletely to provide a mechanical lock. This will prevent loss of well control in
the event of a hydraulic leak.
If hydraulic pressure is lost for any reason prior to closing the rams, the rams can
be closed mechanically using the ram stems. However, the innermost hydraulic
connections may need to be removed before the rams can be closed in this fashion.

Transport and Storage

•For transport, each set of rams should be closed and a layer of oil poured on
top. For storage, the inside of the valve, the QUN connections, and the ram
stems should be greased and the rams should be closed and oiled. During
cleaning, care should be taken to remove all fluids and foreign matter from
the ram bores.
Testing on Location
•Pressure testing of wireline valves on location is becoming a standard proce-
dure. The lubricator equipment is rigged up as usual with the wireline tool
string inside, but the swab valve is left closed. Using either the lubricator
bleed off valve or the flow tee, the equipment is filled with water and/or
glycol/water mix and pressured up to either the maximum anticipated well
pressure or to the working pressure of the equipment. After 3 minutes with
no leaks, the blind rams on the wireline valve are closed and the lubricator is
bled off. It should be noted that braided line-rams will not seal against them-
selves. After 3 minutes with no leaks, the equalizing valve can be used to
bleed-off the pressure under the wireline valve. After closing the equalizing
valve and bleed off valve and ensuring that the rams are completely open,
the swab valve can be slowly opened and wireline operations may proceed.
Note Welding is not permitted on any wireline valve.
Well pressure from either the well currently being worked on or from
another well can be used for pressure testing, but this practice is not recom-
mended. If needed, portable test pumps are readily available.
3.0 Test Procedure BOPs

Prior to operating BOPs, make sure they are secure. Place barriers around work-
ing area, make a PA announcement, and record pressure tests.
CAUTION When operating BOP, ensure hydraulic pressure does not exceed 2,000 psi when
closing rams.
All wireline valves shall be shop tested, maintained, and periodically inspected in
accordance with CPS 010 every 24 months. Also, test records shall maintained.
Ensure that the proper rams and front seal elements are selected to match the wire
size in accordance with the manufacturer’s Basic Design and Maintenance Instruc-
tion (BDMI) or Operating Manual for the particular Wireline Valve model being
used. BDMIs are available from the original manufacturer.
4.0 Appendix
Reference CPS 010.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.13: Pressure Control Equipment and Rig Up
SL 1.13: Pressure Control Equipment and Rig Up

1.0 Scope
The lubricator is considered to be critical pressure-containing equipment. Proper
selection, maintenance, and testing of this equipment is essential to the successful
completion of any wireline operation.

The lubricator is pressure-containing pipe with quick unions that is manufactured
to rigorous standards. It is available in various sizes and pressure ratings for both
standard and H2S service. Each section of lubricator is normally 8 ft. (2.44 m) long.
The lubricator is designed to be a pressure-containing resting place for the wire-
line tool string while well pressure is being equalized or bled off. There must be
enough lubricator to ensure that the bottom of the tool string, as well as any “fish”
recovered from the well, will clear the wellhead and the wireline valve.
The lower section of lubricator will have one or two bleed-off ports with needle
valves. For pressures ratings below 10,000 psi WP, the bleed off ports will nor-
mally have a 1/2” NPT thread with a standard manifold. Above 10,000 psi WP,
each bleed-off port will use an Autoclave (or similar) connection and two Auto-
clave valves. The inner valve will remain open and the outer valve will be used
for bleed-down operations. At times, it may be unnecessary to use a bleed off or
diverter line to prevent uncontrolled escape of well fluids.
Careful pre-job planning is necessary for proper lubricator handling, especially

when using four or more sections. Sufficient space must be available to make up
the lubricator while laying down, or plans should be made to pick up one joint at
a time and assemble the lubricator while hanging. If long made-up sections are to
be lifted, additional support must be supplied to prevent the lubricator from
bending. In addition, a two-wheel trolley is recommended to prevent damage to
the lower most QUN connection.
All lubricator sections must be color-coded to reflect the pressure rating and ser-
vice per ESC-115-67 and ESC-62. Also, each lubricator section must have a metal
tag with the property number, which will have all testing and inspections
reported against. A thread caliper is available to check the condition of the quick
union threads and should be used on a regular basis. (Reference CPS 010.)

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.13: Pressure Control Equipment & Rig Up
3.0 Procedure
1. Select the ID and length of lubricator that will accommodate the length and
OD of all the tools that be run or pulled from the well.
Note Do not use the subsurface safety as the only method to lubricate long
assemblies unless it is protected with a high viscous pill such as K-Max and the
valve has been tested with 0 psi leakage. (See WL 2.30 Running Long Assemblies
With Pressure.)

3. Confirm working pressure and service rating for lubricator is correct.
4. Confirm that lubricator is marked with latest test date.
7. Inspect lifting clamp and move as necessary to facilitate rig up.
8. Use certified sling or strap with sufficient length so as not to interfere with the
stuffing box sheave.
9. Ensure that there is sufficient room on the location to lay our lubricator stack
or make arrangements to make up vertically a section at a time.
10. Make up lubricator stack and back off of each QUN connection slightly while
rigging up, except for the Stuffing Box connection which should be made up
tightly. This is done to prevent the potential rotation of the QUN with the
swiveling of the sheave.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.14: Tool Catchers and Tool Traps
SL 1.14: Tool Catchers and Tool Traps

1.0 Scope
Both tool catchers and tool traps are considered critical pressure-containing com-
ponents and are used to capture the tool string in the lubricator stack to prevent it
from falling back down the hole.
2.0 General Information:

Tool Catcher
The tool catcher is placed immediately below the stuffing box and chemical injec-
tion sub. It is designed to latch the fishing neck of the rope socket to prevent the
tool string from falling back downhole in the event that the wire is pulled out of
the rope socket. The catcher is composed of a collet-type catcher and a hydrauli-
cally operated piston used to retract the collet fingers and release the tool string.
Tool catchers are used most often with electric line tool strings containing expen-
sive and extremely fragile logging tools.
Tool Trap
The tool trap is placed immediately above the wireline valve. This device is used
primarily in E-Line/Logging applications to prevent the long logging tools from
inadvertently falling down hole when they are retrieved from the well bore. It is a
manually or hydraulically operated flapper with a slot that is slightly larger than
the wireline. It is opened just before the tool string is lowered into the well and
just before the string is pulled back into the lubricator. The flapper is intended to
prevent any part of the tool string or anything fished from the hole from falling
back out of the lubricator.
3.0 Procedure
3. Confirm that tool trap or pump-in/flow tee is marked with latest test date.
6. If required, make up the tool trap just above the WLV and make up the tool
catcher directly above the top most lubricator section.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.15: Lubricator Purge Valve
SL 1.15: Lubricator Purge Valve

1.0 Scope
Lubricator purge valves are considered critical pressure-containing components
and are used to purge air out of the lubricator stack prior to opening the well.

Prior to performing an on-site hydrostatic test of the lubricator stack, the lubrica-
tor must be filled with water. A purge valve can be placed near the top of the
lubricator stack to allow the air to be purged while the lubricator is being filled.
This is especially helpful when using an extremely long rig up. The purge valve is
placed immediately below the stuffing box and chemical injection sub. The valve
consists of an exhaust port and a plunger, which is moved off-seat by pulling the
rope socket up against it. Relaxing the tension on the wireline allows the plunger
to again form a seal. The pressure test can then be contained as usual. Obviously,
this cannot be used simultaneously with a tool catcher. (See SL 1.35 Lubricator
Auto-Ignition Precautions and Prevention.)
3.0 Procedure
3. Confirm that purge valve is marked with latest test date.
6. If used, make up the purge valve directly above the top most lubricator sec-
tion.
Note The purge valve cannot be used with a tool catcher in the lubricator stack.
7. To activate the purge valve, the rope socket on the tool string must engage the
bottom of the valve plunger and an over-pull of approximately 100 lbs must
be exerted on the valve to open it.
8. To close the purge valve, release the line tension on the tool string, and the
spring in the valve will push the plunger back on seat.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.16: Chemical Injection Sub
SL 1.16: Chemical Injection Sub

1.0 Scope
Chemical injection subs are considered critical pressure-containing components
and are used to allow injection of various types of chemicals onto the wire in the
lubricator stack.

Chemical injection subs are placed immediately below the stuffing box. Injection
subs are designed to lubricate and inhibit the wireline, reduce hydrate formation
at the stuffing box, and wipe off any fluids or abrasives that might damage the
stuffing box packing. They can be used for slickline or for braided line.
A chemical injection sub is composed of a non-energized packing stack immedi-

ately below a chemical chamber with an injection port. The non-energized pack-
ing stack helps support a column of liquid chemical through which the wire must
pass.
3.0 Procedure
3. Confirm that injection sub is marked with latest test date.
6. Inspect and replace internal packing if necessary.
7. If required, make up directly below the stuffing box or grease injection sub
when using braided line.
4.0 Appendix
Ref. SL 4.25 - Chemical Injection Sub List, Equipment Catalog.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.17: Stuffing Boxes
SL 1.17: Stuffing Boxes

1.0 Scope
Stuffing boxes are considered critical pressure-containing components of the
lubricator stack, so it is very important that they be maintained and tested to
ensure proper operation.

A wireline stuffing box is designed to control well pressure up to the working
pressure of the equipment while still allowing the wireline to pass through the
packing. Stuffing boxes are available in sizes and ratings equivalent to the lubrica-
tor equipment.
Each stuffing box must be color-coded to reflect its pressure rating and service per
ESC-62 and ESC-115-63. Also, each stuffing box must marked with its test or prop-
erty number and latest pressure test and date.
The sealing pressure exerted on the wireline by the stuffing box packing is
adjusted using the packing nut. Manual packing nuts are available, but hydraulic
packing nuts are recommended. Hydraulic packing nuts allow remote adjust-
ment, thus eliminating the necessity for climbing equipment.
Stuffing box packing is reamed to suit size of wire being used for job prior to com-
mencement of wireline operations. Various materials are used in the construction
of packing and the packing stack is build to suit the well conditions. A 16-in. stuff-
ing box sheave should be used. Use of the 10-in. sheave greatly reduces the life of
the wireline, especially with the larger sizes. Converting a stuffing box to the
larger size sheave will require the replacement of both the sheave and the sheave
staff.
3.0 Procedure
1. Confirm working pressure and service rating for suffing box is correct.
2. Confirm compatibility of QUN with other lubricator equipment.
3. Confirm that the stuffing box is marked with latest test date.
4. Visually inspect the QUN pin connection and nut. Replace o-ring if necessary.
Periodically remove o-ring from groove and inspect.
5. Visually inspect for wear or wire tracking of the blow-out plunger housing
and plunger. Replace as necessary. Have spare blow-out plunger available.
6. Visually inspect the upper and lower packing glands and replace as necessary.
Have spare upper and lower packing glands available.
Note Hand toolbox should contain proper socket and extension length to reach
up inside the body of the stuffing box in order to replace and inspect the lower
packing gland.
7. Ensure that sheave wheel staff is free to rotate and is not loose on the body
and lubricate as necessary.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.17: Stuffing Boxes
8. Ensure that the sheave wheel moves freely and that it does not have excessive
side-to-side play and lubricate as necessary.
CAUTION Do not remove the sheave staff cross member. Removal of the cross member and
guide from the top of the sheave staff can lead to premature wear on the compo-
nents of the stuffing box. Removing the guide could cause a possible accidental
breaking of the wire if the wire jumps out of the sheave.
9. Periodically remove, clean, and inspect bed valve from stuffing box. Lubricate
and replace as necessary.
Note The stuffing box needs to be maintained properly to ensure that it will
function when needed and not start to leak. If the valve seat get to the point that it
will not seal due to corrosion, the entire stuffing box body will need to be
replaced.
10. Visually inspect and replace worn packing on every job or at least once a day.
Replace sooner if job conditions require it. Ream out packing as necessary to
pass the wire that will be used.
11. Thread wire through the packing nut upper packing gland, packing, and
lower packing gland. Place blow-out plunger on wire and slide up to its seat.
Place plunger housing on the wire and screw into stuffing box housing till it is
snug. Do not put a wrench on it.
12. Once the wire has been threaded through the stuffing box and the rope socket
is attached to the tool string, make up on top of the upper most part of the
lubricator stack assembly. Make up QUN connection snug as this will prevent
the possible rotation while the sheave staff turns.
Note This is the only QUN connection in the stack that should be made up
snug. The QUN nut of the other connections in the stack should be backed off
slightly. This facilitates easier removal of the other QUN connections and helps
the o-rings to energize.
4.0 Appendix
SL 4.17 - Halliburton Quick Union Connections, Equipment Catalog
SL 4.20 - Stuffing Boxes List, Equipment Catalog
SL 4.21 - Hydraulic Packing Nuts, Equipment Catalog
SL 4.22 - Stuffing Box Packing Stacks, Equipment Catalog

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.18: Pack-Offs and Grease Injection Heads
SL 1.18: Pack-Offs and Grease Injection Heads

1.0 Scope
Pack-offs and grease injection heads are used with braided wireline to effect a seal
against well pressure. They are considered critical pressure containing compo-
nents.

Packs-offs/Line Wipers
Pack-offs are also called line wipers, oil-savers, and strippers. They are designed
to seal around the braided line against low wellhead pressures. Most have a rated
working pressure of 5,000 psi, but for extended use the recommended working
pressure is 3,000 psi. They are most commonly used where well pressures are
below 1,500 psi simply to wipe the well fluids from the line.
Line wipers have a single rubber element that is compressed manually or hydrau-
lically against the wireline to effect a seal. With higher pressures, there are two
common methods of failure. First, the pressure tends to extrude the rubber pack-
ing, eventually causing a leak. Second, the pressure will actually penetrate
between the strands of the wireline, bypassing the seal. If leaks occur, it will be
necessary to switch to a grease injection head.
Grease Injection Head

Compressing a rubber element or a packing stack around braided line will form a
pressure seal at low pressures. In fact, if the wireline is stationary, a pressure seal
can be maintained even at pressures above 5,000 psi. However, when the wireline
is moving, wellbore fluids, especially gas, will penetrate the wireline strands and
form a leak. To maintain pressure integrity, a secondary sealing mechanism must
be provided with the use of a grease injection head.
•A grease injection head is a section of lubricator made up of several sleeves

screwed together with specially designed collars. Each sleeve contains a
carefully machined flow tube about 14 in. long. Each flow tube has an ID
that is approximately .004 in. larger than the OD of the wireline. As a general
rule, for working pressures of 10,000 psi or less there are 3 or 4 flow tubes
used. In pressures up to 15,000 psi, there are 4 or 5 flow tubes, and for pres-
sures above 15,000 psi, use 5 or more flow tubes.
Grease is injected at one or more points into the space between the flow tubes and
the wireline at a pressure greater than the wellhead pressure. The grease that does
not remain on or in the wireline returns through a drain line at the top of the
grease head. The flow tubes extend most of the length of the grease head. The vis-
cosity of the grease, combined with the length and close tolerance of the flow
tubes, resists flow and forms a pressure seal.

Checking Cable
When spooling on new braided line, it is recommended that the entire cable be
passed through the correct size flow tube. This will prove that the wireline is not
“bird nested” or oversized. Also, used cable should be checked for uniformity.
When possible, the OD of the cable should be measured with a micrometer on
two axis every 1,000 feet at regular intervals. This should ensure that the flow
tubes are sized correctly. Cable will tend to wear more on the head end causing a
tapering effect. Worn cable must cut off when necessary.
Experience has shown that injecting grease at more than one place along the
grease head provides a more effective pressure seal than does single, point injec-
tion. Therefore, the newer grease head designs have two injection ports with one
drain line at the top end of the grease head. The expended grease is normally con-
taminated and should be collected in a container for disposal.
Not all of the grease will be returned through the drain line. Grease adhering to
the cable will be carried into the wellbore. Grease returns should be carefully
monitored. Worn cable may allow the grease to flow too easily through the
restricted ID. When this happens, back pressure may need to be held on the return
line to maintain a pressure seal.
The grease that is used should be carefully chosen for surface temperature and
wellhead conditions. Wellbore fluid contamination and high surface temperature
will both act to reduce the grease viscosity, which can affect the grease seal. On the
other hand, grease used with extremely low surface temperatures should be care-
fully chosen to prevent the grease from actually becoming a solid. If there is any
doubt about the suitable of a particular grease, supplier should be contacted
before rigging up the grease and a field test performed.
A line wiper is placed at the top of the grease head. The lne wiper is normally left
open, but it can perform several functions. First, it can provide a pressure seal
while the line is stationary and/or while regaining the grease seal. When environ-
mental considerations or cleanliness is a concern, it can be used to wipe any
excess grease or well fluids from the wireline when coming out of the hole.
Finally, the line wiper can be used as a temporary brake to slow cable movement
when the tool string weight is insufficient. To maintain weight on cable when well
pressure is capable of blowing wire up through grease head especially if tool
string lost in hole and only cable returned to surface.
Increased tool weight will be necessary to start the tool string into the hole due to
the necessity to overcome the well pressure and the friction due to the grease (and
possible the line wiper). Additional weight bar should be included during pre-job
planning. If electric line tools are to be used, a dummy run is strongly recom-
mended to make sure enough weight bar is being used prior to making the electri-
cal connections.

3.0 Procedure
1. Confirm working pressure and service rating for packoff/line wiper or grease
head is greater than the maximum wellhead shut in pressure.
2. Confirm compatibility of QUN with other lubricator equipment.
3. Confirm that the line wiper or greasehead is marked with latest test date.
4. Visually inspect the QUN pin connection and nut. Replace o-ring if necessary.
Periodically remove o-ring from groove and inspect. (CPS-010)
5. Visually inspect for wear or wire tracking of the guides in the line wiper.
6. Visually inspect and replace wiper rubber as necessary.
7. For grease seal operations, caliper the wire to determine size of grease tubes to
be used.
8. Visually inspect grease tubes for wire tracking and confirm ID marking on
tubes by calipering the ID of the tubes at each end.
9. Use at least 3 sections of grease tubes when working with pressures up to
10,000 psi when running 3/16in. braided or dye-form line. Use at least 4 grease
tubes when operating this size wire up to 15,000 psi.
10. If so equipped, ensure that sheave wheel staff is free to rotate and is not loose
on the body and lubricate as necessary. Ensure that the sheave wheel moves
freely and that it does not have excessive side to side play and lubricate as
necessary.
Note Using a sheave in conjunction with the line wiper or grease head is not rec-
ommend for heavy jarring operations, because as it places too much side loading
on the lubricator stack. The preferred method is to hang a sheave (crown sheave)
in the block on a rig or use an auxiliary line on a crane or mast unit.
CAUTION If using a crown sheave, ensure that the crane or mast can handle the load that
will be exerted. The hook load on the sheave will be twice the load that is indi-
cated on the weight indicator.
11. Inspect the ball check and seat to ensure proper function.
Note Most current designs of grease heads incorporate a ball check to seal off
against well pressure if the wire is not present through the bore of the head.
12. Thread wire through the guides and packing rubber of the line wiper. If using
a grease head, thread the wire through the grease head, packing nut upper
packing gland, packing, and lower packing gland. Place blow-out plunger on
wire and slide up to its seat. Place plunger housing on the wire and screw into
stuffing box housing till it is snug. Do not put a wrench on it.

13. Once the wire has been threaded through and the rope socket is attached to
the tool string, make up on top of the uppermost part of the lubricator stack
assembly. Make up the QUN connection snugly because this will prevent the
possible rotation while the sheave staff turns.
Note This is the only QUN connection in the stack that should be made up
snug. The QUN nut of the other connections in the stack should be backed off
slightly. This facilitates easier removal of the other QUN connections and helps
the o-rings to energize.
4.0 Appendix
SL 4.5 - Braided Line Information
SL 4.16 - Halliburton Quick Union Connections
SL 4.22 - Braided Line/E-Line Grease Head

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.19: Chemical and Grease Injection Systems
SL 1.19: Chemical and Grease Injection Systems

1.0 Scope
Chemical and grease injection systems are used to inject grease, chemicals, and
fluids into WPCE.

High pressure pumps inject grease into grease heads to effect a viscous seal on
braided line aginst well pressure.
High pressure pumps inject chemicals into the wellbore to prevent formation of
hydrates and to inject inhibitors for corrosion protection.
The pumps can be air, electrical, or hydraulical driven. The wireline operator con-
trols injection pressure and rate as required for well conditions.
3.0 Procedure
1. Confirm hoses and all connections are rated for the WP.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.20: Slickline Hay Pulley and Braided Line Ground
SL 1.20: Slickline Hay Pulley and Braided Line Ground

Block Sheave
1.0 Scope
Hay pulleys and sheaves are used to guide wireline from the wireline unit to the
lubricator. Proper selection of pulleys and sheaves will prevent undue stress on
the wireline.

Slickline
Slickline normally travels horizontally from the wireline unit to the hay pulley/
weight indicator at the base of lubricator. It makes a 90o turn around the hay pul-
ley, travels up the lubricator, and makes a 180obend at the stuffing box to pass into
the lubricator.
The recommended hay pulley is 16-in. diameter. For .092-in. and smaller, 8-in. hay
pulleys may be used.
More unusual rigups may necessitate the use of several hay pulleys to achieve a
90o bend at the weight indicator and to prevent the wireline from scraping on
obstructions. If a 90o angle at the hay pulley/weight indicator is not possible, a
correction factor must be applied to the weight indication.
Braided Line
Braided line is most commonly run using a floor sheave and a crown block
sheave. Slickline service still normally uses weight indicator at floor sheave. (Most
logging units have a weight indicator built into the levelwind assembly. This elim-
inates the need for a weight indicator to be attached to the floor sheave hay pul-
ley). a crown block sheave is commonly used instead of having a sheave attached
to the lubricator.
3.0 Procedure
1. Visually inspect the hay pulley or ground block sheave for excessive wear and
repair as necessary before rigging up. Lubricate if needed.
2. Attach to the tree using certified strap, chain, or sling and secure. If weight
indicator is used, attach between sheave and tree.
Note The newer 16 in. slickline hay pulleys have a tendency to lay over when
little or no line tension is on the line. This can cause the wire to jump from the
sheave and possibly be damaged. To prevent this, a hole in the frame of the
sheave may be used to attach a soft line higher up on the tree to prevent the
sheave from falling over. Also, a sheave stand is also available to help in rigging
up the wire and will also help keep the sheave in the upright position.
3. Thread wire around the sheave wheel and secure back to the guide using a
spring-loaded latch pin. Ensure that the pin is properly seated and that the pin
spring keeps the latch down pin engaged.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.20: Slickline Hay Pulley and Braided Line Ground
4.0 Appendix
SL 4.13 - Weight Indicators
SL 4.34 - Hay Pulleys and Ground Block Sheaves

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.21: Weight Indicators Selection and Use
SL 1.21: Weight Indicators Selection and Use

1.0 Scope
A weight indicator is necessary for all wireline operations. It indicates the amount
of tension being applied to the wireline at the surface.

General
There are two types of line tension measurement system, hydraulic and electronic.
Slickline Operations
When using slickline, or when using braided line with a slickline-type wireline
unit, the most common type of weight indicator is a Martin-Decker hydraulic
type. The load cell is placed between the wellhead and the hay pulley (see appen-
dix). The indicator is calibrated in such a way that the wireline must make a 90°
bend around the hay pulley. If the wireline makes an angle other than 90°, the
indicated load will not be correct and a correction factor from the Technical Sec-
tion must be applied. (See 4.13 and line tension correction table.)
Two Wheel Systems

Two wheel systems used today combine depth and tension measurement. The
load cell for the Halliburton Advance Measurements System is described in Sec-
tion 3.7.
3.0 Procedure
1. Hydraulic Weight Indicators
•Inspect weight indicator to insure that proper gap is between the two halves
of the hydraulic load cell.
•Martin Decker Adjustment - If the gap is not correct add Martin Decker
Weight Indicator Oil to the system. Crack open the bled port on the load cell
and connect small hand pump and reservoir to the indicator dial part of the
system. Fill reservoir and pump up hydraulic line while bleeding air out of
the load cell bled port. Continue until all air is out of the system and shut
bled port. Continue to pump up on load cell until proper gap is achieved
and close valve on the dial indicator.
•Adjust the sensitivity of the load cell by utilizing the dampening valve on the
dial indicator.
•Attach the load cell between the hay pulley and tree using a certified strap,
chain, or sling and secure. Arrange the hay pulley and weight indicator to

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.21: Weight Indicators Selection and Use
create a 90° angle of the wire between the slickline service unit and the stuff-
ing box sheave.
Note Any angle other then 90o will create a false reading of line tension on the
weight indicator dial. (See attached correction chart for varying load angles other
then 90o.)
•Ensure that the hydraulic line between the load cell and weight indicator is
not kinked and that nothing is allowed to sit on top of it.
4.0 Appendix
SL 4.13 - Weight Indicators
SL 4.34 - Hay Pulleys and Ground Block Sheaves

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.22: Wireline Tool String Selection and Use
SL 1.22: Wireline Tool String Selection and Use

1.0 Scope
One of the most important criteria for successful job completion is the selection of
the proper wireline tool string.

There is no one correct tool string configuration. Sizes, lengths, and placement of
different parts of the tool string will be based on wellbore design and experience.
Careful pre-job planning is essential for successful job completion.
Tool String Components

Rope Sockets
There are two types of rope sockets currently in use. Each is used to connect the
wireline to the rest of the tool string and to provide a clean fishing neck to aid in
recovering lost tool strings. They can also be used in the middle of the tool string
with a pulling tool to provide an emergency release point.
The knot-type rope socket has a button around which the wireline is actually tied.
This knot creates a weak spot in the wire at the top of the rope socket. During a
recent pull test using two knot-type rope sockets and a length of wire, the wire
parted at one of the rope sockets every time. This type of rope socket is often used
by some operators to deliberately create a weak spot. If the wire parts, there will
be a clean rope socket looking up. Of course, this reduces the amount of tension
that can be pulled on the wire.
On the no-knot rope, the wire is bent around a wedge that fits inside a sleeve and
then inside the body of the rope socket. Since the wire is not wrapped around
itself, the wire’s strength is only slightly reduced. There is still a slight weak spot
at the top of the rope socket, but it is not enough to depend on the wire parting at
that point every time. Releasable rope sockets are also available.
Quick Connects
The quick connect system is an addition to the normal tool string which allows an
extremely rapid exchange of tools or tool strings at the wellhead without the use
of pipe wrenches. It is most commonly composed of a male and female half with
threaded ends that are made up to two parts of the tool string. However, if
desired, the two halves can be machined on the ends of the various tool string
components. The two halves are made up by pushing the male end up into the
female end and turning one-quarter turn. The male end is held in place by a
spring-loaded latch. Testing has shown the quick connect shoulders to be stronger
than the threads in the remainder of the tool string.
Stem
The Stem, or weight bar, is normally available in 11/4 in., 11/2 in., 17/8 in. and
21/8 in. OD and in lengths of 2 ft., 3 ft. and 5 ft.. It is normally made of alloy steel,
but is also available with fillings of lead or depleted uranium for additional

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.22: Wireline Tool String Selection and Use
weight. Each piece of stem has a fishing neck at the top sized to fit a pulling tool.
If the fishing neck or the threads become worn or damaged, the piece of stem can
be remachined.
Stem is most often used to provide weight to the tool string. This weight is neces-
sary to counteract the force due to the well pressure acting on the cross-sectional
area of the wire and the friction of the stuffing box packing. It also helps the tool
string slide down an inclined section of the wellbore. The roller stem, or stem with
wheels, is sometimes used to extend the reach of wireline tools in a deviated well.
The stem is normally place immediately above the jars to provide an increased
impact force during jarring. Sometimes the stem is also placed below the jars dur-
ing fishing or bailing to provide a stand-off distance to prevent the jars from
becoming stuck.
Accelerators
An accelerator is essentially a large spring that is most often used in conjunction
with pipe during jarring with hydraulic jars. Its purpose is to prevent the impact
load of the jars from being cushioned by the mass of the pipe. They are used much
less frequently with wireline since the wire’s smaller mass and greater stretch
coefficient causes very little damping effect.
3.0 Procedure
1. Select proper tool string make-up for operation.
2. Select amount of stem necessary to overcome friction and well pressure. Uti-
lize “Stem Weight Vs. Pressure” chart and/or rule of thumb calculations to
determine needed stem weight. (Ref. SL 4.38 & SL 4.53)
3. Inspect box and pin (sucker rod) connections. If make-up is loose, do not run.
Measure the total play between the male and female by pushing in the male as
far as possible and pushing in as far as possible, using a feeler gage to measure
the total play. Any play larger than .03 is cause to replace one or both parts.
The parts can be mixed and matched as long as the play is not greateter than
.03. Replace as necessary (Ref. SL 4.42). If using new quick connections,
inspect and ensure that make-up is tight.
4. Make up threaded connections using 18 in. or 24 in. pipe wrenches to ensure
that they are tight before running in hole.
5. If heavy jarring is required, retighten tool string connections after each run.
4.0 Appendix
SL 4.36 - Rope Sockets
SL 4.37 - Stem
SL 4.38 - Stem Weight Vs. Pressure Chart
SL 4.39 - Knuckle Joints
SL 4.40 - Jars
SL 4.41 - Accelerators
SL 4.42 - Tool String (Sucker Rod) Connections
SL 4.43 - Quick Disconnects & Tools
SL 4.53 - Handy Formulas and Data

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.23: “Tool Box” Safety Meetings
SL 1.23: “Tool Box” Safety Meetings

1.0 Scope
Personnel safety is a top priority for Halliburton. “Tool Box” Safety Meetings are
to be held daily or for each job when switching locations and recorded on the field
ticket/M.S.O.

“Tool Box” or “Tail Gate” safety meeting as they are sometimes called, are a
means to inform all personnel on location of the potential hazards involved in the
operation and to raise everyone's awareness of safety before the work com-
mences. In some cases, it may be necessary to conduct the meeting before spotting
the equipment on location. This should be the case when H2S is present or other
job-site hazards are known before the job begins.
The “Tool Box” safety meeting must be held upwind of the well and within easy
access of an escape route if the well is known to have H2S present in sufficient
enough quantities to be harmful to life or if other conditions warrant.
Topics to be covered:
• Review of unsafe practices

• Dangerous situations
• Prior tour report when two crews are involved
• Day’s/Job plan of action
• Job assignment in case of an emergency
• Selection of meeting place in case of an emergency
• Special Instructions
• Inform company man and any other personnel on-site of any unusual noise
they are not normally accustomed to. Example: Bleed-off of lubricator, stuffing
box leak or blow out, etc.
• Warn company man and any other personnel that wire is sometimes difficult
to see and they should not walk between wellhead and back of unit.
Note See Safety Awareness Plan for check sheets etc.
Tool Box Talks

Objective
To provide a guideline for all personnel in the preparation and presentation of
Toolbox Talks and to promote discussion on potential job hazards and share expe-
riences among all members of the work party.

Responsibilities
It is the responsibility of the person supervising any work party to ensure that a
toolbox talk that meets the following guidelines is properly conducted and that all
the necessary information is given to promote awareness and understanding of all
the potential hazards that may affect the safe and efficient completion of the job.
Summary
A Tool Box talk is an instruction, awareness, and experience retention session
about a specific job including safety. A Tool Box talk deals with the challenge of
executing and completing the work according to all quality requirements.
Supervisors and leading hands who use this meeting format and who give proper
emphasis to safety usually find that increased awareness and understanding of
the hazards associated with a specific job indicates that the job can be, and usually
is, completed safely.
Before tackling the job, the party assembles with the supervisor or leading hand to
discuss the tools, materials, and personal protective equipment they need, and
they agree upon the part of the job that each person is to carry out. In addition,
any special Permit-To-Work requirements or potential hazards will also be identi-
fied and discussed and appropriate actions and responsibilities agreed on.
On significant jobs made up of sequential steps, a Tool Box talk may be needed
prior to each step. A series of Tool Box talk check sheets for subsea well services
operations has been created to assist in holding toolbox talks.
It is also important on completion of a job to summarize what was to planned and

what could be improved for learning and experience retention.
Procedure
Objective of Job
At the beginning of the Tool Box talk, the objective of the specific job to be under-
taken must be discussed so that all work party members fully understand the
potential hazards and also appreciate the need to systematically organize the job
steps in order to address the significant aspects of the job and identify potential
hazards.
Plan and Method

The procedure that has been developed for the specific job must be discussed
from the point-of-view of how each job step will be handled and to identify spe-
cial precautions that must be followed in order to complete the job safely. This
would include Permit-To-Work requirements, personal protective equipment,
atmospheric tests, etc. The person in charge of the work site must discuss and
explain his methods of communication with all involved.
Responsibilities
Each person or groups of people who are assigned various responsibilities to
ensure that the job progresses safely must be identified and their specific respon-
sibilities reviewed during the Tool Box talk. It is particularly important that the

person with overall responsibility is identified to ensure that work party members
know who to refer to if in doubt about any aspect of the job. This is necessary so
that all persons involved in the job clearly understand not only their own role and
responsibilities but the roles and responsibilities, of others as well. The person
with overall responsibility must explain how he will communicate to stop and
start activities.
Manpower and Skills

At this point in the toolbox talk, it will also be advantageous to indicate the man-
power needed to execute and complete the job and also to discuss the possible
requirement for additional manpower. The specific skills that are necessary
should be discussed to ensure that only those who have these skills will be
allowed to carry out that part of the job. This may discourage any person who
does not possess the required skill from attempting to do a job or part of a job that
he is not trained to do.
Access and Evacuation

In the event that the job will involve access to confined spaces, then the specific
requirements of the Permit-To-Work must be discussed in detail to ensure that all
members of the work crew are familiar with and understand these additional pre-
cautions. Access controls and communications may need to be reviewed. Job spe-
cific emergency procedures including evacuation procedures, should it be
necessary, must also be discussed.
Work Environment
The actual or anticipated environment in which the work is to be carried out must
be discussed if it is anticipated that the environmental conditions could lead or
contribute to job hazards. Such environmental concerns are weather conditions,
excessive heat, noise, areas of restricted movement, or other conditions that could
have a detrimental effect on the safe completion of the work. Another consider-
ation would be work activities within areas whose status may be altered through
a change in operating conditions.
Hazards
At this stage all known or anticipated hazards that could affect the work must be
identified and discussed. The work party members must be made familiar with
the accepted procedure for reporting hazards that become evident during the
course of the work activity. It may be beneficial to re-establish the responsibilities
for reporting and acting on hazards at this time.
Equipment
The various tools and equipment needed for the job should be checked for condi-
tion prior to the start of the job, also from a safety and efficiency standpoint. It is
imperative that the correct tool is used for the job and that the tools should be
available prior to the start of the work. In addition, equipment standards should
be reviewed to reduce the potential for improper or unsuitable equipment to be
used. The personal protective equipment requirements should also be reviewed to
ensure that all personnel know not only what PPE is needed but why it is needed.
It may be advantageous to review the use of the PPE in the event that work party
members are unfamiliar with the particular type or brand being used.

Materials
If the job involves the installation or replacement of materials or the use of specific
materials such as chemical substances, etc., then the crew must be made aware.
COSHH recommendations should be used for guidance. This will ensure compli-
ance or at least familiarity with any regulations or procedures that deal with these
materials. Material standards and specifications should be reviewed if applicable,
and all personnel should be familiarized with any precautionary measures.
Isolations
All mechanical and/or electrical isolations that have been applied or that will be
applied must be discussed so that personnel are aware of the necessary isolations
and so that work does not commence until the isolations have been implemented
and confirmed via the Permit-To-Work system.
Conflicting Activities
On occasion, some work activities will occur that can affect the safety of other
activities that are being undertaken in the same area, for example, product sam-
pling in an area where hot work is taking place. Conflicting activities or the poten-
tial for conflicting activities to occur must be considered and discussed as part of
the Tool Box talk.
Information
The information aspects of the Tool Box talk should address all pertinent ques-
tions that could arise in respect to the work being undertaken. A Tool Box talk
should be held as part of all nonroutine jobs and also routine jobs if there are peo-
ple who are unfamiliar with the work activity or are unfamiliar with the location.
New personnel can benefit greatly from the Tool Box talks and at the same time
issues can be addressed to remind all personnel in the party of the potential haz-
ards that can develop in routine activities.
Questions should be asked of work party members to ascertain their understand-

ing of the job and the hazard potential. Party members should be invited to partic-
ipate in the Tool Box talk by questioning the established procedure, identifying
hazardous actions and conditions, and by recommending solutions to job related
problems. This will provide a good opportunity for work parties to question and
discuss existing job procedures to confirm current applicability and/or the need
to review and update the procedure.
All personnel should be reminded that if they are uncertain about any aspect of
the job, they must confirm the proper methods before carrying on with the job.

“IF IN DOUBT, ASK.”

Tool Box talks can be conducted in a meeting room, in the canteen, or at the actual
work-site wherever is best suited to providing the information and should be of
such duration as to ensure that the objective of the meeting is met. It may be
advantageous for the meeting leader to record the content of the toolbox talk so
that any suggestions, recommendations, actions, and experiences can be moni-
tored.
3.0 Procedure
1. Safety meeting will be held at the start of each job, change of locations, or crew
change in a safe location, if known hazards exist.
2. All Halliburton personnel involved with the job will attend. Recommend that
others involved, such as customer personnel, other service personnel, rig
crews, etc. also attend.
3. The “Tool Box” safety meeting should cover all topics concerning the job
ahead.
4. Review communication system to be used. Example: hand signals.
5. The meeting shall be recorded on the job ticket/M.S.O.
6. Hold additional meetings as required if adverse conditions arise during the
course of the job.
4.0 Appendix
Tool Box Check List Form
SL 5.0 - SL 5.xx - Tool Box Meeting Topics

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.24: Spotting Equipment on Location
SL 1.24: Spotting Equipment on Location

1.0 Scope
Consideration must be given to spotting wireline service equipment at/on the job
site. Job site condition, well type and condition, and the position of other produc-
tion or service equipment around the location will have an impact on the way
wireline service equipment is spotted to conduct the job safely.

As a general rule, the wireline service unit and all other equipment should be
spotted up wind from the wellhead if at all possible. This should always be done
when working on wells having hazardous amounts of H2S. Some regulatory bod-
ies and customers place restrictions on how close the wireline service unit can be
spotted to the wellhead. Some refer to this area as hazardous zone and are usually
areas immediately around the wellhead.
Other site considerations include:
• Will the ground or deck support the weight of load of the equipment?
• Is there sufficient room for the extension of outriggers that may be required in
the case of a mast or crane to support the lubricator stack?
• Will overhead power lines or other equipment interfere with the safe rig up of
the lubricator stack?
• Are there any buried lines/other production equipment that could be dam-
aged should the service equipment be moved over or spotted on top of them?
• Is there a cellar around the wellhead that would preclude moving a mast,
crane, or picker close enough to the wellhead to handle the lubricator?
• Can the unit be rigged in “line of sight” with the wellhead? (Rigging up on a
rig job with multiple hay pulleys.)
3.0 Procedure
1. The wireline specialist in charge of operations determines the best location for
spotting wireline service unit and related equipment, considering well condi-
tions and possible hazardous cases. Equipment should always be spotted
upwind, wherever possible.
2. Confirms that ground or deck will support the weight and loads of the equip-
ment before moving equipment on to these areas
3. Reviews site for any overhead power lines or other overhead obstructions that
will interfere or cause hazardous conditions during wireline service opera-
tions
4. Spots equipment the required minimum safe distance from wellhead as
required by local regulations or customer
5. Place hazard flags around job sight to prevent personnel and/or vehicles from
running into wire strung between the wellhead and the wireline service unit
6. Sets out all safety equipment and insures that all personnel entering the work
area are wearing a hard hat and other safety apparatus as required

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.25: Load Handling Apparatus
SL 1.25: Load Handling Apparatus

1.0 Scope
The load handling apparatus is used to manipulate heavy or bulky equipment at
the well site.

Over center masts or mobile cranes may be mounted on a separate truck or
mounted in combination with a wireline service unit on the same truck. They are
also available in truck and skid-mounted versions.
Regardless of their configuration, special considerations must be made when

using mast or crane equipped units. Some of these considerations are:
• Load rating of system

• Distance of lift to center point of mast/crane
• Maximum lift load
• Outrigger extension and stability
• Maximum height
• Overhead obstructions
• Guy lines - some of lattice work mast systems require guy lines and anchors to
ensure stability.
3.0 Procedure
1. Wireline specialist or assistant inspects mast/crane and outriggers to ensure
that no obvious damage has occurred to system during transport. All pivot
pins should be greased and secured.
2. The location will be surveyed to determine if there are any power lines or
other overhead obstructions that will interfere with the safe rig up of the
mast/crane.
3. Ensure that the area where the mast/crane is to be spotted is level and confirm
that ground or deck will support weight of the unit and outrigger loads. If
necessary, timbers can be used under outriggers to offer additional support.
Separate mast/crane units must be spotted upwind or crosswind from the
wellhead if at all possible, especially if hazardous concentrations of H2S are
present. Combination mast/crane wireline units should always be spotted
upwind from the wellhead.
Note If a mast is used, ensure that the mast is spotted close enough to wellhead
so that lift line is centered on top of wellhead when the mast is fully extended. The
crane should be spotted at a sufficient distance to allow full capability of the
crane. Refer to the load chart on the side of the boom for maximum lift load at dis-
tance.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.25: Load Handling Apparatus
4. Ensure that all personnel are clear and deploy outriggers fully. Confirm that
outriggers are firmly planted. Use cribbing (timbers) if necessary to add sup-
port.
5. Prior to operating cranes, the operator must receive training from a certified
agency.
6. Lift the mast/crane out of the cradle with the boom lift cylinder and position
as necessary for lubricator rig up.
Note Some cranes utilize a jib to extend their reach. If this is the case, position
the crane boom so that the jib can be reached. Remove the locking pin and swing
the jib around and lock in position. String the lift line through the jib sheave.
7. Verify that the crane anti-two block device is present and functional.
8. When guy lines are necessary for stability, anchors shall be sufficient to with-
stand anticipated loads directly over the load being lifted.
9. Position lift line and block directly over the load being lifted.
10. Ensure that the hook latch is still in place and operable.
11. Make sure all personnel know and use the proper hand signals for crane/mast
operations.
12. All personnel will wear all personnel protection equipment when operating or
working around a crane or mast.
13. Before hoisting equipment, determine weight of items being lifted and verify
the weight does not exceed the load chart.
4.0 Appendix
For reference:
http://halworld.halnet.com/wrk/wrkhms/wrkhms_bres/processes/Etb/
Construction/ConstImplem/WorkMethods/WM-EA-BRES-CI-019.doc

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.26: Wellhead Preparation
SL 1.26: Wellhead Preparation

1.0 Scope
Wireline operations require the temporary mounting of pressure-control equip-
ment or mounting the lubricator stack to the top of the wellhead in most applica-
tions. Knowledge of wellhead operations and functions is essential for preparing
the well for the safe completion of wireline service operations.

Wellheads, sometimes referred to as “christmas trees” or “trees,” are used to con-
trol the flow of the well into the production or flow line that would normally go to
some processing equipment or facility. Generally, the wellhead will consist of one
or more valves that are in line with the vertical bore of the well. These may be
called “master valves” or “swab valves.” In most applications, there are two
valves located below the wing or cross where the flow is diverted from the verti-
cal bore into the flowline. These valves are generally referred to as “master
valves.” In addition, some wellheads are equipped with another valve that is
located above the cross that is referred to as a “swab” or “crown valve.” There will
almost always be at least one valve that is mounted horizontally or at a diagonal
away from the vertical bore. This valve is normally mounted directly to the cross/
wing and is referred to as the “wing valve.” Many wells contain an actuator that
will allow for emergency shut-down of the well in an emergency.
In addition to valves, there is normally a tree cap with a connection on it that will
facilitate the rigging up of the lubricator stack on top of the wellhead. Some well-
heads may also incorporate a choke/choke body that is mounted downstream of
the wing valve(s). This choke may have a fixed or variable displacement.
It is important that the wireline service personnel become familiar with the opera-
tion of these various valves and tree connections.
3.0 Procedure
1. The WL service operator will make a visual inspection of the wellhead and
surrounding area to determine if there are any obvious problems or leaks.
2. If the well has been designated an H2S well then an H2S detection test must be
performed by a qualified member of the service team. This person must have
received formal training in H2S detection.
Note If leaks are suspected or heard near an H2S designated well, the area is to
be cleared of all personnel to a predetermined safe area, upwind from the well-
head and location. A customer representative must be notified immediately of the
problem. A breathing apparatus must be worn by qualified personnel on any
attempt to reenter the location area to determine the source of the leak.
3. If the wellhead cellar is exposed, a portable grating must be placed around the
wellhead.
4. The wireline assistant will observe and give the operator the well's pressure
for recording, if this is required for the service operations being performed.

This is normally taken from a gauge on top of the tree cap, or the WL crew
may keep a dial gauge on hand for this purpose. The procedure for this is as
follows:
n If the pressure is to be a static pressure, the assistant should shut the
wing or flow line valve on the wellhead.
Note During all wireline operations it is extremely important that the assistant
counts the number of turns to open and close valves on the wellhead. By counting
the number of turns of the valve handle, the relative position of the gate in the
valve can be determined, which can be used to detect tools and other obstructions
that might prevent the full closure or opening of a valve. To ensure consistency,
only one person should be responsible for opening and closing wellhead valves
on the job.
For flowing pressures, the wing valve should remain in the full open position. If
both a static and flowing pressure is required, the flowing pressure should be
taken before the wing valve is shut. After shutting the wing valve and allowing
the pressure to stabilize, the pressure should be observed again for the static pres-
sure recording.
Note The wellhead should be clear of any grease or oil to prevent slipping. The
assistant should use caution when climbing on the wellhead, making sure that
hand holds and foot holds are secure.
•The assistant ensures that all necessary valves on the wellhead are open to
the point of the pressure reading (i.e., both master valves and swab valves
should be open if the pressure reading is being made from the needle valve
on top of the tree cap).
•The assistant makes up the gauge in the top of the needle valve if not already
so equipped.
•The assistant checks to ensure the needle valve is in the open position before
making a reading off of the gauge.
•After recording or giving the pressures to the operator, the assistant closes
the needle valve on the tree cap and carefully removes the pressure gauge
ensuring that the pressure trapped below the gauge is released first before
completely removing the gauge from the needle valve.

5. The assistant shuts in the swab valve, keeping track of the number of turns to
shut the valve in. To ensure consistency, only one person should be responsi-
ble for opening and closing wellhead valves on the job. In most cases a wing
valve should also be closed for slickline service operations unless a flowing
well service such as a flowing BHP or paraffin cutting operation, is being per-
formed.
CAUTION Never stand in front of wellhead valve when operating. This will help prevent
injury in case the handle/valve core blows off the wellhead during operation.
Note It is important that the sequence of valve closure on a wellhead always be

done first, starting with the furthermost valve from the fluid entry in the tree from
the wellbore. For example, the furthermost wing valve away from the vertical
bore should be closed first, followed by the closer wing valve to the wellhead, the
top master valve, and finally the lowest master valve. This helps prevent flow cut-
ting of the upstream valves, increasing their usable life. This process is extremely
important to remember when shutting a well in that is flowing abrasive fluids
such as muds, heavy brines, formation sands, shale, etc.
6. The needle valve on the tree cap is now opened to bleed off the pressure below
the tree cap. A breathing apparatus BA is required for this process if the well is
designated an H2S well. Ear plugs or muffs will be provided and worn by the
assistant during this operation to prevent loss of hearing. The assistant shall
position himself upwind when bleeding off well pressure to prevent breathing
in well effluents.
7. Remove the tree cap or tree cap adapter flange as required for rig up to bottom
of pressure control stack.
8. Add any necessary tree connection assembly to the top of the tree, if not
already equipped with a tree cap, that allows access to the bottom of the pres-
sure control stack connection.
9. Secure weight indicator/hay pulley around the wellhead with a chain or sling
that is load certified for two times the load rating. Check load cell gap and
pump in fluid as necessary.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.27: Tool String and Lubricator Make-Up
SL 1.27: Tool String and Lubricator Make-Up

1.0 Scope
The slickline tool string and the lubricator/pressure control stack, must be made
up properly before wireline service operations can commence.

Tool String
The tool string is the working part of wireline operations. It is attached to the end
of the wireline, lowered into a wellbore, and used to manipulate various types of
devices in the well. It provides the mass and means of imparting an impact load
to these various tools. It also provides the weight to overcome pressure and stuff-
ing box packing friction.
Lubricator/Pressure Control Stack

The lubricator stack provides the means to get the wireline tool string in and out
of the well under pressure. It seals off around the wire to prevent well fluids from
escaping into the atmosphere. It provides a pressurized chamber above the oper-
ating valves of the wellhead into which the tool string can be run or pulled. It also
includes a valve that will allow the well to be closed without damaging the wire.
Lubricator stack components vary depending on the type of service operation
being performed. Various lubricator stack components are discussed in detail in
the technical section of this manual.
3.0 Procedure
1. The operator selects the proper tool string and lubricator stack for the job
being performed.
Note Hardhats, gloves, steel toe shoes, and eye protection (safety glasses)
should always be used when handling wire, lubricator equipment, or tool string
components. In addition, always secure both ends of the wire when cutting.
2. Lay out lubricator sections using lubricator stands. Lubricator sections will
always be carried or moved by two people to avoid lifting injuries.
Note All personnel will be instructed of proper lifting techniques to avoid

injury.
3. Visually inspect lubricator components and connections. Replace worn or cut

o-rings. Clean and use light oil on Quick Union (QUN) connections.
4. Make up the proper length and size lubricator stack to accommodate the tools
being run or retrieved from the wellbore. All of the QUN connections, except
the working connection, should be made up tight by hand. The working con-
nection is the one that is used during tool changes to provide access to the
well bore and tool string. This is usually the connection between the lower
section of lubricator and the wireline valve. This connection should always be
backed off between 1/8 and 1/4 of a turn to ease breakout.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.27: Tool String and Lubricator Make-Up
5. Visually inspect each connection of the tool string to ensure its integrity and
that it is clear of any debris.
6. Lay out the tool string components in the proper sequence and screw compo-
nents together until snug. Make up connections tight using a pair of 18 in. or
24 in. pipe wrenches. Use flat spots where provided in the tool string compo-
nents when making up to prevent wrench slippage and potential personal
injury.
7. Slide the tool string into the top of the lubricator stack leaving 6 to 8 inches of
the pin on the top piece of the stem protruding from the end of the lubricator.
8. Visually inspect the stuffing box and replace any worn components and stuff-
ing box packing. Ensure that the blowout proventer plunger is still operable
and replace as necessary. Confirm that the hydraulic packing nut piston
moves freely.
9. Pull sufficient wire from the wireline drum to allow wire to be threaded
through the stuffing box.
Note When cutting wire, always ensure that both ends are secure.
10. Connect the rope socket to the protruding end of the stem making, sure not to
twist the rope socket.
11. Slide the tool string down into the lubricator stack to ensure that the rope
socket will not interfere with the makeup of the stuffing box to the top section
of lubricator.
12. Secure the stuffing box to the top lubricator section and pull the wire up until
the tool string touches the bottom of the stuffing box. This prevents the tools
from being blown up into the lubricator if hit with a sudden surge of well
fluid when first opening a well.
13. Check stuffing box packing friction to ensure that tools will fall freely and
lubricate wire at the stuffing box if necessary.
14. Attach the hydraulic hose to the hydraulic pack-off nut and secure to the
lubricator with soft line to prevent pulling the quick disconnect apart.
15. Pull the wire tight, attach a wireline clamp to the wire, and secure to the nee-
dle valve at the lower end of the bottom section of lubricator. This will prevent
the tools from falling out of the bottom of the lubricator when rigging up on
the wellhead.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.28: Rigging Up the Lubricator Stack
SL 1.28: Rigging Up the Lubricator Stack

1.0 Scope
This section discusses the procedures for using various types of equipment to
assist in rigging up wireline surface equipment. It also lists many of their advan-
tages, disadvantages, and safety considerations. Following proper wireline rig up
procedures is critical in maintaining structural integrity and pressure control.

There are essentially six types of equipment used to handle lubricator equipment:
Gin poles, masts or cranes, offshore A frames, offshore portable hydraulic masts,
stationary drilling/workover rigs, and semi-submersible rigs or floating produc-
tion platforms. All are discussed separately however, there are several general
precautions that must be taken:
General Precautions:
•Is the working pressure rating and the rated service of the lubricator equip-
ment and the wellhead proper for the anticipated conditions?
•Is there sufficient lubricator to cover all anticipated combinations of wireline
tools and fish?
•Is the height and/or weight rating of the lifting equipment sufficient to sup-
port all of the necessary lubricator?
•The lifting block must be directly above the wellhead. Use appropriate lift
clamps.
Gin Pole Operations
Gin poles may be used for light-duty wireline operations and are normally lim-
ited to lifting 2 sections of 2 in., 5,000 psi WP lubricator and 1 section of 3 in., 5,000
psi WP lubricator. If heavy jarring or heavy loads are anticipated, guy lines are
recommended.
Offshore A - Frames
A-frames are sometimes used offshore as an alternative to either a gin pole or
erectable mast. Their height and load limits are similar to those of a gin pole.
Make sure that the frame is securely fastened to the deck and that the load limits
are not exceeded.

Stationary Drilling/Workover Rigs

General
Drilling and workover rigs vary widely in size, design, and complexity. In addi-
tion, particularly when offshore, available space can be extremely limited. There-
fore, before rig up or lifting operations, a brief meeting between the wireline
operator, the tool pusher, and the company representative should be held. This
will help in solving potential problems with safety, procedures, moving obstruc-
tions, and communication. It should discuss and hopefully eliminate problems
during rig up, such as bending the lubricator, damaging the wireline valve, and
pulling out of the rope socket. Rapid and accurate hand signals must be prear-
ranged (especially the one for stop) due to distance, unusual angles, obstructions
and bad lighting.
Drilling and workover rigs generally have one thing in common-there is a signifi-
cant offset distance between the pickup point and the actual lifting equipment.
Larger rigs will have additional difficulties because the derrick floor will be a con-
siderable height above the level from which the wireline crew will be working. In
addition, concurrent operations or operations immediately preceding or follow-
ing wireline work can severely limit deck space as well as access to the V-door of
the rig. The following is a discussion of some of these difficulties.
Deck Space Limitations

There will be times, especially offshore, where deck space will be at a premium.
However, sufficient space must be found or made to allow 1) safe working condi-
tions, 2) sufficient space to allow lubricator assembly, and 3) a good location for
the wireline unit. It may actually be necessary to carry the stuffing box and tool
string to the rig floor and assemble the lubricator stack one joint at a time while
hanging from the blocks, although this situation is not desirable.
Horizontal and Vertical Offset

• In general, the lubricator stack will be lifted through the V-door in the side of
the derrick immediately above the catwalk (if present).
• To prevent bending, and thereby damaging, lubricator stacks made up on the
deck, ground, or catwalk, the rig air hoist or a crane may be required to pro-
vide support in the middle of the stack.
Fall Protection
If rigging up or using any other wireline operation will require any personnel to
work more than 6 feet off of the ground, deck, or rig floor, scaffolding and anti-fall
devices are required.
Multiple Hay Pulleys

To prevent the wireline from being damaged by rubbing on the rig and to ensure
that the wireline makes a 90o angle at the weight indicator, multiple hay pulleys
may be required.
Catlines
A catline is a pulley system present on many rigs that uses rope instead of wire
cable. Loops of the rope are slipped onto a cathead, which is a revolving polished
spindle located on the side of the draw works. As more loops are slipped on, the

force due to friction overcomes that of the load on the hook. Catlines are quick
and quite useful for small loads, although they are notorious for slipping and jerk-
ing. For this reason, DO NOT LIFT OR LOWER PERSONNEL USING A CAT-
LINE.
At times the rig crew has not ensured that the blocks are positioned directly over
the wellhead. This means that when separating the lubricator QUN from the wire-
line valve QUN, the connection may be in a bind, causing the lubricator to jump.
Extreme caution should be exercised to prevent personal injury or equipment
damage.
Semisubmersible rigs or floating production platforms
3.0 Procedure
Gin Pole Rig-Up Procedure
1. With the sections of the gin pole collapsed, the butt should be placed on one of
the flanges, preferably as low as possible.
2. Hook the chain around the gin pole and wellhead in two places as shown in
Figure 1. Use the ratchet-type boomer to bind the pole to the wellhead. Do not
bind the pole to the wireline valve.
3. Hook the rope fall into the eye on the top section of the gin pole and carefully
straighten the ropes.
4. Manually raise the top (inner) section and pin in place. Then raise and pin the
middle section.
5. Rotate the gin pole so that the rope fall is positioned over the wellhead.
6. Attach the rope fall to the pick up clamp or the lubricator.
When anticipating heavy jarring or heavy loads, guy lines are recom-
mended. The location of these lines are shown in Figure 1. The recom-
mended positions have three 3/8 in. chains supporting the lubricator. The
three chains should be located 120o apart with one on the far side (away
from the unit). The 3/16 cable should run at about a 4o angle from the top of
the lubricator to a stake on the far side.
7. Pick up the lubricator manually using the rope falls.
Note A pulley and a cathead have been used to pickup the lubricator, but this is
not recommended. If a cathead is used, great care should be taken as the lubrica-
tor nears the top. If the hook becomes jammed against the top block, the gin pole
can be bent and/or the rope broken and the lubricator dropped. In either case, the
lubricator stack should be lifted from a point as close to the wellhead as possible
and prevented from swinging. This will prevent unnecessary side loading on the
gin pole.
CAUTION When separating the lubricator QUN from the wireline valve QUN, the lubricator
stack may swing to one side, causing unacceptable side loads on the gin pole.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.29: Location Pressure Testing
SL 1.29: Location Pressure Testing

1.0 Scope
All wireline lubricator equipment must be tested in the shop. However, pressure
testing on location is recommended and often required. Adherence to all applica-
ble company and/or governmental regulations is required.

During the planning stage, the operator must obtain the tubing pressure, casing
pressure, maximum anticipated surface pressure, and the working pressure of the
weakest component of the wellhead. From these he can determine the required
working pressure of all lubricator equipment. Upon arrival on location, the opera-
tor should immediately check the tubing pressure, casing pressure, and the work-
ing pressure rating of the wellhead.
If present, the crown valve (swab valve) should be used to shut in the well. This
will prevent unnecessary wear on the master valve(s). Also, some master valves
are designed to hold pressure only from below. This means the master valve could
leak during the hydrostatic pressure test of the lubricator.
3.0 Procedure
Preparation
1. Close swab valve.
2. Bleed off and remove tree cap.
3. Install tree connection and wireline valve with the rams open.
4. Assemble lubricator equipment and wireline tool string.
5. Place lubricator equipment on wireline valve.
6. Rig up hay pulley, and pull wireline tool string up against the top of the stuff-
ing box.
Recommended Test Procedure
1. Using the bleed off valve or flow tee, slowly fill the lubricator equipment with
clean water.
2. Pressure up to the test pressure and hold for 15 minutes. No leaks are allow-
able. The test pressure will normally be the working pressure of the lubricator
equipment but may not be more than the working pressure of the weakest
component. If requested, the test pressure may be limited to the maximum
anticipated wellhead pressure or 1,000 psi, whichever is greater.
3. SLOWLY open the swab valve to open the well and count the turns of the han-
dle.
Alternate Procedure 1
This may be used if a test pump is not available.
1. Make sure that the bleed off valve is closed.

2. SLOWLY open the swab valve to equalize the pressure and count the turns of
the handle. Hold for 15 minutes. No leaks are allowable.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.30: General Wire Running Operations
SL 1.30: General Wire Running Operations

1.0 Scope
This section discusses general wire running operations.

These operational procedures for running wire in the hole are common to all slick-
line service jobs. The procedures for running wire have been developed over the
years to help eliminate unforeseen problems. Most are common sense-type pro-
cesses.
3.0 Procedure
Running In
1. A constant speed should be maintained when running through unrestricted
sections of the well, though the optimum running speed will be determined
by the dimension of the tool string, tubing size, deviation, and fluid content of
the well.
2. The tension on the wireline should be monitored at all times with increased
caution and slower speeds while passing through any restricted diameters or
completion assemblies, particularly when passing through the wellhead
Christmas tree or surface test tree and tubing hanger where a speed of not
more than 30 ft./min is required.
3. Running speeds should not exceed 300 ft./min for standard operations, with
maximum speeds of 250 ft./min permitted for operations in plastic coated
tubing and 120 ft./min for operations involving pressure recording or sam-
pling instruments.
4. No personnel shall stand or work within 10 feet of the wireline during run-
ning in, jarring, or pulling out of the hole.
5. During slickline operations, while running in the hole, the wire should be
lubricated with a light oil to reduce friction and stuffing box packing wear.
Note Alternative practice is use of slickline flow tube device to reduce stuffing
box friction.
Pulling Weight
Prior to any downhole operations, a pulling weight or pick-up weight must be
recorded as a reference to be compared with a similar pulling weight upon com-
pletion of the wireline operation in order to observe the success of that particular
operation.
1. Slowly retrieve the wireline from the well.

2. While pulling up, note the weight on the weight indicator dial and also
observe the pressure on the hydraulic system if using a hydraulic SL service
unit.
3. Record the pickup weight and depth in a talley book.

4. A pickup weight should be taken about every 1,000 ft.or at much shorter inter-
vals in a deviated well or one where cork screwed tubing or scale deposits are
expected. In highly deviated wells, a pickup weight may be required every
100 ft.or so.
Jarring
Jarring is the operation necessary to set, manipulate, and retrieve most wireline
tools and equipment.
1. Prior to commencing jarring operations, the area should be cleared of all non-
essential personnel.
2. Jarring down operations are impeded by the density of the well fluid, well
pressure, and the deviation of the well. These facts should be taken into
account when selecting the required weight and diameter of stem to be uti-
lized during the operation.
3. During jarring up operations, tension on the wireline should never exceed
50% of the breaking strain of the wire when it is new.
4. Careful consideration should be given during this operation to the condition
and age of the wireline, the angle of operation of the weight indicator load
cell, and well conditions as to the maximum permissible line pull during the
operation.
5. Ensure that the appropriate correction factor is applied to the indicated load to
give the true loading on the line for all angles other than 90o.
6. If prolonged upward jarring takes place in the retrieval of a plug or other
downhole device after one hour of jarring, it is recommended the tool string is
retrieved from the well by shearing the pulling tool. Upon returning to surface
an appropriate length of wire should be cut off to alter the wear points across
the sheaves and also to re-torsion test the wireline prior to the continuing of
the upward jarring operation to retrieve the downhole device.
7. During unavoidable continuous heavy jarring operations where the tool
string cannot be released by conventional methods, and prior to a fishing
operation, the following steps should be taken:
a. Clamp the wireline to allow the slickline to be removed from around the
counterhead measuring wheel.
b. Run the slickline over the top of the measuring wheel, marking it with a
piece of tape at a point where pulleys, guide rollers, etc. will not interfere
with the tape.
c. Replace the stuffing box sheave with a hay pulley suspended above the
lubricator sections to enable the bending stress points on the slickline to be
altered as required.
d. When jarring operations are completed, replace the slickline around the
stuffing box sheave and counterhead measuring wheel.
e. After approximately 2 hrs of continuous heavy jarring, a decision is to be
made to drop a cutter bar to allow retrieval of the wire.

Pulling Out
1. A constant speed should be maintained when pulling through unrestricted
sections of the well while maintaining a close watch on the wireline tension.
2. Increased caution should be taken while passing through restricted diameters
in the tubing bore, particularly the DHSV, and when re-entering the tubing
through the wireline entry guide.
3. The pulling speed will be determined by the dimensions of the tool string and
tubing size, deviation of the well, well fluid, and friction through the stuffing
box packing.
4. In dry gas wells, it is recommended to lubricate the slickline through the injec-
tion port on the chemical injection sub or stuffing box.
5. A wireline wiper should be used to remove any remaining well fluids, and the
wireline should be lightly lubricated with oil for protection against corrosion.
Pulling into the Lubricator
Caution should be exercised when retrieving the tool string into the lubricator.
This operation should be performed at minimal speeds. When the tool string is
approximately 50 ft. below the wellhead Xmas tree or surface test tree:
1. All personnel should be kept clear of the area when pulling the tool string up
to the stuffing box.
2. Ensure all the necessary checks on the wellhead valves, particularly the pres-
sure on the hydraulic master valve to ensure clear passage of the tool string.
3. If a tool catcher or tool trap is used, ensure that they are ready to accept the
tool string.
4. The winch reel speed should be adjusted to a minimum with the hydraulic
bypass valve to such an extent that should the tool string and the tree or lubri-
cator the reel will stop.
5. While slowly retrieving the tool string, a close monitoring of the weight indi-
cator dial is required with the reel hand brake ready to be applied by the oper-
ator.
6. Another member of the wireline crew can also be utilized during this opera-
tion to lean on the wire to feel when the rope socket is at the stuffing box.
7. With the tool string at the top of the lubricator and with the reel hand brake on
the wireline clamp should applied to clamp the wire until the well is shut in
and bled down.
Note During semisubmersible operations, it is advisable to lower the tool string

sufficiently to take into account the heave at that time.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.31: Tool Change Outs and Lubricator Bleed-Off Oper-
SL 1.31: Tool Change Outs and Lubricator Bleed-Off

Operations
1.0 Scope
During the course of wireline operations, it is sometimes necessary to change out
the tools on the bottom of the tool string. Accomplishing these change-outs in a
timely and safe manner leads to a successful slickline service operation.

During the change-out of tools below the wireline tool string, it becomes neces-
sary for the wireline crew members to handle the suspended lubricator and pres-
sure from the well bore. Precautions must be made to ensure the safety of
personnel while performing these types of operations. Personal protective equip-
ment must be used, including a hard hat, steel toe boots, and gloves, when work-
ing around an overhead crane or on the well sight. In addition, ear plugs or
protectors shall be used when bleeding of the pressure from the lubricator.
This procedure assumes that the wire is in the hole and in the process of being
pulled in order to retrieve or change out the tool or piece of equipment on the end
of the tool string.
3.0 Procedure
1. The operator slows down the speed of the wire within 200 ft. from service.
2. At approximately 20 - 30 feet from the surface, the operator slows the unit
down even more and requests that the assistant walk the line in to prevent
undue stress on the wire when the rope socket hits the bottom of the stuffing
box.
Note There is very little, if any, line stretch at the surface, so it is extremely
important that overpull of the wire at the surface not take place. A sudden over-
pull, such as running the tool string into the stuffing box, may cause the wire to
fail or be pulled out of the rope socket.
3. Once the operator is sure all the tools are above the swab valve or after the top
of the tool string hits the stuffing box, the operator gives the OK to the assis-
tant to shut in the well.
4. The assistant closes the swab valve, counting the turns it takes to close the
valve fully. Under no circumstances should the assistant try to force the valve
closed if the proper number of turns has not been reached. Notify the operator
immediately if an obstruction is encountered while closing the valve. This
may be an indication that tools or wire are caught across the valve.
Note Forcing the valve closed could ruin the valve and/or cause further prob-
lems with the tools being retrieved.
5. Once the swab valve is closed the required number of turns, the assistant will
bleed off the lubricator via the needle valve in the lower section of lubricator

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.31: Tool Change Outs & Lubricator Bleed-Off Opera-
or other prescribed location. Certain care should be given when bleeding off
pressure from the lubricator. The procedure below should be followed in
order to prevent explosive decompression.
a. Slowly open the needle valve in the lubricator to bleed off pressure, making
sure to face up wind of the flow from the needle valve.
b. Observe the gauge in the secondary needle valve port on the lower section
of lubricator and wait for pressure to reach 1000 psi. Pressure can be relieved
at a moderate rate before bleeding down to 1000 psi.
c. Once the pressure has bled down to 1000, reduce the rate of the bleed off. It
is recommended that the duration of pressure reduction from 1000 psi to 0
psi be approximately 5 minutes. This will help prevent the possibility of
explosive decompression that can occur when gases are present. This pre-
caution should be taken even if pure liquid is present in the lubricator. Gases
may still be present in the liquid.
Note To prevent spillage of wellbore liquids from the lubricator stack, it may be
desirable to first bleed the lubricator stack down the flow line. This is accom-
plished by closing the top master valve, opening the swab valve, and then the
wing valve on the wellhead. Once the pressure in the lubricator is equal to the
flowline pressure, the wing valve is closed, followed by the swab valve, and the
master valve can be reopened. Normal bleed-off procedures can then commence.
d. If wellbore liquids are still suspected to be in the lubricator stack, a high

pressure hose may be connected to one of the needle valves on the lubricator
to allow the liquids to be gathered in a container on the ground. This is a
two-man operation. One assistant should control the needle valve and the
other assistant/operator should hold the hose securely at the container to
ensure that it does not fly around. The needle valve should be barely opened
to allow liquids to flow into the container.
CAUTION Under NO CIRCUMSTANCES should a closed top container such as an empty 55

gallon drum be used. These are not designed to take any pressure from the inside
and could blow apart, causing injury if used for this purpose. Using an open-top
grounded metal container is the preferred method to use. Plastic containers have
a tendency to hold a static electric charge especially in dry climates such as the
Arctic and desert operations. The static charge in a plastic bucket has been known
to ignite wellbore fluids when used as a bleed-off container.
6. Disconnect the quick union (QUN) connection at the top of the wireline valve
after pressure is completely bled off the lubricator stack. (This is the working
connection.)
7. The crane operator picks up the lubricator high enough for the pin of the
QUN connection to clear the box end of the wireline valve.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.31: Tool Change Outs & Lubricator Bleed-Off Opera-
8. The assistant holds bottom of lubricator stack out away from the wellhead to
allow the tool string to fall out of the lubricator stack.
Note All personnel shall stay clear from underneath the lubricator stack when
lowering tools.
9. The operator lowers the tool string to waist-high level to allow removal of
tools and equipment from the bottom of the tool string.
10. The assistant removes and places additional tools as necessary on the bottom
of the tool string.
11. The operator records tool change in job notes.
12. The assistant positions himself back on the wellhead to hold the lubricator
over to ensure that tools do not hang up when being pulled back into lubrica-
tor. The bottom of the lubricator should be even with the top of the tree.
13. The operator zeroes the depthometer with the bottom of the tools even with
the tubing hanger pins or flange and pulls the tools up into the lubricator.
14. The assistant positions the lubricator QUN pin connection over the WLV
QUN box, keeping hands clear while the lubricator is stabbed.
15. The crane operator lowers the lubricator on top of the WLV once the lubricator
is secured on the wellhead.
16. The assistant makes up the QUN connection by hand and backs off the con-
nection 1/4 turn.
17. Check that the needle valve on the lubricator is closed.
18. The assistant cracks open the swab valve and checks for leaks while allowing
the lubricator to fully equalize.
19. If no leaks are detected and the lubricator is fully equalized, then open the
valve, fully keeping track of number of turns to full open.
Note Never stand in front of the wellhead valve when operating. This will help
prevent injury in case the handle/valve core blows off the wellhead during opera-
tion.
20. The operator proceeds in the hole with tools once the assistant gives the signal
that the well is open.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.32: Rigging Down and Securing Well
SL 1.32: Rigging Down and Securing Well

1.0 Scope
As with the rigging up operation and actual job performance, precautions must be
made to ensure personnel safety and prevent damage to property.

Rigging down operations are basically the reverse of the rigging up operation and
require basically the same effort. As with these other operations, the same per-
sonal safety equipment is required. These include hard hat, steel toe boots, ear
and eye protection, and gloves.
Special consideration must be given to the rig-down operation to ensure that all
equipment is accounted for and secured back on the vehicles to prevent damage
in transit. Other considerations should be made to prevent corrosion of equip-
ment while not in use.
3.0 Procedure
1. On the last trip out of the holes consideration should be given for wiping the
line and oiling it properly as it goes back on the drum to prevent corrosion
between jobs.
2. Shut in the well, bleed off the lubricator stack, and lower the tool string.
3. Remove tool from end of tool string.
4. The operator determines if wire is to be cut and new rope socket tied for the
next job or if existing tool string and rope socket knot can still be used.
Note If the wire is to be cut, secure both ends of the wire when cutting to ensure
that it doesn’t spring back and injure someone. Also, all personnel should be
informed that the wire is going to be cut and to stay clear, especially if the dead
end of the wire is pulled through and out the top of the lubricator. The assistant
helps the operator by keeping wire unraveled as it is spooled back on the unit.
If the decision is made not to cut the wire, then the tool string will be pulled up
into the lubricator and clamped using a wire clamp that does not slip. The wire
will then be slacked off so it can be removed form the hay pulley. (All personnel
should stay away from end of the lubricator if tools are inside.)
5. Stab the lubricator back on to the wireline valve and secure QUN connection.
6. Disconnect WLV from wellhead connection.
7. Move lubricator over to unit and secure WLV to its holder on the back of unit.
8. Assistants secure hoses in hose reels. This should include securing the weight
indicator hoses and weight indicator in its receptacle at the back of the unit.
This also includes stuffing box hose.
9. Disconnect the lubricator from top of the WLV.
10. Close the WLV rams and fill with oil.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.32: Rigging Down & Securing Well
11. Disconnect sections of the lubricator as necessary and secure the remaining
lubricator in the rack on the unit. Wipe down as necessary and place rags in
the bottom section to prevent well fluids from dripping on ground.
12. Secure crane in crane pedestal and tie down boom.
13. Ensure that all personnel are clear of outriggers and bring them up and secure.
Pick up any outrigger stabilizer boards that may have been used and secure
them on the unit or in the crew truck.
14. Remove the tree connection from the tree, clean or wipe down, and secure on
unit, crew truck, or tool box.
15. Place the tree cap back on the tree and close the needle valve.
16. Crack the swab valve to test the tree cap for leaks.
17. Place the gauge back in the needle valve on the tree cap, if so equipped.
18. Place the well back on line if shut in. The operator should record the time
when the well was shut in and when it was placed back on line.
19. The operator completes the necessary paper work and generates a job report.
20. The operator performs a gas test.
21. Police location.
22. Remove safety cones and signs and secure on vehicles as necessary for transit.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.33: H2S Procedures and Precautions
SL 1.33: H2S Procedures and Precautions

1.0 Scope
Prior to rigging up on a well with a potentially hazardous concentration of H2S,
certain safety precautions must be taken to prevent the escape of H2S gas to the
atmosphere, and therefore avoid personal injury. H2S gas is very hazardous to
unprotected personnel and unsuitable equipment. Careful attention to equipment
selection and job planning will help ensure safe and successful completion of the
job. Reference Halliburton Policy CPS 047 and CPS 048.

A well with a concentration of more than 20 ppm H2S is potentially hazardous to
the crew and the environment if control is lost for any reason. This concentration
of 20 ppm is equivalent to .002% or 1.17 grains per 100 scf.
Note This concentration of H2S may be at a pressure that is considered sweet

service as far as the equipment is concerned. Make sure that the concentration of
H2S is obtained before rigging up.
The following safety precautions and operating techniques must be employed

whenever a wireline unit is rigged up on a well with a concentration of H2S
greater than 20 ppm. Personal protective equipment required includes a self-con-
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA) or a mask with supplied air, and H2S (detector
tape) for each person on location. A three-man crew is recommended for an H2S
job. Every member of the crew must be trained and H2S certified. A flanged tree
connection must be used.
3.0 Procedure
1. All persons on location must be clean shaven to ensure that the air mask will
form a proper seal against the face.
2. Before arriving at the wellsite, the operator should determine the wind direc-
tion. Approaching the well from upwind, he should stop the crew at a safe
distance from the well. At this point, unless the customer is furnishing an out-
side safety company and they have already checked the location for the pres-
ence of H2S gas, the operator should designate someone to approach the well.
This person should cautiously approach the well with an H2S monitoring
device while wearing an SCBA.
Only if the concentration of H2S in the air is within allowable limits may rest of
the crew and the unit approach the well. If the H2S concentration exceeds allow-
able limits, the crew must be protected before proceeding to the wellsite.
3. The operator will hold a safety meeting with all persons on location in atten-
dance. Two safe briefing areas shall be chosen and marked. Each member of
the crew shall be briefed on their tasks. Two members of the crew will be
assigned to secure the well if problems develop.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.33: H2S Procedures and Precautions
4. Make sure that the location has two wind socks and/or other means of moni-
toring the wind direction. These should be placed at the briefing areas and
other conspicuous spots.
5. Verify that the breathing apparatus is functional and the tanks are properly
filled. Make sure that all persons on location are properly trained in the use of
the equipment. Most locations require valid a H2S pass.
CAUTION Verify once more that all pressure-containing equipment is rated for H2S service.
6. Rig up and pressure test lubricator equipment as usual. While performing

wireline work, pay close attention to personal safety equipment, wind condi-
tions and H2S monitors. When bleeding down the lubricator, make sure that
persons downwind are properly protected.
4.0 Appendix
Ref. CPS 047
Ref. CPS 048

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.34: Hydrate Precautions and Prevention
SL 1.34: Hydrate Precautions and Prevention

1.0 Scope
Hydrate plugs can form inside the production tubing or in the lubricator equip-
ment, temporarily trapping pressure. There are several methods by which to
reduce the possibility of hydrate formation.

During wireline operations, the tubing or lubricator equipment can become
plugged with hydrates. These plugs are often referred to as “ice” plugs, although
they are not ice in the normal sense. Hydrates are complex, snow-like compounds
that form from water and light hydrocarbons, such as natural gas, under certain
conditions. It is possible for hydrates to form at temperatures above 70oF.
Water is present in essentially all wells, either as a vapor or in liquid form.

Hydrates can be formed only from liquid water. However, under conditions of
increasing pressure and decreasing temperature, the dew point is reached and the
water vapor condenses into liquid form. At that point, hydrate formation may
take place. A chart in the Appendix shows the conditions under which the forma-
tion of hydrates can be expected. The well does not have to be flowing for
hydrates to form. If a well is shut in overnight, the pressure can increase and the
temperature can drop to a point at which hydrates may form.
3.0 Procedure
The most likely locations for hydrate plugs to form are in the lubricator stack.
Especially on a high pressure gas well, the needle valve becomes quite cold while
bleeding down the lubricator. This may cause a hydrate plug to form. This can
lead someone to believe that all of the pressure has been bled off the lubricator
when pressure is still trapped inside. This potentially dangerous situation can fool
even the most experienced personnel. Often, this plug can be dislodged by closing
the needle valve completely and then reopening it. However, this procedure is not
completely effective.
CAUTION Do not use a pipe wrench to loosen the QUN connection. If the connection is not
hand tight, this may indicate that there is pressure inside.
Another common location for a hydrate plug to form is in the stuffing box due to
a leaking packing nut. The plug thus formed can be severe enough to prevent the
wire from moving. In most cases, this will cause no inconvenience other than hav-
ing to wait for the plug to melt. However, if this occurs when the tool string is
almost out of the hole, the operator may believe that he has tagged the stuffing
box. He may then signal for the crown valve to be closed, cutting the wire. The
use of a chemical injection sub immediately below the stuffing box with freezing
point depressants such as glycol may eliminate this problem.

Through experience of careful planning, the occurrence of hydrate plugs can be

anticipated and minimized. There are several methods by which the possibility of
hydrate formation can be reduced.
1. If the well is killed and the gas circulated out of the well, hydrate formation is
virtually eliminated.
2. Where possible, salt water or some other type of brine should be used instead
of fresh water. The presence of sodium and chloride or other ions inhibits the
formation of hydrates.
3. The most common methods of reducing the possibility of hydrate formation
involve the use of freezing point depressants. These can be used in a chemical
injection sub or pumped into the well through the pump in tee. The most com-
monly used chemicals are methanol (wood alcohol) and glycol. The effects of
methanol and glycol on the freezing point of fresh water can be seen in the
chart in the appendix. Although methanol is slightly more effective as a freez-
ing point depressant, the use of glycol is recommended. Methanol is highly
flammable, with a flash point of 54oF. Glycol is considerably more stable,
requiring temperatures reaching 232oF before catching fire.
CAUTION Do not bleed off pressure above a hydrate plug. If the plug comes loose, the tool
string may hit the stuffing box with enough force to cause catastrophic failure.

4.0 Appendix
Table 4.0 - 1:

FREEZING POINTS OF CERTAIN SOLUTIONS

Methanol Freezing Glycol Freezing
% by Volume Point % by Volume Point
0% 32° F 0% 32° F
0.1% 31.92° 0.1% 31.94°
0.5% 31.6° 0.5% 31.7°
1.0% 31.2° 1.0% 31.4°
5.0% 27.8° 5.0% 28.8°
10.0% 22.9° 10.0% 25.1°

Slickline Operations Manual SL 1.35: Lubricator Auto-Ignition Precautions and Preven-
SL 1.35: Lubricator Auto-Ignition Precautions and

Prevention
1.0 Scope
It is possible for a mixture of air and natural gas or diesel to ignite inside the lubri-
cator while pressure testing or when opening up the well. This potentially dan-
gerous occurrence should be prevented if possible.

There has been more than one occurrence of an explosion taking place inside
wireline lubricator equipment. All of these incidents had several factors in com-
mon. In each case, the lubricator had just been placed on the wellhead and the
lubricator stack had not been purged of air. The lubricator was being pressured up
with diesel oil or well pressure which compressed the air already present. Appar-
ently, the mixture of air and gas or diesel fumes happened to be in the proper pro-
portions to explode when compressed. The explosion caused the wire to part and
the stuffing box packing to melt. While none of the explosions were violent
enough to damage the lubricator equipment, they were sufficiently alarming to
cause a change in operating procedures. Where these changes were made, no fur-
ther occurrences of lubricator auto-ignition have taken place.
3.0 Procedure
The following procedures should help in preventing further occurrences of lubri-
cator auto-ignition.
1. The use of a purge valve and filling the lubricator with salt water should pre-
vent the air from being compressed or mixing with a flammable substance.
2. If the use of water is not permitted, the use of a purge valve should still pre-
vent the compression of the air to a dangerous point.
3. If a purge valve is not available, slightly opening the well while leaving the
bleed-off valve open for a few moments has proven effective in purging much
of the air from the lubricator stack and preventing auto-ignition. However,
this procedure is not considered normal practice and may not be permitted
because of safety or environmental considerations.
Open the crown valve slowly if auto-ignition occurs and the wire parts, the valve
can be re-closed, the pressure bled off, and the tool string recovered. Following
such an occurrence, procedures should be carefully reviewed before resuming
wireline operations.
Note It is strongly recommended that diesel should not be used as a test

medium. If a leak path develops, expelled fluid could be vaporized under pres-
sure in the atmosphere, thereby providing a highly volatile source for ignition.

Section
2
Downhole Service Operations
SL 2.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Depth Measurement Considerations
SL 2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauging Operations
SL 2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perforator Dummy Use
SL 2.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swaging Operations
SL 2.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broaching Operations
SL 2.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Use of Impression Blocks
SL 2.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paraffin Cutting and Scale Removal
SL 2.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection and Use of Flow Controls
SL 2.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W Slip Lock System
SL 2.10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D Collar Lock System
SL 2.11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .S, N & T, Q Equipment
SL 2.12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X - XN & R - RN Equipment
SL 2.13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPT Lock System
SL 2.14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPV Lock Mandrel
SL 2.15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETYSET® Lock System
SL 2.16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FBN Lock System
SL 2.17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monolock® System
SL 2.18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subsurface Safety Valve Considerations
SL 2.19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running and Pulling Gas Lift Valves
SL 2.20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running and Pulling Packoffs
SL 2.21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and Closing Sliding Sleeves
SL 2.22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of Test Tools
SL 2.23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bailing Operations
SL 2.24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General BHT/BHP Surveys
SL 2.25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Caliper Surveys
SL 2.26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Perforating (Otis Type ‘A’) Mechanical
SL 2.27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Swabbing Operations
SL 2.28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Kinley Power Jars
SL 2.29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Wireline Fishing Operations
SL 2.30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General ETD Operations
SL 2.31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Long Assemblies with Pressure
SL 2.32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shifting (Knocking) Off TCP Guns
SL 2.33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of Downhole Purge/Surge Valves
SL 2.34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deviated Well Operations
SL 2.35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Pressure/Temperature Operations
SL 2.36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Downhole Power Unit Operations
SL 2.37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Production Logging (MPL) Operations

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.1: Depth Measurement Considerations
SL 2.1: Depth Measurement Considerations

1.0 Scope
Wireline depth measurement is a means to determine the location of various com-
ponents in the wellbore from the surface or a known reference point. In addition,
it can be used to locate fluid levels and other points of concern in the wellbore.
Repeatable and accurate depth measurement is extremely important when ana-
lyzing wellbore problems and during wireline fishing operations.

Several factors that effect slickline depth measurement include:
• Line stretch
• Line slippage through the counter wheel(s)
• Counter wheel selection
• Expansion and contraction of the counter wheel due to temperature
• Line expansion and contraction due to wellbore temperature
• Counter wheel wear
• Tubing Measured Depth Inaccuracies
• Buoyancy of the line in fluid
• Wellbore friction on the line
Typically slickline depth measurements seldom match up with the Measured
Depth of the tubing in a well. This is primarily due to the environmental stress
factors which affect the true depth measurements made for tubing and slickline.
Tubing Measurement
Before we can discuss slickline depth measurement we must first discuss the way
tubing is measured. Tubing is typically measured on the pipe rack a row at a time.
Zero Reference Point

Slickline depth measurements should always begin from a zero reference point at
the surface. This is typically the Tubing Hanger Flange (THF) on the producing
wells and the Rotary Kelly Bushing (RKB) if a drilling rig is on the hole. In the
absence of a tubing hanger flange or head, use the lowest master valve as a point
of reference and note it in the job log. The bottom of the tool being run in typically
zeroed.
Depth measurement can be recorded as Slickline Measurement (SLM) or Wireline

Measurement (WLM) and should be noted as such in the job log to distinguish it
from the Measured Depth (MD) of the production tubing.
All tubing measurement is from the rotary kelly bushing (RKB). The difference is
height between the RKB and the tuging hanger flange (THF) is called the eleva-
tion. The accuracy of slickline depth measurement is critical when performing
such operations as pinpointing holes in the tubing, running packoffs to isolate
holes in tubing, perforating, setting bridge plugs, setting flow controls that are rel-

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.1: Depth Measurement Considerations
atively close together at depth, determining fill from the end of tubing, etc. At
other times the slickline depth measurement is not as critical, for operations such
as cutting paraffin, scale removal, etc.
3.0 Procedure
1. Inspect equipment (For Mechanical Counter)
a. Confirm that the counter wheel is the correct wheel for the size of wire
being used.
b. Check for worn counter wheels and pressure wheels.
c. Check the counter cable for kinks or pinched spots.
d. Confirm that the counter will zero properly.
2. All equipment (lubricator, pulleys, tree connection, etc.) should be in place
over the wellbore and hung at the proper height prior to zero.
a. Zero at the RKB (Rotor Kelly Bushing) when working with a rig on the well.
- Zero at the THF (Tubing Hanger Flange) when working with a tree
installed on the well.
b. Add elevation to the SLM when zero at the THF for RKB measurements.
-Subtract elevation from the SLM when zero at the RKB for THF measure-
ments.
c. Zero counter when the bottom of the tool string is at the RKB or THF.
d. Zero counter with running and pulling tools prior to assembly of devices to
be installed or removed.
3. Re-zero counter prior to each run. The counter may not return to zero when
we pull the wire out of the hole, due to weight difference going in the hole
compared to pulling out of the hole.
a. Slippage in the counter head may occur due to worn wheels and pressure
wheels not being tightened properly.
4.0 Appendix
See wire charts
Angle correction chart (Martin Decker)

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.2 Gauging Operations
SL 2.2 Gauging Operations

1.0 Scope
Slickline gauging operations are used primarily to locate reductions in tubing ID
and determine the maximum diameter of tools that will pass through the well-
bore. Gauging operations are performed prior to running or pulling any wireline-
retrievable flow control device (locks, plugs, safety, valves, etc.) from a well.
Gauging operations may also be used to clean up minor scale or paraffin deposits
and to locate the depth of various components and fluid levels in the wellbore.

Several different tools may be used to gauge a well, but the primary toll used in
slickline gauging operations is the gauge cutter. It may also be referred to as a
gauge or gauge ring.
The gauge cutter (Figure 1) is a short hollowed cylindrical-shaped tool approxi-

mately 9 to 12 in. in length with the sides machined out to allow for fluid by-pass.
The gauge area of the gauge cutter is usually 1.5 to 2 in. in length. It is used to
gauge the ID of the wellbore to determine if there are any restrictions that would
prevent other tools from passing through. The gauge cutter may also be used to
determine the depth of various components in the wellbore and can also be used
to remove minor deposits of paraffin or scale from the tubing walls. A gauge cut-
ter should always be run in the well prior to running or pulling any wireline set or
retrievable flow control device from the well bore.
Gauge Cutter History

Historically, gauge cutter OD’s have come in 1/32 in. (.031 in. increments) and are
still used this way in some locations, which may or may not suite the application.
A full gauge, as it is called, is approximately 1/32 in. under the drift ID of the tub-
ing that it is to be run in. A full gauge will sit down on the first nipple it encoun-
ters in a wellbore and is used primarily to gauge the ID of the tubing where
nipples or other restrictions in the ID are not present. A turned down gauge is
basically a gauge that has an ID that will drift a nipple or other restriction in the
tubing. Typically these are built with an OD 1/32 of an inch under the ID of the
nipple it may encounter. (See table 1 for a list of current Halliburton part num-
bered gauge cutters.)
Gauge Cutter OD Selection

As a general rule, to prevent a lock or tool string from hanging up or getting stuck
in the wellbore, a gauge cutter of equal OD to the largest size tool that will be run
in the well should be run first. For tubing, a gauge cutter with an OD 1/32 in. less
then the drift ID of the tubing (full gauge) should be run. For wells that will
require the setting or removal of a flow control from a nipple, a gauge OD that is
.010 in. under the ID of the nipple and between 1.5 and 2 in. in length at its largest
OD should be run first. This matches the largest OD of most known no-go type
lock systems. If the flow control incorporates a no-go sub (N type) or no-go type
equalizing valve housing (XO or RO type) then a gauge that is .005 in. under the
nipple ID and between 1 in. and 1.5 in.in length should be run prior to running or

pulling the device. The no-go subs and rings on the equalizing valve housings are
the largest OD’s that will be encountered in this case. If the proper size gauge cut-
ter as outlined above is not available, then use the largest OD tool that is closest to
the guidelines above.
3.0 Procedure
1. Gauging the well:
a. Select the proper size gauge cutter for the relevant tubing size and nipple
sizes. If the gauge cutter is to be run in a flowing well, ensure that enough
stem weight is added to overcome well pressure and friction acting on the
wire at the stuffing box.
Note Adding a three ft piece of stem below the jars may help improve the sensi-
tivity of seeing the jars open on the weight indicator.
It is not uncommon to run a gauge cutter into a flowing well prior to doing a flowing
bottom hole pressure survey or other procedure that requires that the well remain
flowing. If this is required, ensure that sufficient stem is added to allow the tools to
fall. A no-blow anti-blowup tool may be used if deemed necessary to prevent the
tools from being blown up the hole.
CAUTION Do not run a knuckle joint just below the jars when running a gauge cutter in a
well with slide pocket gas lift mandrels, because the gauge may go into the
pocket. Incorporate 3 ft of stem between the knuckle joint and jars.
b. Visually inspect the bottom of the gauge cutter for egging, and any burrs
that might be on the tool; dress if necessary with a file, and not any preexist-
ing marks.
c. Ensure that wireline valve and lower section of lubricator have sufficient ID
and length to cover (lubricate) the gauge cutter.
d. Make up the gauge cutter onto the tool string and at the tubing hanger.
e. Raise, install, and pressure-test the lubricator and wireline valve per cus-
tomer requirements.
f. Run in hole (RIH) slowly with the gauge cutter to target depth to ensure that
it will not get stuck if an obstruction or restriction is encountered. If the gauge
cutter reaches the target depth, pull it back out of the well. It may then be
assumed that there are no obstructions in the wellbore and other service oper-
ations can continue.
CAUTION Always proceed with caution when making the first trip in a wellbore that has not
been entered into for some time.

g. Should the gauge cutter sit down, pick the tool string up approximately 30
ft/10m and run back in slowly. Repeat 3 or 4 more times until the gauge cut-
ter falls past the obstruction or restriction, and record this depth.
h. If the tools continue to sit down, attempt to jar through the obstruction by
jarring down lightly approximately 4 to 6 times. Pick up the tool string after
2 or 3 downward jars to ensure that the gauge is not becoming stuck.
i. If still unsuccessful, pull the tools out of the hole and check the gauge cutter
for clues: debris such as paraffin, scale, sand, or damage to the sharp edge of
the gauge cutter. Check the well schematic to determine if a component
made up in the tubing string is at or near the depth of the obstruction or
restriction.
j. Use findings from the gauge cutter run to determine the next course of
action and tool selection.
Note If the bottom of the gauge cutter is marked up or scared up significantly,

this might be an indication of an obstruction in the wellbore. If this is the case,
then the next run should be with an impression block to try to further analyze
what the problem might be. If there are no significant marks on the gauge cutter
this indicates that there may be a restriction in the well bore. In this case, by run-
ning consecutively smaller OD gauge cutters the size of the restriction may be
determined and the job might still be accomplished by using a smaller OD set of
tools.
Optional Tool: A swaging tool may be used. The elimination of the sharp shoulder
may allow the tool to pass.
WARNING A well that has experienced a sudden drop in surface pressure may be an indica-
tion that the tubing had bridged over with sand or some other obstruction that
could be knocked loose when running the gauge. If this is suspected, pressure up
on the well to the anticipated shut-in tubing pressure prior to running the gauge
cutter or incorporate an anti-blow/no-blow tool with the gauge cutter tool string.
This will help eliminate the potential for getting blown up the hole.

Debris/Deposit Removal (Cutting the Well)

1. When using a gauge cutter to cut paraffin or scale from the tubing wall, it is
recommended that the well be cut while flowing to help remove the material
from the wellbore. Choke back the flow on surface using an adjustable choke
or some other means. Ensure that enough stem weight is added to overcome
well flow past the tool string and friction acting on the wire at the stuffing box.
2. Rig up as above and run in the hole until the deposit (scale, paraffin, etc.) is
encountered. Allow the tools to sit down and the jars to close.
3. If cutting paraffin, allow the tool weight of the tools to carry the gauge cutter
in the hole. Spool off line occasionally as the tools fall. On scale and hard par-
affin deposits it may be necessary to jar down with the gauge cutter to chip or
cut away the deposit.
4. Pick up above the deposit and allow the flow of the well to clean up the tools
occasionally while chipping scale and cutting paraffin. This will prevent the
potential of plugging up the gauge cutter with debris.
CAUTION If the cuttings or deposits bridge across the ID of the gauge cutter, there is a possi-
bility that the tool string may get blown up the hole. Occasionally pull the tools
up above the deposits and let the well flow clean off the tools. In situations where
hard or major deposits are present, it might be necessary to pull the tools from the
well to clear them off.
CAUTION Scale that is hard set to the tubing wall can cause the gauge cutter to become stuck
in the tubing. The use of a broach is recommended for scale.
CAUTION Use extreme care if scale or paraffin is encountered before the toolstring clears the
tree valves as the toolstring could become stuck across tree and wireline BOPs.

Table 1:
Item Number Description OD Length
65 G 2 Gge Cutr 2.34 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.34 9.50
65 G 3 Gge Cutr 3.00 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.90 9.51
65 G 4 Gge Cutr 1.719 15/16-10 UNS 1.71 9.51
65 G 7 Gge Cutr 1.906 x 1.375 15/16-1 1.90 9.51
65 G 11 Gge Cutr 2.34 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.34 9.50
65 G 14 Gge Cutr 1.59 x 1.187 15/16-10 1.59 8.00
65 G 15 Gge Cutr 2.19 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.19 9.50
65 G 16 Gge Cutr Spec 2.00 15/16-1 1.78 9.63
65 G 17 Gge Cutr 1.91 x 1.000 5/8-11 1.91 8.94
65 G 18 Gge Cutr 4.00 x 1/16-10 UNS 3.84 9.54
65 G 19 Gge Cutr .97 x .750 1/2-13 .97 5.94
65 G 20 Gge Cutr 1.53 x 1.187 15/16-10 1.53 7.19
65 G 21 Gge Cutr 2.859 x 2.313 1 1/16-1 2.85 9.50
65 G 22 Gge Cutr 1.42 x 1.187 15/16-10 1.42 7.19
65 G 23 Gge Cutr 3.88 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.88 9.50
65 G 24 Gge Cutr 3.781 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.78 9.52
65 G 25 Gge Cutr 2.00 15/16-10 UNS 1.84 9.63
65 G 26 Gge Cutr 1.30 x 1.000 5/8-11 1.30 6.62
65 G 27 Gge Cutr 1.23 x 1.000 5/8-11 1.23 6.62
65 G 28 Gge Cutr 1.91 x 1.375 15/16-10 1.91 9.50
65 G 29 Gge Cutr 1.48 x 1.187 15/16-10 1.48 7.19
65 G 30 Gge Cutr 2.28 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.28 9.50
65 G 33 Gge Cutr 2.813 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 2.81 9.50
65 G 36 Gge Cutr 4.16 x 3.125 1 1/16-10 4.16 12.00
65 G 37 Gge Cutr 2.25 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.25 9.50
65 G 44 Gge Fluted 1.88 x 1.375 15/16-10 1.88 12.81
65 G 80 Gge Drift 1.06 x 24 3/8-16 1.06 24.00
65 G 86 Gge Cutr 3.95 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.95 9.50
65 G 87 Gge Cutr 2.724 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.72 9.51
65 G 113 Gge Posg 2.50 x 1.781 x 4.00 2.50 4.00

Table 1:
65 G 115 Gge Cutr 5.98 x 3.125 1 1/16-10 5.99 12.04
65 G 116 Gge Cutr 1.969 x 1.375 15/16-1 1.96 9.51
65 G 117 Gge Cutr 1.625 15/16-10 UNS 1.62 9.51
65 G 118 Gge Cutr 2.53 x 1.750 15/16-10 UN 2.53 9.51
65 G 119 Gge Cutr 3.09 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.09 9.50
65 G 120 Gge Cutr 2.873 1 1/16-10 UNS PIN 2.87 9.50
65 G 121 Gge Cutr 3.00 1 1/16-10 UNS ALY 2.69 9.63
65 G 122 Gge Cutr 2.63 x 1.75 15/16-10 2.63 9.50
65 G 123 Gge Cutr 3.43 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.43 9.50
65 G 124 Gge Cutr 3.74 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.74 9.52
65 G 125 Gge Cutr 5.85 x 3.125 1 1/16-10 5.58 12.04
65 G 126 Gge Cutr 3.35 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.35 9.50
65 G 127 Gge Cutr OD 6.059 1 1/16-10 6.05 12.04
65 G 128 Gge Cutr 5.95 x 3.125 1 1/16-10 5.95 12.04
65 G 129 Gge Cutr 4.55 x 3.125 1 1/16-10 4.55 12.04
65 G 130 Gge Cutr 3.60 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.60 9.79
65 G 131 Gge Cutr 4.470 OD 3.125 FN 1 1/1 4.47 12.00
65 G 132 Gge Cutr 3.85 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.85 9.50
65 G 133 Gge Cutr 2.745 1 1/16-10 UNS 2.74 9.51
65 G 135 Gge Cutr OD 1.18 1/2 13 1.18 5.93
65 G 136 Gge Cutr 1.33 Z 1.0005/8-11 1.33 6.62
65 G 137 Gge Cutr 1.88 15/16-10 UNS 1.88 9.51
65 G 138 Gge Cutr 1.96 15/16-10 UNS 1.96 9.51
65 G 139 Gge Cutr 2.04 x 1.375 15/16-10 U 2.04 9.51
65 G 140 Gge Cutr 2.16 x 1.375 15/16-10 U 2.16 9.51
65 G 141 Gge Cutr 2.56 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.56 9.50
65 G 143 Gge Cutr 3.07 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.07 9.50
65 G 144 Gge Cutr 3.14 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.14 9.50
65 G 146 Gge Cutr 3.62 1 1/16-10 UNS 3.62 9.79
65 G 147 Gge Cutr 3.70 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 3.70 9.79
65 G 148 Gge Cutr 6.100 x 3.125 FSH 1 1/1 6.10 12.04
65 G 155 Gge Cutr 2.89 x 2.313 1 1/16-10 2.89 9.50

Table 1:
65 G 156 Gge Cutr 3.00 1 1/16-10 UNS ALY 2.73 9.63
65 G 157 Gge Cutr 2.34 15/16-10 2.31 9.50
65 G 158 Gge Cutr 5.72 x 3.125 1 1/16-10 5.72 12.04
65 G 160 Gge Cutr 5.58 OD 1 1/16-10 5.58 12.00
65 G 161 Gge Cutr 3.310 x 2.313 1 1/16- 3.31 9.54
65 G 162 Gge Cutr 3.830 x 2.313 1 1/16 3.83 9.79
65 G 166 Drift Gge 2.797 OD x 42.0 LG 2.79 42.50
65 G 167 Gge Cutr 3.250 x 2.313 1 1/16- 3.25 9.50
65 G 169 Gge Cutr 4.70 x 3.125 1 1/16- 4.70 12.00
65 G 170 Gge Cutr 3.50 x 2.313 1 1/16- 3.50 9.50
65 G 171 Gge Cutr 3.73 x 2.313 1 1/16- 3.73 9.50
65 G 172 Gge Cutr 3.75 x 2.313 1 1/16- 3.75 9.50
65 G 173 Gge Cutr 3.80 x 2.313 1 1/16- 3.80 9.50
65 G 174 Gge Cutr 3.81 1 1/16-10 3.81 9.50
65 G 175 Gge Cutr 2.50 x 1.750 15/16-10 2.50 9.50
65 G 176 Gge Cutr 2.810 1 1/16-10 2.81 9.50
65 G 177 Gge Cutr 2.31 1 1/16-10 2.31 9.50
65 G 178 Gge Cutr 5.96 1 1/16-10 5.96 12.00
65 G 180 Gge Cutr 4.70 x 3.125 1 9/16- 4.70 12.27
65 G 181 Gge Cutr 4.470 x 3.125 1 9/16- 4.47 12.27
65 G 182 Gge Cutr 5.985 x 3.125 1 9/16- 5.98 12.27
65 G 183 Gge Cutr 5.947 x 3.125 1 9/16- 5.94 12.27

CN03568
Otis® Gauge Cutter

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.3: Perforator Dummy Use
SL 2.3: Perforator Dummy Use

1.0 Scope
Prior to conducting electric line logging or perforating services inside or through
the tubing, a dummy ran to simulate the longer and stiffer logging tools and per-
forator guns is performed on the well utilizing slickline. A perforator dummy of
the same size and length of logging tools or perforator gun is run in the hole to the
target depth. This service is used to determine if the there are any well bore prob-
lems that could potentially lead to the loss or damage of the costly logging tools
or potentially dangerous perforators.

The perforator dummy (sometimes referred to as a drift bar) is the preferred tool
to use to drift the tubing in slickline operations (Figure 1). Other tools such as a
bailer bottom or long sections of made-up stem may be used to drift the tubing.
The perforator dummy is a long cylindrical-shaped tool that is usually made from
aluminum. Perforator dummies or “dummies” come in various diameters that are
common to the size of standard logging tools or perforator guns (Table 1).
Perforator dummies of short length (5ft.-15ft.), are usually made as a single piece.
Longer perforator dummies (20ft.-60ft.), are made up from 5ft. long sections to
achieve a length that represents that the logging tool or perforating gun to be run.
Perforator dummies are used to not only gauge the ID of the tubing, but to drift it
as well. In some cases the smaller length of the gauge cutter will make it down the
tubing, but the longer length of the same OD such as a logging tool or perforating
gun will not make it past a bend or curve in the tubing. A dummy is used to
determine if the high cost logging tools or potentially dangerous explosive perfo-
rator will make it to the target depth without getting hung up in the hole. The
dummy is used to simulate the length, stiffness, and OD of the logging tool or
perforating gun that will be run in the well later, to ensure that these tools can
reach their target depth without getting stuck or damaged.
Making a dummy run on slickline prior to running a long stiff logging assembly is
becoming common practice with more deviated and high angle wells being
drilled. THe dummy run can help eliminate the cost and safety issues associated
with damaging or attempting to fish logging tool or perforator in a well.
Always run a gauge cutter prior to running a perforator dummy, unless a gauge
run or other tools of sufficient OD have been run in the well during the same
project. the gauge cutter OD should be larger then the OD of the perforator
dummy. The smaller length and fluid bypass of the gauge cutter, its proximity to
the jars, the smaller OD of the stem, and the shorter length of the gauge cutter tool
string assembly make it the desired tool to run in the hole prior to the longer per-
forator dummy. The gauge cutter tool string assembly is easier to jar loose from
any well debris encountered and is also relatively easy to fish, if it is left in the
hole.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.3: Perforator Dummy Use
Do not run gauge on the bottom of a perforator dummy. Some customers may
request that this be done to eliminate a slickline run into the well. The larger OD
of the gauge cutter will be the most likely point that could get lodged or stuck in
the wellbore. The length and OD of the perforator dummy with gauge is left in
the hole, an extremely tall lubricator stack may be required to get it out if the well
is not dead.
3.0 Procedure
1. Ensure that proper length and OD of perforator dummy is selected (Table 1).
The perforator dummy should be as long as the logging tools or perforator
that is to be run and must be the same OD or slightly larger if the same OD
dummy is not available. If the perforator dummy is to be run in a flowing
well, ensure that enough stem weight is added to overcome well pressure and
flow friction acting on the dummy and tool string.
2. Make up sufficient lubricator stack with the appropriate ID to cover the length
and OD of the perforator dummy and tool string. Test the same in accordance
with customer requirements.
3. Select and run an appropriate-sized gauge cutter for the job. Note fluid levels,
tight spots and location of any increased drag when coming out of the hole.
4. Make up the perforator dummy assembly to the desired length and attach it to
a tool string consisting of spang jars, at least 5 ft. of stem, knuckle joint, and
rope socket.
Note To ease makeup and removal of the perforator dummy, it is recommended

that a quick disconnect be used below the jars. The stem and jars are used to facil-
itate getting the dummy loose if it gets wedged into a tight spot or crooked tub-
ing. Consider the use of a pulling tool with a rope socket attached to the dummy.
5. Run in hole (RIH) to target depth slowly, making periodic pickups to deter-
mine pickup weight on tool string and pull out of the hole.
6. Proceed with caution through those areas identified by the gauge cutter run as
tight spots or areas of increased drag. Get pickup weights more frequently in
these intervals.
7. If it appears that the drag is continuing to increase and is approaching the safe
working tension of the wire, then pull the dummy from the well. Note the
amount of drag (over-pull) required to get tools moving and the interval
where this drag occurs.
8. If the perforator dummy sets down, get a pickup weight. If no appreciable
increase in a drag has taken place, then jar down slightly to see if the tools will
fall through the restriction. Pick up after every downward jar to ensure that
tools are not getting stuck. If the tools don’t fall, pull out of the hole.
9. Visually inspect the perforator dummy for wear marks that might give an
indication as to what may have been encountered. Review the well schematic
to determine if there is a reason such as cork screwed tubing, buckled tubing,
a tight spot, etc.
10. Based on the perforator dummy run, determine next course of action.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.4: Swaging Operations
SL 2.4: Swaging Operations

1.0 Scope
Minor restrictions or tight spots in the production tubing string resulting from
mishandled tubing can usually be opened up to allow passage of flow controls by
performing a swaging operation with slickline.

Swaging operations are limited to minor restrictions such as mashed pipe and
over-torqued tubing and should not be attempted when damage to the tubing is
severe. Swaging operations are normally performed after several attempts have
been made to run smaller size gauge cutters through a tight spot in the tubing. An
impression block may also be run to determine the extent of damage.
The tool used to perform swaging operations is called a swaging tool (fig. 1). The
swaging tool is tapered on both ends. The upper part of the tool incorporates the
standard tool string thread connection with fish neck. The tool also contains a
fluid bypass. Swaging tools are available for several sizes of tubing or can be cus-
tom-made to meet the dimensional requirements for a specific job. Swaging tools
may also be used to gauge the tubing prior to running plugs and other devices.
3.0 Procedure
1. Determine the largest ID of the tight spotting in the tubing by running consec-
utively smaller gauge cutters and record the largest size that made it through.
(See SL 1.22 Gauging the Well)
2. Select the largest swaging tool with an OD that will drift any nipple encoun-
tered, but be slightly larger than the OD of the gauge cutter that made it
through the tight spot.
CAUTION The OD of the swage should not exceed the ID of any landing nipples that may be
encountered, because the tool could become wedged into the nipple.
3. Make up the swaging tool on the end of a tool string, run in the hole, and jar
down on the tight spot. Jar up on the tool string occasionally until the tools
pull fee to ensure that the swaging tool is not getting wedged into the tight
spot.
4. When the swaging tool falls through, pull backup into the tight spot and jar
up until the tool comes free. Repeat jarring down and up through the tight
spot as necessary until the tool moves freely without hanging up.
5. Repeat the above operations as necessary with consecutively larger swaging
tools until the desired ID through the tight spot in the tubing is achieved.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.4: Swaging Operations
CAUTION When swaging at shallow depths with no fluid, a heavy bouncing tool string may
cause the wire to pull out of the rope socket. Consider the use of an accelerator.
Note Wire fatigue above a no-knot type rope socket during heavy jarring may
be reduced by placing a knuckle joint between the rope socket and top piece of
stem. The knuckle joint allows the wire to flex freely, thus eliminating the poten-
tial for fatigue.
CAUTION Excessive stem weight might cause the swage to get stuck rather than changing
the ID of tubing.
4.0 Appendix
CN03567
Otis® Swaging Tool

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.5: Broaching Operations
SL 2.5: Broaching Operations

1.0 Scope
Slickline broaching operations are used to remove burrs, rust, scale and other
types of hard buildup in the production tubing string to ensure the passage of
flow controls into and out of the wellbore.

Tubing broaches, run on slickline, are used to:
• Remove mill scale, mineral scale, and of other hard deposits from the tubing
wall.
• Remove metal burrs from the tubing ID.
• Remove internally extruded metal from the tubing connection (where exces-
sive torque has been applied).
• Enlarge the ID of various undersized components that may have been
installed as part of the tubing string.
Tubing broaches are available in several different designs and used for specific
applications.
Segmented Broach
This type of broach consist of a carrier mandrel, nut, and three (3) broaching spools/
segments with helical-type cutting surfaces (figure 1). This broach is used primarily to
remove mill scale and other deposits on the tubing walls prior to installation of a
plunger lift system. It can also be used for cleaning up long intervals inside of tubing
where buildup or scale is not severe. Segments and mandrels are available in various
tubing sizes from 1 1/4 in. through 4 1/2 in. (table 1). This broach should always be
run with two lower segments pointed down and the upper segment pointed up.
Diamond Broach
Diamond broaches contain raised and hardened diamond-shaped cutting surfaces (fig-
ure 2). They are used primarily to remove metal burrs and short intervals of light scale
buildup.
Note Do not use around or near landing nipples or packing/polished bores.
Pineapple Broach
The raised cutting surfaces on this broach are more square shaped and protrude further
away from the body to allow for more fluid bypass (Figure 3). This broach is used to
remove metal burrs, and for moderate scale build up from mineral deposits over long
intervals.
Tapered Broach
This type of broach resembles a swage with hardened tapered cutting edges. It is used
primarily for removing metal burrs, etc., from very short intervals in the tubing (figure
4). Tapered broaches are also available with diamond- and pineapple- shaped cutting
surfaces.

Paddle Broach
This broach contains hardened paddles/blades that have been welded to a relatively
small OD mandrel (figure 5). This broach is used to remove heavy mineral scale
deposits from the tubing walls over long intervals. This paddle broach is ideal for this
purpose as it has sufficient fluid bypass to allow removal of scale while the well is
flowing.
CAUTION Cut the up-facing tip off of the top blades to eliminate the possibility of them
hanging at the end of the tubing or the bottom of seal assemblies that may be
encountered in the completion.
Before running a broach, the minimum ID of the tubing restriction that is to be

enlarged must be determined. Then a broach that is slightly larger then the
restriction is used to begin enlarging the ID of the restriction. Once the initial
broach moves freely through the restriction is used to begin enlarging the ID
of the restriction. Once the initial broach moves freely through the restriction,
the next larger-sized broach is used. This process is repeated until the restric-
tion is cleaned or a desirable ID is reached.
3.0 Procedure
1. Determine the largest ID of the tight spot in the tubing by running consecu-
tively smaller gauge cutters, and record the largest size that made it through
(see WL 2.2 Gauging Operations).
2. Select the desired broach depending on the application outlined above. Select
a broach with an OD that will drift any nipples encountered, but be slightly
larger then the OD of the gauge cutter that made it through the tight spot.
Consideration should be made for shutting in the well or flowing the well
during broaching operations.
n Shut in the well when broaching short metallic restrictions. This is most
important when using a serrated tapered broach as it may get wedged in
the tubing. With the diamond broach the fluid bypass channels may
become clogged with paraffin or scale. In either case, the tools can be
blown up the hole if the broach restricts the flow of the well long enough
to create a differential pressure that will overcome the weight of the tool
string.
n Flow the well when using pineapple and paddle broaches with large
fluid bypass during scale removal operations. It is recommended that an
adjustable choke be used during this process to control the flow. In addi-
tion, check the broach periodically to ensure that the fluid bypass areas
are not becoming clogged.
CAUTION The OD of the broach should not exceed the ID of any landing nipples that may be
encountered as the tool could become wedged into or damage the nipple.
CAUTION When selecting a broach to remove scale, check broach for fluid bypass through
center.

3. Make up the broach on the end of a tool string, run in the hole, and jar down
on the tight spot. Jar up on the tool string occasionally until the tools pull free
to ensure that the broaching tool is not getting wedged into the tight spot.
4. When the broach falls through, pull back through or into the tight spot and jar
up until the tool comes free. Repeat jarring down and up through the tight
spot as necessary until the tool moves freely without hanging up. When
broaching mineral scales it is recommended that the tools be pulled back
above the scale deposit periodically to clear away buildup of debris on the
tool. Also, the broach should be pulled on occasion for cleaning and inspec-
tion during heavy extended scale removal operations.
5. Repeat the above operations as necessary using consecutively larger broaches
until the desired ID through the tight spot or scale deposits are achieved.
CAUTION When broaching at shallow depths with no fluid, a heavy bouncing tool sting may
cause the wire to pull out of the rope socket.
Note Wire fatigue above a no-knot type rope socket during heavy jarring may
be reduced by placing a knuckle joint between the rope socket and top piece of
stem. The knuckle joint allows the wire to flex freely, thus eliminating the poten-
tial for fatigue.

4.0 Appendix
CN03570
Otis® Tubing Broach

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.6: Use of Impression Blocks
SL 2.6: Use of Impression Blocks

1.0 Scope
An impression block is a tool that is used in wireline operations to help identify
obstructions and restrictions in the wellbore. An impression block helps to iden-
tify these problems by taking an impression of the object. The block can then be
used to determine the proper fishing tool to try to build and remove the debris or
restriction in the wellbore.

An impression block is the primary diagnostic tool used in wireline operations to
identify problems downhole. It performs its function by taking an impression
block contains a very soft malleable alloy to receive and hold the impression of
what it encounters. The alloy is poured into the tool in a molten state and allowed
to cool with approximately 3/4 in. to 1 in. of the alloy protruding out the bottom
of the tool.
Note Re-pour or replace the impression block once the alloy is down to within
1
/4 in. of the impression block housing.
Note Insure that alloy retainers are in place and secure to prevent the alloy from
falling out of the housing into the wellbore.
3.0 Procedure
1. Select and run the proper-sized gauge cutter for the relevant tubing size and
nipple sizes.
2. If an obstruction or restriction is encountered on the gauge run, an impression
block should be run next.
3. Select the proper-sized impression block for the job, relevant to tubing and
nipple sizes.
4. Dress up the impression block to remove all imperfections.
Note A ball-peen hammer and rasp file are most commonly used. Leave enough
lead on the bottom of the impression block to get the desired impression.
5. Zero the tool string prior to making an impression block up on the tool string
to avoid possible marking of the impression block while zeroing.
6. Run in the hole at approximately 250-300 ft/min. Slow down when encounter-
ing nipples, gas lift side pockets, crossovers, etc.
Note Make pickups frequently while running to insure that the impression
block is still moving freely. The impression block has no fluid bypass and there is
potential that debris could fall on top of it and make it difficult to remove from the
wellbore.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.6: Use of Impression Blocks
7. Stop at point above the obstruction or restriction and get a pickup weight. Pro-
ceed in the hole at approximately 100ft/min and set down. Allow the jars to
close and avoid bouncing the jars.
Note If jars are sluggish, hit down two or three times.
CAUTION Care should be taken not to flare out the lead or knock the lead off of the impres-
sion block by jarring down too hard.
8. Use the markings on the impression block to determine the next course of
action. In some cases running various sizes of impression blocks may better
identify the problem.
Note To make a copy of the impression, use an ink pad to apply ink to the bot-
tom of the impression block. Then press the impression block against a clean sheet
of paper that is supported underneath with a thin rag or cloth. This helps in
applying the ink to the paper. This creates a fairly nice picture of the bottom of the
impression block that can be faxed to other locations for further analysis and can
be used for marking special fishing tools.
Note Loose sand, scale, and paraffin will not make much of an impression; a
bailer might be consider as the next possible run.
4.0 Appendix
CN03569
Otis® Impression Tool

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.7: Paraffin Cutting and Scale Removal
SL 2.7: Paraffin Cutting and Scale Removal

1.0 Scope
Paraffin cutting and scale removal are done to ensure proper flow of well fluids.
Removal of paraffin and/or scale may need to be performed prior to running or
pulling any wireline-retrievable flow control device (locks, plugs, safety valves,
etc).

1. Paraffin and scale can both hinder well flow and the ability to maneuver
downhole. Paraffin is the result of a waxy buildup of dehydrated hydrocar-
bons. Scale results from mineral deposits on the tubing bore.
2. Paraffin cutting and/or scale removal is done by the use of wire scratchers
and paraffin cutters.
3.0 Procedure
1. Paraffin cutting and scale removal well shut in.
a. Select the proper size paraffin scratcher, knife, or cutter for the relevant tub-
ing size and weight. Consider paraffin/scale type and density.
Note Adding a three foot piece of stem below the jars may help reduce the risk
of jars becoming fouled with paraffin/scale.
b. Make up the cutter, knife, or scratcher onto the tool string and tubing
hanger.
c. Raise into lubricator and make up lubricator to the wellhead. Pressure-test if

necessary per customer requirements.
d. Open the wellbore and slowly go in the hole with the cutter, knife, or
scratcher to target depth. Allow the tool weight to carry the tools in the hole.
Feed off-line as necessary. On hard paraffin or scale, it may be necessary to
jar down with tools to remove paraffin/scale.
e. Continue working the tool downhole, removing as much paraffin/scale as

possible without getting stuck.
f. Pull the tools back to the surface.
g. Close the swab valve. Open the wing valve and flow the well, removing
paraffin/scale that was cut loose.
h. Shut the well in with the wing valve.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.7: Paraffin Cutting & Scale Removal
i. Open the swab valve, repeat steps until the wellbore is clean.
CAUTION Care should be taken if the toolstring has not cleared the wireline BOPs and tree
when the paraffin or scale is encountered.
2. Paraffin cutting and scale removal well flowing.

a. Ensure that enough sinker bar is added to the tool string to allow the tools
to overcome the flow rate past the tool string and friction acting on the wire
at the stuffing box.
b. Start with a smaller scratcher/knife to allow fluid bypass.
c. Choke back the flow rate on the surface using an adjustable choke or some
other means and monitor the flow rate during operations.
d. Follow steps in the shut-in procedure.
e. Pick up above paraffin/scale and allow the well to flow, cleaning up the
tools occasionally. This will help theprevent tools from plugging with paraf-
fin/scale.
f. Continue until the wellbore is clear of paraffin/scale.
CAUTION Cutting paraffin may cause a plug or ball and there is a possibility that the tool
string may get blown up the hole. Occasionally pull up above the paraffin/scale
buildup and allow the well to flow, cleaning up the tools. In hard, thick paraffin
the tool string may need to be removed from the wellbore and cleaned on the sur-
face.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.8: Selection and Use of Flow Controls
SL 2.8: Selection and Use of Flow Controls

1.0 Scope
A flow control device is any device set in a nipple or in the tubing to control the
flow of the well, (safety valves, storm chokes, plugs, standing valves, downhole
chokes, etc.).

• The proper flow control assembly should not be determined by the relevant
wellbore conditions and type of operation to be accomplished. All flow con-
trols should be rated for the maximum differential pressure to be seen at the
depth the plug is set.
• Positive plug should be run when the objective is to hold pressure from above
and below (ex. plug-backs, testing tubing, etc.).
• Pump-through plugs should be run when you want to have the ability to
pump through the plug to kill the well in case of emergencies.
• An equalizing device or equalizing sub should always be run in conjunction
with a flow control device.
• Tubing pressure and fluids should always be noted when setting plugs for
proper equalization when pulling those plugs.
• A check-set should always be run to verify proper setting of the lock when
and where applicable.
3.0 Procedure
1. For determining the proper assembly to be run, obtain all relevant informa-
tion from the well schematic, last well test, BHP, prior W.L logs.
2. Verify that the flow control has the proper pressure rating
3. Always shut the well in when pulling and running flow controls to avoid get-
ting blown up the hole.
4. Always run a gauge cutter prior to running or pulling the flow control. This
help ensure that the flow control can be run safely in the wellbore. The gauge
cutter should be .010 in.under the nipple or retrieved from ID that the flow
control is to be seated in.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.9: W Slip Lock System
SL 2.9: W Slip Lock System

1.0 Scope
A means of anchoring a flow control in the wellbore without using a nipple.

• The pressure rating on W slip-type mandrels is 1,500 psi.
• Has serrated slip which anchor into the tubing wall, and has a large rubber
element instead of a packing stack.
3.0 Procedure
1. Can be run on a W running tool or a friction tool (provided the expander pins
are removed) and is pulled with RB, BB, or UO.
2. Gauge run should be made prior to running the W mandrel.
3. See attachment for running and pulling procedure.
4. Always set the W mandrel a minimum of 100ft. below mud line. This is so that
in case you can’t retrieve it, you can still P & A the well without moving a ring
on location.
CAUTION Do not use a pulling tool with has a longer reach than the type “RB” or type “BB”
pulling tools. Tools with a longer reach will not unlock the type W mandrel.
Do not sit back down on W mandrel while setting it. It may unlock the mandrel
and let it fall downhole.
Do not use a shear-down-to-release pulling tool as the pin might shear when jar-
ring down to unlock.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.10: D Collar Lock System
SL 2.10: D Collar Lock System

1.0 Scope
The Type D Collar Lock is designed to lock in any collar recess of EUE or NU tub-
ing.

The Type D Collar Locks are retrievable and easy to run. They are only used in
standard-weight 8 round tubing, and can be set in any collar in the tubing. They
are generally use as DD bridge plugs, a lock for a safety valves, and are rated for
5,000 psi., depending on the condition of the tubing. The type D collar lock has an
internal mandrel. When pulled up into a tubing collar, the internal mandrel’s keys
latch and the internal sleeve sides up and locks into place.
3.0 Procedure
Running & Pulling of type D collar locks
1. Make a gauge run to the desired depth.
2. Run type D collar lock down below the desired depth, then pick up to the next
collar. The keys will automatically locate into the collar recess.
3. Set by upward jarring. Once you have sheared off, do not sit back down on the
D collar lock, since the running tool can unlock the D collar lock by hitting the
internal sleeve, causing the sleeve to move down and unlock the keys. Oil jars
can be used as an option for setting.
Note The GRL is the only pulling tool that should be run in pulling a Type D
Collar Lockout. The GRL pulling tool has an elongated core that goes into the D
collar lock and recesses into the internal sleeve. Hitting down on the internal
sleeve will cause the sleeve to move down and unlock the keys. The GS pulling
tool will latch the D collar lock but will not unlock it. The internal sleeve must be
pushed down in order for the keys to move inward for the lock to unlock.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.11: S, N, & T, Q Equipment
SL 2.11: S, N, & T, Q Equipment

1.0 Scope
This equipment is profile selective, used to lock flow controls in the wellbore.

1. This equipment is simpler to run due to the fact that it will only set in the pro-
file it is supposed to.
2. This equipment has an external F/N.
3. By changing only the keys and/or the inner mandrel, you can lock in any pro-
file in the wellbore. (ex. pos.1 - pos. 7)
4. S equipment is for standard weight tubing made up of lock and locator man-
drel(s).
Note V equipment is same as S equipment, but has a larger packing bore. It is

normally set higher in the well for swabbing purposes.
5. N equipment does not require a locator mandrel as it no-go’s in the nipple.

6. T equipment is the same as S equipment. It is built for heavy wall tubing, and
has a smaller packing bore I.D. It is only used in pos. 1-5 nipples, but does not
have a higher pressure rating.
7. Q equipment is the same as N equipment. It is built for heavy wall tubing and
it no-go’s in the nipple, but does not have higher pressure rating.
3.0 Procedure
1. A gauge run should be made prior to running and/or pulling S, N, T, and Q
equipment.
2. After verifying that the tubing is free of obstructions or restrictions, the proper
running prong is attached to the T running tool (primary R/T). The running
prong is used for fluid bypass when running in hole.
3. See attachment for running and pulling procedure for S, N, T and Q equip-
ment.
4. Pinning of this equipment depends on many variables.
n In heavy fluid or mud, light pins (brass or aluminum) are adjustable due
to inhibited jar action. If you have to work through any restrictions, steel
pins are advisable to stop from shearing pins before setting lock.
5. This equipment must be equalized fully before you can latch due to the design
of this equipment.
6. In the event that you are unable to use the T running tool, an alternate running
tool is the J running tool. If this running tool is used, no pickups can be made,
as the locking keys’ clogs will not allow you to do so.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.12: X - XN & R - RN Equipment
SL 2.12: X - XN & R - RN Equipment

1.0 Scope
X, R, XN & RN equipment are flow control equipment used to control wellbore
pressure at predetermined depths.

The type X & R running tools are used to run and set X, R, XN & RN locking man-
drels & subsurface controls in their respective tubing landing nipples. These run-
ning tools may also be used to located existing X & R landing nipples. These
nipples can also be used as a measure of depth correlation to other W/L measure-
ments and tubing details.
3.0 Procedure
1. Following gauging operation 2.2.
2. Select the proper X & R and XN & XR equipment.
3. Select the proper size X, R, XR, & RN equipment for the relevant tubing size
and nipple size. Ensure that stem weight is enough to over come the well pres-
sure and friction acting on the wire at the stuffing.
4. The corresponding running tool should be made up to the desired X, R, XN &
RN locks, and placed in the select position.
5. Ensure that the wireline valve and the lower section of the lubricator have suf-
ficient length and bore to cover “lubricate” the selected equipment.
6. Make up X, R, XN & RN equipment onto the tool string.
7. Raise into the lubricator and make up the lubricator to the wellhead. Pressure-
test if necessary per customer requirement.
8. Open the well-bore and go in hole with equipment.
9. Proceed down into wellbore until the desired landing nipple is located.
10. Next, lower the running tool & lock through the nipple approximately. five to
six feet.
11. Raise the tool string back through the nipple.
12. An approximate 200 lb strain (bind) is recommended to pull the running tool
up through nipple.
13. Now, with the lock/running tool in the control position, lower back down into
the nipple to set the lock.
14. Use downward jarring action to shear the top pin in the running tool.
15. Pull an upward strain of approximately. 200 lb to confirm that the lock man-
drel has been set.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.12: X - XN & R - RN Equipment
16. After confirmation, upward jarring action will shear the bottom pin, separat-
ing the running tool and the lock mandrels, allowing the running tool and tool
string to return to the surface.
Note The no-go restriction designed into the types ‘XN’ and ‘RN’ Landing Nip-
ples will not allow the equalizing valve body attached to the RN lock mandrels.
The running tool must be placed in the control position before reaching the land-
ing nipple. This must be either be done by hand at the surface, or the running tool
may be positioned to the control position in a type ‘X’ or ‘R’ landing nipple (or
proper ID packing nipple) located in the tubing above the No-Go nipple.
As the lock mandrel reaches the no-go shoulder in the landing nipple, the tool
string will stop, and the lock mandrel may be set in the same manner as types ‘X’
and ‘R’.
If the operator is unable to locate in the nipple with the lock mandrel, after going
through the procedure to places the running tool in the control position, there are
several things that could cause this:
• There could be weak double-acting key springs on the lock mandrel.

• There could be worn shoulders on the running inner mandrel, or the locating
dogs, or both. If these shoulders are worn off the tool cannot be kept in the
control position.
• The bottom pin in the running tool may be sheared. If there has been any
upward jar action as the tool passes the nipple restrictions above, the bottom
pin in the running tool may have been sheared.
4.0 Appendix
Reference - 2.2 Gauging the Well

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.13: RPT Lock System
SL 2.13: RPT Lock System

1.0 Scope
The Halliburton RPT Lock Mandrel is a high pressure rated top no-go lock system
for plugging applications. The lock mandrel is designed to land and lock subsur-
face flow controls in a RPT landing nipple profile only. It is designed to hold pres-
sure differentials from above or below and is installed and retrieved by standard
wireline methods.

The RPT Lock Mandrel is run with a Halliburton RXNTM Running Tool in the
retracted position. The running tool is attached to the lock mandrel and shear
pinned. This places the expander sleeve in the fully extended position. When the
expander sleeve is fully extended, the key springs bias the keys in to the retracted
position. With the keys retracted, the lock mandrel can be lowered and landed on
the No-Go shoulder at the top of the landing nipple hone diameter.
Once landed, downward jar action shears the top shear pins in the running tool,
which permits the expander sleeve to move down beneath the keys to the fully
locked position.
When locked, upward jar action checks to determine if the lock is locked and
shears the lower shear pin to release the running tool from the lock mandrel.
RPT locks have either a shear pin hold-down or interference hold-down feature.
The shear pin hold-down locks the expander sleeve and the key retainer together
when the lock is fully set. The pins must be sheared to pull the lock. The interfer-
ence hold-down locks the expander sleeve and the packing mandrel together with
an interference fit when the lock is fully set. These hold-downs inhibit the lock
mandrel from being flowed from the landing nipple.
CAUTION Do not attempt to run the lock mandrel with the running tool in the locate position (keys
biased outward). The lock mandrel expander sleeve will extend under the keys and will
not permit the keys to fully retract when the running tool is in the locate configuration.
Note For specific design information on this lock mandrel assembly, refer to the appro-
priate Design Specification Data (DSD).

3.0 Procedure
Installation Procedure
Note This procedure is for when a RXTM or a RXN non-selective running tool is
used.
Attach the lock mandrel to the running tool in the no-go or fully extended posi-
tion as prescribed in the running tool’s Basic Design and Maintenance Instructions
(BDMI).
To ensure proper operation of both the running tool and the lock mandrel, the fol-
lowing should be checked:
1. The keys of the lock mandrel should be fully retracted.
CAUTION Do not attempt to run this lock mandrel in the locate position.
2. The lower shear pin should be thoroughly bradded and cross center punched
to ensure that it stays in place during the running operation.
3. The shear pin should be filed flush with the outside diameter of the packing
mandrel.
4. Make up the lock mandrel and the running tool assembly on a standard wire-
line tool string.
5. Lower the tool string into the tubing until the RPT landing nipple is located.
6. Continue lowering the tool string until the lock mandrel no-go lands on the
no-go shoulder of the landing nipple.
7. Jar down hard to shear the upper shear pins in the running tool and lock the
lock mandrel in the nipple.
8. Test the lock mandrel by applying an upward strain on the wireline. If the
mandrel is properly locked in the nipple, upward jarring shears the lower pin
in the running tool and allows the tool string to be returned to the surface.
9. If the mandrel is not properly locked in the nipple, it should jar loose before
the lower pin is sheared. If this should happen, lower the mandrel back into
the nipple and repeat Step 7.

Retrieving
The GR Pulling Tool is recommended to retrieve the RPT Lock Mandrel. The GS
Pulling Tool may be used as an alternate as outlined below.
Note The proper pulling prong should always be used with the pulling tool and
adequate time for equalization should always be allowed before jarring upward
on the lock mandrel.
1. Make up the proper size prong into the bottom of the pulling tool and attach
the pulling tool to a standard wireline tool string.
2. Lower the tool string into the bore of the tubing until the lock mandrel is con-
tacted.
3. As the pulling tool enters the lock mandrel, the prong ensures that the flow
control device is placed in the equalizing position. (A slight downward jar
action may be necessary to shift the valve.)
4. The weight of the tool string should be allowed to rest on the lock mandrel
while pressure across the subsurface flow control device is being equalized.
5. After equalization has been confirmed, an upward strain on the wireline indi-
cates whether or not the pulling tool is latched into the fish neck of the lock
mandrel.
6. Jar at least one firm stroke downward on the lock mandrel to loosen the lock
mandrel in the nipple.
7. Place an upward strain on the wireline. In most cases, this is all that is
required to move the expander sleeve up, allowing the keys to retract and
extract the lock mandrel from the landing nipple.
8. In some cases, upward jar action may be necessary to extract the lock mandrel.
9. If the pin in the GR pulling tool shears without pulling the lock mandrel, then a GS
Pulling Tool can be used.
CAUTION Do not make up a pulling prong into the GS Pulling Tool when retrieving a lock mandrel
with an RPT Equalizing Valve attached. Any attempt to jar down and shear off will be
obstructed by the pulling prong and cause damage to the pulling prong or the equalizing
valve.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.14: RPV Lock Mandrel
SL 2.14: RPV Lock Mandrel

1.0 Scope
The RPV lock mandrel is a modified version of the RPT lock mandrel. It is
designed primarily for the installation of subsurface safety valves in RPT landing
nipple profiles.

The RPV lock mandrel is run with a Halliburton RXN Running Tool. The running
tool is attached to the lock mandrel and is shear pinned. This places the expander
sleeve in the fully extended position. When the expander sleeve is fully extended,
the key springs bias the keys into the retracted position. With the keys retracted,
the lock mandrel can be lowered and landed on the no-go shoulder at the top of
the landing nipple hone diameter.
Once landed, downward jar action shears the top shear pins in the running tool,
which permits the expander sleeve to move down beneath the keys to the fully
locked position. When locked, upward jar action checks to determine if the lock is
locked and shears the lower shear pin to release the running tool from the lock
mandrel.
The lock mandrel has matching nonhelical teeth inside the keys and on the OD of
the expander sleeve, which engage and become the primary hold-down when the
lock is sub-jected to a pressure differential from below. This primary hold-down
inhibits the lock mandrel from being flowed or pulled from the landing nipple
when a pressure differential exists from below.
3.0 Procedure
Installation
(When RX or RXN nonselective running tool is used)
Attach the lock mandrel to the running tool in the no-go or fully extended posi-
tion as prescribed in the running tool’s basic design and maintenance instructions.
• The keys of the lock mandrel should be fully retracted.

• The lower shear pin should be thoroughly bradded and cross-center punched
to ensure that it stays in place during the running operation.
• The shear pin should be filed flush with the outside diameter of the packing
mandrel.
1. Make up the lock mandrel and the running tool assembly on a standard wire-

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.14: RPV Lock Mandrel
line toolstring.
2. Lower the toolstring into the tubing until the RPT landing nipple is located.
3. Continue lowering the toolstring until the lock mandrel no-go lands on the
no-go shoulder of the landing nipple.
4. Jar down hard to shear the upper shear pins in the running tool and to lock
the lock mandrel in the nipple.
in the running tool and allows the toolstring to be returned to the surface.
Note If the mandrel is improperly locked in the nipple, it should jar loose before
the lower pin is sheared. If this should happen, lower the mandrel back into the
nipple and repeat Step 4.
Retrieving
The GR pulling tool is recommended to retrieve the RPV lock mandrel. The GS
pulling tool may be used as an alternate as outlined below.
Note The proper pulling prong should always be used with the pulling tool,
and adequate time for equalization should always be allowed before jarring
upward on the lock mandrel.
the pulling tool to a standard wireline toolstring.
tacted.
control device is placed in the equalizing position. (Slight downward jar
action may be necessary to shift the valve.)
4. The weight of the toolstring should be allowed to rest on the lock mandrel
cates whether the pulling tool is latched into the fish neck of the lock mandrel.
7. Place an upward strain on the wireline. In most cases, this is all that is
required to move the expander sleeve up, allowing the keys to retract and
extract the lock mandrel from the landing nipple.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.15: SAFETYSET® Lock System
SL 2.15: SAFETYSET® Lock System

1.0 Scope
The SAFETYSET® lock mandrel system is a drive-down, jar-up-to-lock, no-go-
type lock mechanism designed specifically for wireline-retrievable surface-con-
trolled subsurface safety valve applications.

The running tool is attached to the lock and safety valve. The piston of the valve is dis-
placed by the core of the running tool. The spring force from the displaced piston is trans-
ferred to the dog retainer through a pin that ties the core and the dog retainer together. The
dog retainer is held in place by the retaining dogs engaged in the lock mandrel fish neck
profile. The retaining dogs are maintained in the profile by support of the lower setting
sleeve.
The toolstring is attached to the running tool through the top sub. The top sub is releas-
ably connected to the lower setting sleeve by a set of transfer lugs which only lock the two
together when the valve is pressured open. This is accomplished by a receiving groove on
the core located so that when the core is in its uppermost position (no control line pres-
sure), the lugs are free to move inward and DO NOT lock the top sub to the lower setting
sleeve. When the core moves down (valve pressured open), this receiving groove moves
down from the lugs, locking them out. With this mechanism, the running tool does not
attempt to expand or lock out the locking keys unless there is sufficient control line pres-
sure on the safety valve.
Once the lock and valve are driven into the landing nipple and sufficient control line pres-
sure is applied, upward jarring through the top sub and the lower setting sleeve moves the
locking sleeve of the lock mandrel upward against a locking shoulder on the lock ring. At
this point the locking keys are in the expanded position. The locking keys are expanded to
hold the lock and the valve in the landing nipple so that continued upward jarring will lock
the locking sleeve in the up position. As the locking shoulder on the locking sleeve passes
a similar shoulder on the ID of the lock ring, the locking lugs on the running tool move
into a receiving groove on the core, releasing the lower setting sleeve. Simultaneously a
receiving groove in the lower setting sleeve allows the retainer dogs to retract. At this
point all engagements are retracted and the running tool releases from the lock and the
safety valve.
Retrieval of the lock and the safety valve requires the use of an unlocking tool between the
pulling tool and the prong. The unlocking tool has spring-biased engaging lugs free to
retract until encountering the face of the locking sleeve of the lock mandrel. Downward
jarring overrides the lock ring, allowing downward relative movement to the locking
sleeve of the lock mandrel. The unlocking tool is designed so as to not allow the pulling
tool to engage the lock mandrel fish neck until the locking sleeve is unlocked. An upward
shearing pulling tool (GR) is required for proper operation. Should a conventional down
shear pulling tool (GS) be used, the unlocking tool will not allow the pulling tool to move
down far enough to shear on the skirt. For this reason, a GR is recommended.

3.0 Procedure
Installation Procedure
1. Place the safety valve assembly into a vise and attach any fittings necessary to
operate it with a hand pump or other hydraulic pump.
2. Remove the adjustable core extension from the running tool. Back the socket-
head cap screw out with a hex wrench just until the core extension can be
removed. It is not necessary to completely remove the screw. Loosen the jam
nuts. With the safety valve pressured open (refer to the Operating Procedures
for the valve for the correct opening pressures), insert the core extension into
the up end bore of the valve. Adjust the all-thread so that the upper end is
flush with the very top of the safety valve housing. This adjustment maxi-
mizes bypass flow.
Adjustments with the all-thread below flush will provide less bypass while
adjustments above flush will not allow the running tool to release. This
adjustment must be done with the safety valve pressured fully open. Return
the jam nuts against the bearing disk and tighten. Check the adjustment
after the jam nuts are tightened to insure the adjustment is correct.
Remember "Flush or below, all set to go.” Reinstall the core extension on the
running tool. Tighten the cap screw. The extension should be free to rotate
but retained by the screw.
Note The adjustable extension replaces what would be considered a running

prong with conventional safety valve lock systems and provides essentially the
same function. The adjustability allows the running tool to accommodate many
safety valves, Halliburton and others, without having to obtain special running
prongs. The core extension OD and the adjustment range is listed on the Design
Specification Data for the running tool.

Core Extension Adjustment
3. Make up the lock mandrel to the safety valve. The lock mandrel may be either
locked or unlocked.
4. Prepare the running tool for insertion. Stand the running tool on the top sub,
inverted with the core extension up. Push the core down, then pull it up. The
lower setting sleeve should drop freely, and the retaining dogs and the locking
lugs should be free to retract.
5. Pump the valve open with a hand pump or other surface pump. Visually
check to insure the valve is open completely. Refer to the Operating Proce-
dures for the valve for the correct opening pressures.
6. Insert the running tool as positioned in Step 4 with all the engagements
retracted. Push the running tool into the lock until the retaining dogs are

inside the fish neck and the top sub contacts the top of the lock mandrel fish
neck.
Note If the running tool is installed into a locked lock mandrel, it will be neces-
sary to insert the running tool into the lock until the retaining dogs are inside the
fish neck; attach a set of jars and 3 ft. of stem to jar towards the lock, unlocking the
lock mandrel, and be ready to continue to Step 7.
7. With the running tool installed, hold the top sub down in contact with the lock
mandrel fish neck. Release the hydraulic pressure on the safety valve. The
lock mandrel keys may try to expand as the valve closes against the running
tool. This is normal. Pull the top sub of the running tool away from the lock
mandrel to its full extension and push it back against the lock mandrel fish
neck. The keys should retract and the top sub should now travel freely from
the extended position to the fish neck without expanding the keys. The top
sub is lightly spring-loaded to the extended position and may or may not
extend on its own in the horizontal position. It does not extend on its own in a
vertical position.
Top Sub Against Fishneck
Top Sub Extended Running Tool Installation

Once the proper installation is assured remove all the fittings from the safety
valve. The running tool/lock/valve assembly is now ready to be attached
to the tool string.
8. Run down hole to the SV landing nipple. Jar down until the valve is against
the no-go. Set the toolstring weight on the lock and valve.
9. Pressure up the control line to the proper pressure, opening the valve.
10. Once control line pressure is established, jar down once or twice to insure con-
tact with the no-go. Jar up until the running tool has released. Pull out of the
hole.
Note If for some reason the valve does not open when the control line pressure is
applied, the upward jarring will not set the lock and valve, but extract it from the landing
nipple. A check of the weight indicator will verify a release.

11. Visually inspect the running tool for damage of any sort. If there should be any dam-
age to the running tool, it would be unsafe to assume the valve is properly set and
should be pulled and reset.
12. The valve is now set and locked into place.
Retrieving
1. Attach the specified unlocking tool and pulling prong to the appropriate GR-
type pulling tool. Once assembled, check the unlocking tool to ensure the
unlocking lugs are free to move inward (retracted). The assembly is now
ready to attach to the tool string.
Note Should it be necessary to run a ball closure type safety valve with a con-
ventional (brass sub type) pulling prong, the length of the prong extension will
need to be shortened and rethreaded by an amount listed as make-up length in
the Design Specification Data for the unlocking tool. The thread size and depth
are also listed in the Design Specification Data to provide for this modification.
2. Ensure by whatever means available that the valve is equalized. Control line
pressure alone will not assure the valve is open and equalized. The pulling
prong may have to be omitted to pull an equalized SV with an inoperative ball
closure.
CAUTION Without a pulling prong there is no mechanical safeguard against the possibility
of pulling a safety valve that has not equalized.
3. Jar down two to five times or until the pulling tool latches the lock fish neck,
this is verified by a bind on the line. The pulling tool will only latch the fish
neck when the lock mandrel is unlocked.
4. Once the pulling tool has latched, the valve can be pulled by upward jar
action. Since the GR is a shear up tool, a persistent application of small or
moderate jar strokes followed by bind on the line occasionally. Monitor the
tool weight to indicate if the valve has been retrieved. Pull out of the hole.
Note If the GR-type pulling tool continuously shears off due to an extremely
tight valve, a GS-type pulling tool can be used only if the unlocking tool is not
used. Keep in mind that once the GR tool with the unlocking tool has latched the
lock mandrel, it will be unlocked. If the GR shears off, the lock mandrel/valve is
not relocked.
CAUTION DO NOT attempt to pull the valve using a GS with the unlocking tool attached.
The unlocking tool would not permit the GS to shear off.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.16: FBN Lock System
SL 2.16: FBN Lock System

1.0 Scope
The Halliburton FBN Lock Mandrel & Nipple system is designed to provide a
means by which an indefinite number of identical landing nipples can be installed
in a given tubing string. The FBN lock mandrel can be selectively set in any one of
its associated landing nipples, and when locked in place, will withstand a differ-
ential pressure from either direction.

The Halliburton FBN Lock Mandrel is a mechanically operated lock that can be
selectively located and set by a Halliburton FBN Running Tool. The running tool,
when attached to a lock mandrel and placed in the selective position, holds the
key and element expander sleeve in the fully extended position. With the
expander sleeve in the fully extended position, the key springs act as cantilevers
to bias the keys in to the retracted position.
With the keys retracted, the lock mandrel can be lowered through a series of iden-
tical landing nipples without locating. However, when the lock mandrel is moved
up through any one of the nipples, the locating dogs on the running tool locate the
lower end of the nipple hone bore. Further upward movement through the nip-
ple results in the running tool moving the expander sleeve down into the control
position. As the expander sleeve moves from the selective position to the control
position, the lower end moves under the offset bend in the key springs, causing
the key springs and keys to be biased outward toward their expanded position.
At this stage the expander sleeve has not moved under the keys; therefore, the
keys can flex from the expanded to the retracted position when being pulled
upward through a nipple or series of nipples. Likewise, the expander sleeve has
not, at this point, moved under the element.
The shoulders on the keys and in the landing nipples are chamfered to prevent
the spring bias keys from hanging in the profile when the lock mandrel is being
pulled up through the nipple. However, when the lock mandrel is lowered back
down into the nipple, the 90o shoulder on the keys engage the 90o shoulder in the
landing nipple, thus landing the lock mandrel within the landing nipple.
Once the lock mandrel has been landed, downward jarring will shear the top
shear pin in the running tool, which allows the expander sleeve to move down
behind the keys concurrent with moving down behind the element.
Once the setting sequence has been completed, an overpull on the toolstring will
determine that the mandrel is locked. Then upward jarring will shear the lower
running tool shear pin permitting the running tool to be released from the lock
mandrel and retrieved to the surface.

3.0 Procedure
Running
Attach the lock mandrel to the running tool as prescribed in the running tool’s
Basic Design and Maintenance Instructions.
• The locator dogs of the running tool should be fully expanded.

• The keys of the lock mandrel should be fully retracted.
• The shear pins should be center-punched and cross-punched to ensure
that they stay in place during the running operation.
• Shear pins should be filed flush with the outside diameter of the running
tool and lock mandrel.
1. Make up the running tool, lock mandrel, and desired subsurface flow controls
to a standard wireline toolstring.
2. Lower the tool string into the tubing until the desired nipple is located.
3. Let the tool string pass through the nipple and stop. Raise the tools slowly
until the weight indicator shows that the toolstring has stopped. This indi-
cates that the locating dogs on the running tool are in position against the
lower end of the nipple. An upward pull is required to trip the locating dogs,
placing the running tool in a control position.
4. Lower the tool into the nipple. The expanded locking keys engage in the land-
ing nipple recess to stop and set the lock mandrel.
5. Downward jar action will shear the upper shear pin in the running tool and
move the expander sleeve of the lock mandrel under the keys and the ele-
ment.
in the running tool and allows the toolstring to be returned to the surface.
If the mandrel is not properly locked in the nipple, it should jar loose before the
lower pin is sheared. If this should happen, lower the mandrel back into the nip-
ple and repeat Step 5.
Pulling
Note The proper pulling prong should always be used with the pulling tool,
and adequate time for equalization should always be allowed before jarring
upward on the lock mandrel.
the pulling tool to a standard wireline toolstring.
tacted.

control device is placed in the equalizing position. (Slight downward jar
action may be necessary to shift the equalizing valve open.)
4. The weight of the toolstring should be allowed to rest on the lock mandrel
cates whether or not the pulling tool is latched into the fishneck of the lock
mandrel.
7. Jar upward to move the expander sleeve up, allowing the keys and element to
retract. Extract the lock mandrel from the landing nipple.
8. If the pin in the GR pulling tool shears without pulling the lock mandrel, then
a Halliburton GS Pulling Tool can be used.
CAUTION Do not make up a pulling prong into the GS Pulling Tool when retrieving a lock
mandrel with the equalizing valve attached. Any attempt to jar down and shear
off will be obstructed by the pulling prong and cause damage to the pulling prong
or equalizing valve.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.17: Monolock® System
SL 2.17: Monolock® System

1.0 Scope
The Halliburton Monolock® Plug is a mechanically set plug used in nipple-less comple-
tions. It can be set in a range of tubing weights at any depth and can hold pressure from
above or below. It can be set below restrictions such as landing nipples and safety valves
and can also be retrieved through the restrictions.

The Monolock plug main components are the sealing element, the slips, the
Belleville springs, the locking mechanisms, and an equalizing valve.
Note The figures shown in this document are for use as general information.
There may be small variations between the different sizes of Monolocks.
CN01998
Halliburton Monolock®

3.0 Procedure
Running
This section refers to drawing 21MLxxxxx.
Note The drawing number 21MLxxxxx is used in this document to represent the
drawing for the size of Monolock® plug being used.
The equalizing valve is run in the closed position and does not require a running
prong. Since the plug does not pass through any sealing bores that require bypass,
there is no need to have the equalizing valve open. The OD of the element is
smaller than the Monolock OD, so the element cannot seal when passing through
restrictions. Running with the equalizing valve in the closed position increases the
plug’s reliability, because it becomes a static seal until it is opened during
retrieval.

Once the desired location is reached, the DPU begins to set the plug. The pre-set-
ting pins are sheared and relative downward movement of the housing causes
both the element and upper wedge to move downward.
As the upper wedge and the lower wedge move closer together, the slips are
forced outward. Resistance from the expanded slips causes the element and the
Belleville springs to compress. After the slips and element make full contact with
the tubing ID, the DPU continues to compress the Belleville springs until they are
flat. This puts a compressive load of approximately 15,000 lbs. on the Belleville
springs, the element, and the slips. The additional force required to shear the set-
ting pins in the top sub is absorbed by the element and the slips. The setting pins
each shear at 4,970 lbs. and up to 6 pins can be used, giving a maximum force of
29,820 lbs.
After the setting pins are sheared, the plug is fully set and the DPU can be
retrieved. The Belleville springs provide approximately 15,000 lbs. of compressive
energy on the element and the slips to help maintain a secure position. The com-
pression on the element and the slips is maintained by the body lock ring, which
has internal and external teeth that essentially lock the housing to the upper man-
drel.

The following refers to drawings 21MLxxxxx, 146MLR00000, and 146DPU20.
Note Refer to BDMI No. 146DPU20 for details regarding the Downhole Power
Unit (DPU).
1. Place the DPU in a vise, gripping on the thick-walled section of the motor
housing. This area is located slightly above the motor housing’s identification
groove.
2. Loosen the set screw on the DPU’s rod cap and remove the rod cap from the
DPU, if so equipped.
3. Install the adapter kit’s shear sub on the DPU’s power rod.
4. Tighten the 4 set screws in the shear sub.
5. Loosen the DPU’s drive housing 1/4 turn.
Note The drive housing has left-hand threads.
6. Using the shear sub as a knob, rotate the DPU’s power rod counter-clockwise
to partially extend the power rod. The correct extension length varies,
depending on the size of the Monolock®. Each shear sub is stamped with a
stand-off distance, which is used to space it out correctly. The stand-off dis-
tance is the distance from the back of the shear sub to the front of the DPU’s
cap.
7. Tighten the DPU’s drive housing (left-hand thread).
8. Install the setting sleeve on the drive housing with the holes in the setting
sleeve in-line with the holes in the shear sub.

9. Slide the Monolock’s top sub over the shear sub and pin together. Ensure that
the shear pins are installed flush with the OD of the top sub.
10. Rotate the setting sleeve to cover the shear pins, then tighten the 2 set screws
on the setting sleeve.
11. Ensure that there is a small gap (approximately 1/8-in.) between the adapter
kit’s setting sleeve and the Monolock’s housing. Adjust if necessary.

12. Prepare the DPU per BDMI 146DPU20.

13. Run the Monolock® to the desired depth and note the hanging weight. No manipula-
tion of the tool is necessary.
14. Look for a small increase on the weight indicator as the DPU begins to set the Mono-
lock.
15. As soon as the setting pins shear, the hanging weight will drop to that of the DPU and
running hardware. The Monolock will be fully set at this point.
Note If the Monolock does not fully set (the setting pins do not shear), jar up to
mechanically shear the setting pins. This action will not fully set the Monolock because
the mechanical shearing of the setting pins merely releases the DPU and running hardware
from the Monolock. The improperly set Monolock must be retrieved.
16. Retrieve the DPU and running hardware.
Note Refer to the “Running” section of this document for more information.
Pulling
This section refers to drawings 21MLxxxxx and 146MLP00000.
The plug is retrieved with the DPU and the pulling prong assembly. When the
DPU reaches the set plug, the end of the prong mechanically pushes the valve
spool off-seat. Some light downward jarring may be required. This action opens
the equalizing ports in the equalizing valve housing and allows any pressure dif-
ferential to equalize.
CAUTION Do not attempt to pull the Monolock while attached to a down-to-shear pulling
tool. The downward jarring could release the pulling tool from the DPU and
Monolock. Since the DPU has a self-contained power source, it would still be able
to unset the Monolock and both tools would drop downhole.

During the equalizing process, the DPU is not running and can be pulled out of
the plug to allow uninhibited equalization. This is possible because the pulling
collet is unsupported and can collapse into the prong’s groove to enter and exit
the releasing sleeve fishneck. An overpull of 300-400 lbs is required to pull the col-
let out of the releasing sleeve fishneck.
Note The 300-400 lb overpull should be used to verify that the collet has entered
the fishneck.
Once the equalization process is complete, the DPU is set back down on the top
sub. Light downward jarring ensures that the collet is re-engaged in the releasing
sleeve fishneck. When the DPU starts running, the prong will extend to push the
equalizing valve down. Due to seal friction at the equalizing valve, the relative
motion between the DPU and prong will actually lift the DPU and prong upward
(away from the Monolock’s® top sub). This also causes the collet to move upward
and away from the groove on the prong. By the time the upper angle of the collet
reaches the shoulder on the fishneck, it will be fully supported by the prong. This
locks the collet in the fishneck. The prong is then forced to stroke down and push
the equalizing valve against the shoulder in the equalizing valve housing.

The shear pins between the releasing sleeve and the upper mandrel are then
sheared as the releasing sleeve is pulled upward.
The shearing releases the threaded collet of the lower mandrel from the upper
mandrel. As the lower mandrel collet releases, the energy stored in the element,
slips, and Belleville springs is released. This action unsets the plug.
The DPU continues to push the prong downward, essentially stretching the plug.
This involves relative pulling through the equalizing valve housing, the lower
mandrel, the lower wedge, the slips, the upper wedge, the element, and the hous-
ing. Since the element may have taken a set, this stretching action helps reduce the
element’s diameter to allow easier retrieval or passage through any restrictions.
Downward travel of all the mentioned items continues until the pick-up ring

snaps into the groove of the upper mandrel. The square shoulder in the upper
mandrel groove stops the downward travel of the pick-up ring, the thrust ring,
the spiral ring, and the housing.
Since the upper end of the element is restrained by the housing, the continued
downward travel of the prong results in elongation of the element. The elongation
continues until the element is stretched to its original length and OD. The DPU
then goes into idle mode and linear motion stops. During the DPU’s idle time, the
prong begins to rotate. This rotation continues until the DPU times out. To pre-
vent any damage to the upper end of the valve spool due to relative rotation and
to reduce the effects of the DPU’s left-handed rotation, the prong has a free-spin-
ning equalizing tip. This tip allows relative rotation to occur within the prong
assembly. The shear ring is pinned to the prong, keeping the tip in place. This
allows the tip to shear the pins in the shear ring in the unlikely event that full
downward travel cannot be achieved. By shearing the tip, the collet remains posi-
tively engaged and supported in the releasing sleeve fishneck and the plug can
still be safely retrieved.
The plug can also be retrieved with a GS pulling tool. After latching the pulling
tool in the releasing sleeve fishneck, upward jarring shears the shear pins between
the releasing sleeve and the upper mandrel, moving the releasing sleeve up-ward.
This allows the threaded collet of the lower mandrel to release from the upper

mandrel. As the lower mandrel collet releases, the energy stored in the element,
slips, and Belleville springs is released. This action unsets the plug and allows it to
be retrieved. This procedure does not allow for equalizing any pressure differen-
tial. Because no stretching action occurs on the element, any set it developed will
not be reduced. This could result in difficulty when passing through any restric-
tion.
Note The GS pulling tool is not generally recommended and should only be
used to retrieve plugs that have been in service for only a short time and under
relatively low differential pressure.
Refer to drawings 21MLxxxxx, 146MLP00000, and 146DPU20.
1. Place the DPU in a vise, gripping on the thick-walled section of the motor
housing. This area is located slightly above the motor housing’s identification
groove.
2. Loosen the set screw on the DPU’s rod cap and remove the rod cap from the
DPU, if so equipped.
3. Loosen the DPU’s drive housing 1/4 turn.
Note The drive housing has left-hand threads.

4. Rotate the DPU’s power rod counter-clockwise to partially extend it. The
power rod should only be extended far enough to allow access to the four set
screws in the prong through the holes in the collet.
Note Do not fully extend the power rod. The DPU’s guide keys will need to be
re-engaged in their slots if the power rod is fully extended. This will require com-
pletely removing the DPU’s drive housing.
5. Remove the prong housing from the pulling prong assembly.

6. Slide the remainder of the prong assembly over the partially extended power
rod.
7. Thread the prong onto the DPU’s power rod and tighten. This requires tight-
ening the DPU’s drive housing to prevent the power rod from rotating.
8. Tighten the four set screws on the prong. The set screws can be tightened
through the holes in the collet.
Note The figure shown is for a 4 1/2-in. prong assembly. The larger prong
assemblies do not have a threaded shear nut or set screw attached to the collet.
The collet is pinned directly to the shear sleeve on the larger assemblies.
9. Reinstall the prong housing over the entire prong assembly and tighten on the
drive housing.
10. Tighten the 2 set screws on the prong housing.
11. Retract the power rod clockwise until the prong stops on the 45° shoulder in
the collet (or shear nut). This requires loosening the DPU's drive housing. At
this point the ends of the collet can collapse into the groove on the prong.
Note The collet must be able to collapse in order to engage the Monolock's®
releasing sleeve fishneck.

12. Tighten the drive housing to lock the power rod in position.
13. Verify that the collet still collapses into the groove on the prong. Adjust if nec-
essary.
14. Prepare the DPU per BDMI 146DPU20.
15. Run the DPU and pulling prong to the set Monolock.
16. When the DPU and pulling prong reach the set Monolock, there will be a drop
in hanging weight.
17. Jar down to mechanically push the equalizing valve down.
Note At this point the DPU is not running. Ensure that the DPU does not remain
still long enough for the motor to start. Once the DPU starts running, it will be
impossible for the collet to enter the fishneck. It will then be necessary to retrieve
the DPU and pulling prong without unsetting the Monolock.
CAUTION Do not attempt to pull the Monolock® while attached to a down-to-shear pulling
tool. The downward jarring could release the pulling tool from the DPU and
Monolock. Since the DPU has a self-contained power source, it would still be able
to unset the Monolock and both tools would drop downhole.
18. Once the equalization process is complete, drop the DPU and pulling prong
back into the Monolock.
19. Pull up slowly to verify that the collet is engaged in the releasing sleeve fish-
neck. An overpull of 300-400 lbs is required to temporarily pull the collet out
of the fishneck.
20. Drop the DPU and pulling prong back into the fishneck.
21. Pull up slowly to re-verify that the collet is re-engaged in the fishneck, but do
not overpull.
22. Slack off on the wireline to release all wireline tension.
Note The pulling prong assembly must be fully seated on the Monolock’s top
sub when the DPU starts.
23. Allow the DPU to start running.

24. There will be a sudden jump in hanging weight as soon as the Monolock
unsets.
25. Allow the DPU to reach its full stroke before attempting to retrieve through
any restrictions.
Note If the Monolock has been in service for a long period of time under high
pressure and temperature, it may be necessary to jar down on the Monolock to
help the element release from the tubing ID.
26. Approach restrictions slowly. The element may have taken a set during ser-
vice and may be difficult to drift through the restriction. Although the pulling
prong stretches the element to its original length during the DPU’s stroke,
some light jarring may be required to squeeze the element through the restric-
tion.
Note If there is a problem in pulling the Monolock, the DPU and pulling prong
assembly may be released from the Monolock by jarring up. Upward jarring
shears the emergency release pins in the pulling prong assembly. This allows the
DPU and pulling prong assembly to be retrieved.
27. Once the DPU/Monolock® assembly has been removed from the well, place
the assembly in a vice, gripping on the DPU motor housing above the identifi-
cation groove. Support the Monolock with a hoist or jack stand.
28. Loosen the set screws in the prong housing until the thread is completely dis-
engaged.
29. Pull the Monolock away from the DPU. Use steady movement to reduce the
force required to collapse collets.
Note Pulling the Monolock will cause the collets of the pulling prong to be posi-
tioned in the groove of the prong. This frees the collets to unlatch from the Mono-
lock’s releasing sleeve fishneck.
Note The plug can also be retrieved with a GS pulling tool. After latching the
pulling tool in the releasing sleeve fishneck, upward jarring will unset the Mono-
lock. This procedure does not allow for equalizing any pressure differential and
does not stretch the element after it is unset.
The GS pulling tool is not generally recommended and should only be used to
retrieve plugs that have been in service for only a short time and under relatively
low differential pressure.
Note Refer to the “Pulling” section of this document for more information.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.18: Subsurface Safety Valve Considerations
SL 2.18: Subsurface Safety Valve Considerations

1.0 Scope
Subsurface safety valves are placed in the well bore to prevent the well from flow-
ing uncontrolled in the event that the integrity of the well’s surface pressure con-
taining equipment is lost. Safety valves protect lives, environments, property, and
formations.

Because of the reasons listed above, many times local, state, and federal govern-
ment regulations may require the installation of safety valves in the well. These
regulations may include requirements about what type of safety valve system
must be used and standards for installation and testing of the safety valves. Addi-
tionally, many times the production company itself will have policies which
require the use of safety valves. Whatever the reason for installing the safety
valve, the following text covers several different designs of subsurface controlled
subsurface safety valves which are in common use in today’s industry.
3.0 Procedure
Direct Controlled Subsurface Safety Valves (SSCSV)
Note Closure flow rates should be as large as possible within the limits of the
applicable rules and regulations governing an operating area but should be
smaller than the maximum capability of the well. The closure flow rate should be
greater than the well test rate.
The bean diameter should not exceed 80 percent of the flow tube diameter. The
diameter of the bean assembly in a safety valve should be the same as used in siz-
ing the safety valve.
The pressure drop through the bean should be within the range specified for each
valve.
Normally, the pressure drop through the bean should not exceed 15 percent of the
valve of the pressure immediately under the safety valve in gas wells.
Differential Operated (Types MO-JO, velocity-type)

Note A running prong is not necessary when running the velocity-type valve.
Never run a velocity safety valve without an equalizing valve between the safety
valve and lock mandrel.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.18: Subsurface Safety Valve Considerations
Ambient Operated (Types H & K, velocity-type)

Note H and K safety valves are pressurized containers and should be treated
with more care than if they were empty.
Never run an ambient safety valve without an equalizing between the safety
valve and lock mandrel.
Injection Safety Valves (T, MC, & JC)

• See attached papers on subsurface safety valve systems.
Indirect-controlled subsurface safety valve (SCSSV)

• See attached papers on SCSSV.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.19: Running and Pulling Gas Lift Valves
SL 2.19: Running and Pulling Gas Lift Valves

1.0 Scope
Many wells are produced using gas lift to lighten the fluid column. Slickline is
often used to service (run and pull) gas lift valves from these wells.

There are two different types of gas lift systems: continuous and intermittent.
Continuous-lift type systems inject gas continuously into the fluid column. With
intermittent gas lift the fluid column in the tubing is allowed to rise before gas in
injected into the well.
Gas lift valves (GLVs) can be placed in side pocket mandrels, outside of well flow,
or in concentric fashion. Concentric-type GLVs will block the ID or through the
tubing.
GLVs have a check valve to stop tubing pressure from flowing into the annulus
between the tubing.
A kick-over tool (KOT) is required to run and pull gas lift valves from side pocket
mandrels.
Some gas lift mandrels contain orienting sleeves or guides and some are non-ori-
enting. The orienting-type side pocket mandrel has a key slot built into it that
aligns the KOT with the gas lift valve pocket to ease in setting and pulling. It is
primarily used in deviated wells.
Often flowing wells are completed with side pocket mandrels loaded with
dummy gas lift valves. These are later replaced with live gas lift valve when the
well stops flowing on its own.
3.0 Procedure
1. Gauge run should be made prior to beginning job.
2. If you are not pulling dummies, set a stop to catch any dropped valves.
Note Junk basket with internal fishing neck may be set on top of stop to catch
valves or make them easier to fish.
3. Equalize the tubing and casing and pull the bottom valve first. Circulate
heavy fluid out of the annulus and tubing, and continue pulling valve or
dummies from bottom up.
Note TSG-CSG equalization should be based on BHP, not surface pressure.
Note Use a T type standing valve as opposed to a dart-type test tool, as it is eas-
ier to pull with a fluid load on top.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.19: Running and Pulling Gas Lift Valves
4. Run a new string of valves or dummies from the top down.

5. Start injection to pressure up on the casing and open the well prior to pulling
the circulation device or plug to make sure the valves are in the pockets.
Note Do not run 2 arm L-type KOT when running GLV’s into side pockets man-
drels with positioning sleeves. The arms may hang up in the positioning sleeves
key slot.
6. Pressure up on tubing after bleeding easily it ensure that the check valves
hold.
Note Even though casing shows zero pressure there may be a hydrostatic pres-
sure differential at the valve depth. Calculate the pressure inside and outside the
tubing to determine the pressure.
7. Pull the circulating device, plug, stop and junk basket depending on what you
have in the well.
8. Return the well to production.
CAUTION Do not use quick connects on the bottom of the KOT as this will not allow the tool
to kick over.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.20: Running and Pulling Packoffs
SL 2.20: Running and Pulling Packoffs

1.0 Scope
Packoff equipment is used to packoff holes in tubing. Also, it is used to run con-
centric gas lift packoffs.

When using packoff equipment straddle and packoff holes or other communica-
tion avenues in the tubing string.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make a gauge run before beginning the job.
2. Run in hole and set the anchor (collar stop, slip stop) approximately 3 feet
below the hole.
3. Run in hole packoff assembly on a GS to the desired depth. Shear off the pack-
off and come out of the hole with GS.
4. Run in hole with a blind box, jar down and set the packoff.
5. Run in and set the hold down slip (G packoff anchor).
Note Pin the top packoff prior to running. This ensures that the bottom packoff
element sets first.
6. When pulling, use a GS pulling tool for an internal fishing neck on packoff
equipment.
7. Use an RS pulling tool for external fishing necks.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.21: Opening and Closing Sliding Sleeves
SL 2.21: Opening and Closing Sliding Sleeves

1.0 Scope
A means to achieve communication between the tubing and casing.

• Can be used to displace fluid from backside.
• Can be used to produce alternate zones.
• Other circulating devices are ported nipple, gas lift mandrels, etc.
• Must be aware of possible differential pressure when shifting the sleeve.
• A sleeve must be shifted with positive shear type (non-self releasing) keys
when there is another SP which generates in the same directions as the one
you wish to manipulate or when it is above the one you wish to manipulate.
The positive tool is designed to only release when the pin is sheared, thus
allowing the tool to be withdrawn from the wellbore without affecting any
other sleeves.
• The standard 42BO positioning tool with self-releasing keys is used when
there is one sleeve in the well or you want to shift the top sleeve.
• The selective position tool is designed for downward shifting only using self-
releasing keys. The tool is made selective by the lower section. It resembles the
X-line running tool.
3.0 Procedure
1. A gauge run should be made prior to starting the job.
2. Determine the proper positioning tool to be used in shifting the subject sleeve,
and make up on the tool string.
3. Equalize the pressure difference across the sleeve prior to shifting the sleeve
open.
4. Run in hole to sleeve and locate profile, shift sleeve in the direction desired.
Monitor tubing and casing pressure for changes to give you an indication it
has shifted.
5. Pressure up on the tubing to see if you have communication to verify that the
sleeve is open or closed.
Note As soon as an indication of increasing or decreasing pressure on the tubing

or casing is noted, stop jarring until the pressure equalizes.
Once you think it is open or closed, make a few passes through the sleeve to dou-
ble check.
BHP, Spinner Survey, and Temperature Surveys can also be run to determine if the
sleeve is open.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.22: Use of Test Tools
SL 2.22: Use of Test Tools

1.0 Scope
Test tools are used to pressure the tubing string.

Test tools hold pressure only from above. The tools are self-equalizing and are
no/selective set.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make a gauge run before beginning the job.
2. Attach to a running tool and run in hole to the desired depth (nipple) and set
in the nipple.
3. Pressure up and test the tubing.
4. Run in hole with an RB pulling tool, jar down to latch, and remove the test
tool from well.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.23: Bailing Operations
SL 2.23: Bailing Operations

1.0 Scope
A bailer can be used to remove sand and other particular debris and materials
from a wellbore. This material may have bridged over or built up alongside the
tubing wall.

There are different types of bailers: the pump bailer, the drive down bailer, and
the hydrostatic bailer.
• Pump Bailer - The pump bailer has a cylinder-shaped barrel, where a rod is
used on a piston assembly. This piston assembly sucks material into the barrel.
This material is trapped inside by a check valve (which is either a ball or flap-
per). This check valve is called a “bailer bottom.” (see cautions).
• Drive Down Bailer - This bailer also has a cylinder-shaped barrel, but it differs
from the pump bailer. This bailer has tip sub made up on top going a 5/8 in.
sucker rod thread. On the bottom of the bailer you have a check valve, or
bailer bottom, as it is known. This bailer uses the hammering action of the
wireline tool string to drive it into the material that is being bailed (see cau-
tions).
• Hydrostatic Bailer - This is cylinder-shaped, consisting of a seal chamber that
contains air at atmospheric pressure. The seal at the lower end of the barrel is
a brass shear disc. A skirt and ball-type check valve is made up on the lower
end of the barrel, below the shear disc. The skirt on the bailer bottom is
designed with a larger I.D., which allows it to move down and around with
the fishing neck of the subsurface control device. When the skirt stops on the
downhole control device, a few downward jarring strokes will shear the brass
disc. When this occurs, the sudden influx of well fluid or gas into the chamber
will carry the remaining debris past the check valve and into the chamber.
Note Special junk baskets are designed to catch larger parts that cannot get
around check valve. Also, a hydrostatic bailer should only be used for cleaning off
a minor amount of debris above a fish neck or other hard component. Do not run
in to bail soft material, since the bailer will suck itself into the material and may
become stuck.

3.0 Procedure
1. A proper gauge run should be made.
2. Attach to a tool string and zero at the tubing hanger.
3. Run in hole at moderate speed (taking consideration of nipples, tight spots,
gas lift mandrels, collars). Once you reach the obstruction, sit down, then pick
up on the tool string, slowly lifting the rod on the piston assembly. As this is
done debris material is sucked into barrel. This procedure is done over and
over until the operator sees that he is no longer making hole, or feels the bailer
is full.
4. Remove the bailer from well. (Repeat as above. Clean up debris, sand, etc. as
necessary).
CAUTION If the bridge that is being bailed has a pressure differential below it, the tubing
above the bridge should be completely filled with a fluid and/or be pressurized
to a pressure that is at least equal to the pressure below the bridge. This is to pre-
vent the wireline tool string from being blown up the hole when the bailer breaks
through or weakens the bridge.
After each upward pump stroke, the bailer should be pulled up the hole a few feet
above the original depth of the top of the bridge. This will help to avoid the possi-
bility of the bailer becoming stuck in the bridge.
Note A muleshoe bailer bottom seems to work best when bailing sand.
A flat-bottom bailer with noted chisel marks helps to give the operator indications
when fishing on tools, wire, etc.
Also, while bailing, the bailer will sometimes get stuck. When this happens, pull a
couple of hundred pounds over pickup weight and stop. Have patience and wait.
This will normally be enough to pull free.
During bailing operations, it is recommended to pickup out of debris to ensure

that debris is not falling back on top of tools, causing the tool string to become
stuck and/or lose jarring action.
Care should be used when breaking the bailer down because it is possible for
sand to bridge over inside the bailer, causing a pressure differential.

CAUTION The hydrostatic bailer should not be used until the sand has been removed from
the tubing down to the top of the subsurface control device. When jarring down
on a long sand bridge to shear the disc in the hydrostatic bailer, the bailer may be
driven into the bridge and become stuck even if the disc does not shear. If the disc
shears, the bailer may bury itself in the bridge to the extent that it may become
stuck.
After retrieving the hydrostatic bailer to the surface, care must be taken when
opening the bailer due to the possibility of pressure being trapped in the chamber.
Even though the bailer is equipped with an automatic pressure relief valve and
also a normal pressure relief valve, it is possible that the internal pressure port
leading to both relief valves could become plugged. The upper allen head set
screw should always be backed out at least two to three rounds to allow the ball
relief valve to move off seat before opening the bailer.
Note Shear disc come in: (Hydrostatic pressure ratings) Thin 4025 psi, Medium
7450 psi, Thick 12, 175 psi. Also, snorkel bottoms for hydrostatic bailers made to
get inside locks.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.24: General BHP/BHT Surveys
SL 2.24: General BHP/BHT Surveys

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.25: Caliper Surveys
SL 2.25: Caliper Surveys

1.0 Scope
Means of determining the integrity of tubular goods.

Caliper surveys are run to determine the erosion, corrosion, build up and defor-
mity of tubular goods.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make proper gauge run to the target depth. POOH.

2. Make caliper dummy run to the target depth. POOH.
3. Run in hole with caliper to the target depth. POOH is normally at 60 ft. per
minute.
Note Calipers are run by Kinley-trained personnel.
For more information contact Kinley or Hornbeck.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.26: Perforating (Otis Type “A”) Mechanical
SL 2.26: Perforating (Otis Type “A”) Mechanical

1.0 Scope
Perforating equipment is used to punch holes in tubing walls.

The perforators may either be mechanical or explosive in nature. These include
the Kinley Perforator and the Otis type ‘A’ perforator.
3.0 Procedure - Mechanical

1. Make a gauge run.
2. Properly assemble and pin the perforator.
3. Lower the perforator into the well and seat on stop at the desired depth.
Note A stop may be previously set downhole or it may be run on the bottom of
the perforator.
4. Once seated, jar downward lightly to shear the two small pins.
5. Pull upward on the wireline to move the punch into contact with the tubing
wall and at the same time move the upper, serrated end of the perforator
housing into contact with the tubing wall.
6. Use light to moderate upward on wireline to move the punch into contact
with the tubing wall and at the same time move the upper, serrated end of the
perforator housing into contact with the tubing wall.
7. Continue upward jarring after the punch penetrates the tubing wall.
Note This allows the reverse taper on the double tapered wedge to engage the
front side of the base of the punch. This retracts the punch back into the perfora-
tor, locks it in the fully retracted position and frees the perforator to be retrieved.
8. Deactivate the perforator to the nonperforating position by jarring downward

to shear the safety shear pin. This causes the tool to be locked in a nonperfo-
rating position and allows it to be retrieved from the well without perforating
the tubing.
Note When using this perforator to mechanically punch a hole in the tubing
wall, the wireline operator should not use more than 30 to 35 lb of stem weight in
the tool string unless high surface pressure in the well requires that he use more
weight to get the tools into the well. Depending upon the amount of stem weight
being used, only very little to moderate upward jarring action should be used to
perforate the tubing. Excessive stem weight and/or severe upward jarring
impacts are not necessary with this perforator and, in fact will be detrimental to
its performance.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.26: Perforating (OTIS Type “A”) Mechanical
CN03589
Otis® A Tubing Perforator

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.27: Swabbing Operations
SL 2.27: Swabbing Operations

1.0 Scope
Swabbing is a means of lifting fluid from the wellbore via wireline methods. The
objective of swabbing is to remove enough fluid from the tubing to reduce the
hydrostatic head off the formation to allow the well to come in. Use of proper
lighting is required to be aware of returns indicating that the well may be coming
in.

• Swabbing is done by means of cylindrical swab cups lowered in the well to a
desired depth and pulled back to surface quickly, expelling fluid above cups
through a pump-in-sub or the flowline.
• Swabbing is usually done with 3 1/16 in. wire or 1.25 in. wire.
• Swab cups have to be cut down for heavy wall tubing.
3.0 Procedure
1. A gauge run should be made prior to starting job.
2. Make sure the well is static without pressure on it.
3. Run in hole with the swab mandrel with swab cups on it to a desired depth.
Note Start out at about 250- 300 ft. and see how it feels.
4. Pull out of hole quickly and watch for fluid or gas to start flowing.
5. Watch well for 3-5 minutes to see if gas or fluids start to flow.
6. Repeat Step 3 and watch for fluid rising, and indication that the well may be
coming in.
7. Repeat Steps 3,4, etc.
8. Do this until the well starts to flow or Company Man shuts you down.
CAUTION Be sure not to pull over what your wire is good for.
Check your swab cups periodically for wear. Change if necessary.
It is not recommended to swab over half the tubing capacity.
Note When swabbing through a gas lift mandrel you will lose fluid. Running
tandem swab mandrels may help improve returns.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.28: Using Kinley Power Jars
SL 2.28: Using Kinley Power Jars

1.0 Scope
The kinley power jars are used to deliver downward explosive force.

Kinley power jars can be run on various slickline units. They are used to knock
stuck chokes loose, puncture hole into bull plugs, and also drive spears into tan-
gled wire.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make a gauge run into the well to check the path.
2. Run power jars on slickline unit into the well until the “fish” is contacted.
3. Use downward jarring strokes to shear the two safety pins. This enables the
firing pin to strike the primer to fire the shell. The drive head delivers a quick,
hard blow downward.
Note If the fish does not move, redress and re-run the power jars.
Note A heavy toolstring is necessary to prevent toolstring from moving

upward.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.29: General Wireline Fishing Operations
SL 2.29: General Wireline Fishing Operations

1.0 Scope
Any operation requiring the removal of various objects or debris from the well-
bore that can’t be removed using standard wireline procedures or tools.

• Prior to starting a fishing operation, accurate information pertaining to the
fish should be obtained.
• The tool string being used to fish with should have its exact lengths and O.D.’s
recorded.
• Determine differentials if the fish is a flow control device.
• Make sure you have sufficient lubricator to cover the amount of tools in-hole.
• Make sure the wireline valve is in good operating condition. Run two valves if
possible.
• Take your time. Try not to lose any more tools.
3.0 Procedure
1. Determine the top of fish, either a with wire finder, impression block, or gauge
run.
2. Run the appropriate tool to latch. Fish.
3. Always take into consideration any pre and cons of the operation at hand. (ex.
What to do if you latch fish, etc.) Remember well conditions.
4. Always keep communication lines open for suggestions and ideas.
5. Keep the office informed about progress, or lack of.
General Fishing Guidelines

1. Keep accurate records of the lengths and diameters on each component of the
tool string and tools run into the well.
2. Ensure sufficient lubricator length to cover work tool string and the length of
tools to be recovered.
3. Use the wireline valve to contain well pressure instead of the gate valve.
4. Carefully check the fishing tools and equipment (before running) to make sure
that they will latch, (and also release from) the downhole fish.
5. Discuss the operation with several operators/supervisors to gain as many
ideas as possible.
6. Prior to running a fishing tool, carefully consider the options and the possible
undesirable consequences of running that particular tool.
7. Think of other tools that could be run if the first tool is not successful.
8. Carefully consider what action can be taken if a run does not result in the
anticipated or desired outcome.
9. Attempt to remove broken wire first - then the tools.

10. A length of stem installed below the jars (when fishing wire) will help to pre-
vent the jars from becoming fouled. Also consider the use of a substantial
tubular jar rather than a link jar.
11. Measure and retain all wire fished from the well until the job is complete. This
allows you to be aware of the amount of wire remaining in the well after each
step of the fishing operation.
12. Use an impression block when necessary to check the downhole situation.

Tool Summary
Tool Use Comment
Bowen Wire Finder locates top of wire difficult to pass nipple I.D.
Bell Type WIre Finder locates top of wire difficult to pass nipple I.D.
Wire Scratcher locates top of wire use care around SPM’s
Wire Grab latches ball of wire do not jar deeply into nest of
wire
Center Spear pierces thick ball of wire do not jar deeply into nest of
wire
Tubular jars large I.D. tubing & when wire is in reduces hazard of fouling
the hole jars
Cutter Bar cuts broken wire at rope socket Calculate blind box size
before use.
Go-Devil: Beveled cuts wire at rope socket. blunt beveled end. Do not
drop in dry gas well. Check
O.D.’s & I.D.’s
Go-Devil: Flat base to cut on, adds wt., cutting blunt beveled end. Do not
force for sneppers. drop in dry gas well. Check
O.D.’s & I.D.’s
Kinley Snepper cuts wire close to the rope socket returns on line (cuts approx.
3in. above rope socket)
Upside Down Sneeper cuts wire close to the rope socket Does not return on line (cuts
approx. 2ft. above socket)
Flopetrol Cutter cuts wire close to socket does not return on line
Side Wall Cutter cuts broken wire in tubing care required when running
Magnet recovers small pieces magnetic steel only
Overshot latches worn or smooth items run on rope socket & SB if

not equipped w/shear pin
Broach increases I.D. insure dimensions before

use
Impression Block obtains “picture” redress before use

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.30: General ETD Operations
SL 2.30: General ETD Operations

1.0 Scope
The electronic triggering devices are run on slickline, to fire various explosive
tools as an alternative to costly electric line.

Electronic Triggering Devices are used for several well applications.
• perforate tubing
• set bridge plugs
• set packers
• set patches
• set cement retainers
• cut tubing or casing
• dump bail cement or sand
• needs a licensed explosive specialist to make up the tools, the ETD man is in
charge once his tools are on the tool string.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make a gauge run to the desire depth.
2. The ETD man makes up his ETD tools onto the tool string.
3. Run in hole to desired depth while the ETD tool is on slickline. The ETD spe-
cialist is in charge of running and pulling procedures.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.31: Running Long Assemblies With Pressure
SL 2.31: Running Long Assemblies With Pressure

1.0 Scope
Running long sections of screen can be difficult, but with proper preparation, the
job can be completed with little or no difficulty.

• Long assemblies must be made up at the surface while lowering the assembly
into the well bore. To accomplish this, the well must be killed, or the TRSV can
be shut in some instances to allow for space to lower the assembly into the
well. This check valve is called a bailer bottom (see cautions).
• In some cases, a heavy pill such as K-Max can be used as a spacer/cushion in
case the assembly is accidentally dropped. As you can see, safety precautions
must be taken and the job carefully planned out.
• The assembly is usually set in the wellbore by means of a locking device to
secure the screen and to pack it off. The screen must be packed off so the flow
of the well will go through the screen, and not around it.
• The weight of the screen and fluid in the hole must be taken into account to
determine the wireline size to be used.
• Good records must be taken on lengths and ODs for future reference such as
in the possibility of retrieval.
3.0 Procedure
1. A gauge run must be made. If possible, a dummy run should be made.
2. Gather all tools and check all connections for good quality and fit.
3. After well is killed or TRSV is closed and secured, lower the first joint into the
well and secure with clamps.
4. Continue adding additional sections until all are made up and hanging in the
wellbore.
5. Make up the tool string and locking/hanging device on to the assembly.
Enough lubricator must be used to cover the tool string and running tool
when retrieved back to surface.
6. Lower the assembly into the wellbore at a slow speed to avoid any possibility
of damaging the screen.
7. Set the assembly at the correct depth and POOH.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.32: Shifting (Knocking) Off TCP Guns
SL 2.32: Shifting (Knocking) Off TCP Guns

1.0 Scope
Shifting off TCP guns is similar to shifting open a sliding sleeve. In some cases,
the same tool is used to shift the gun that opens the sleeve.

• Releasing guns by means of wireline is done with a shifting tool. During the
shifting operation differentials need not be considered.
• The guns are release when the collet moves off of the retaining feature.
• The shifting tool and tool string are not in the way and will not be affected
during the operation.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make the proper gauge run to target depth.
2. Run in hole with positioning/shifting tool to target depth.
3. Shift the tool in the proper direction to release the guns.
4. The shifting tool should pass freely through the releasing profile once the
guns are released.
For more information contact Kinley or Hornbeck.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.33: Use of Downhole Purge/Surge Valves
SL 2.33: Use of Downhole Purge/Surge Valves

1.0 Scope
Valves used to purge or surge (clean out) perforations.

• Slickline run.
• Sets in nipple.
• Pressure ratings acceptable to lock.
3.0 Procedure
1. Gauge run.
2. Run in hole and set the tool in the nipple.
Note Purge tool (pressure in formation), Surge tool (formation flow)

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.34: Deviated Well Operations
SL 2.34: Deviated Well Operations

1.0 Scope
Wireline operation in deviated wells are trial and error. The proper tool string
operating in a particular well must be established.

• Tool strings with knuckle joints and roller stem are used in highly deviated
well.
• Sometime smaller O.D. tool strings are used to reduce drag.
3.0 Procedure
1. Before running anything into the well, read past the wireline report and find
out deviation, elevation, wellbore fluid property, true vertical depth (TVD),
and measured depth (MD), etc.
2. Hydrostatic pressure is calculated at true vertical depth.
3. If a known tool string has been used before, use same.
4. Make pick up more often than in a straight well for excessive drag.
5. Note in your report weights encountered and tool string configuration, etc.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.35 High Pressure/Temperature Operations
SL 2.35 High Pressure/Temperature Operations

1.0 Scope
Consideration for handling pressure and temperature conditions should be made
at all times when working with slickline. Additional planning and special consid-
eration should be made when handling high surface pressures of 10,000psi and
above and for wellbore temperatures in excess of 265oF.

There is more potential for encountering a hazardous situation when performing
slickline services on wells with pressures approaching 10,000 psi and above.
While working on high pressure/temperature jobs, it is recommended that a

supervisor accompany the job. High pressure is defined as pressure or equal to or
greater than 10,000 lb. High temperature involves temperatures above 265oF.
It is recommended to keep 1,500-2,000 lb above wellhead pressure on the grease

seal lines. Use fresh/clean “honey-oil.” Care must be taken in handling high pres-
sure equipment. High pressure equipment is considerably heavy. Three people, at
least, should be used for rig up.
High pressure work is dangerous and must be handled with experienced work-
ers. Also, it is recommended that an experienced supervisor accompany the wire-
line crew.
When testing the tree and lubricator upon rigging up, maintain pressure on the
actuator if fusible plug is used. Best practices would be to use grease the injection
stuffing box for 11,000+psi jobs.
3.0 Procedure
1. High Pressure
a. Make sure all equipment is current, as for as pressure, magnetic flux, and
stress-crack testing.
b. Pressure-test the wireline valve as an extra safety precaution before going
out on a job. Also, visually inspect lubricators and flanges to be used.
c. Have on hand a redress kit for the wireline valve, lubricator, and stuffing
box. Also, extra autoclave valves and flange gaskets are recommended.
d. Upon arriving on location, examine the wellhead/tree. Also, note the work-
ing pressure on the tree. Next, determine if you have the proper equipment
to handle the job.
e. Hold a safety meeting with all people involved in performing the job. This
includes the operator, service assistants, company representative and covers
all matters related to the job.
f. After meeting, flange up on the tree and be sure to install a new flange gas-
ket.
g. Position the wireline/slickline unit in the safest location possible, preferably
upwind of the well.

h. Change all o-rings in the lubricator and assemble the necessary lubricator
sections.
i. Install two autoclave valves per lubricator valve port/hole. The second
valve per hole acts as a backup.
j. The proper installation of the autoclave has the lower bleed hole on the auto-
clave and valve nearest the lubricator.
k. Do not apply teflon tape to the autoclave valve threads. The threads are not
designed to hold pressure.
l. During operations the outer autoclave valve is closed and used as a pres-
sure-bleeding device. The inner autoclave serves as a safety backup and
remains open at all times.
m. It is necessary to remove and place all glands and packing within the stuff-
ing box.
n. The recommended packing stack from top to bottom includes, 91T136 (hard
black), 2 soft 91M2467, 1 91T120 (red), 1 soft 91M2467 (soft), 1 91T120 (red),
and as many soft black as necessary.
o. Installing a new lower blowout preventer within the stuffing box is neces-
sary. Pack the void in the stuffing box with appropriate grease.
p. A hydraulic stuffing box is recommended in high-pressure conditions.
q. Check the bleed allen screw valve within the stuffing box. Make sure the
valve is closed.
r. Screw in the adjustment nut on the stuffing box until tension is noticed, then
back off a quarter turn.
Note For wells containing high CO2 concentrations, back the adjustment nut off
one-half to one complete turn. CO2 tends to make the packing expand and
tighten.
s. When running wire in the hole, apply a mixture of STP and oil to the wire.
t. When rigging down do not leave the wireline valve on the wellhead over-
night. This may allow damage to occur to the elastomers in the wireline
valve due to explosive decompression of gases trapped within.
u. Pressure test the lubricator stack to working and/or customer requirements
with glycol, if applicable.
Note Do not use glycol where there are zinc or calcium products present. Glycol
turns zinc into a salt deposit and calcium into a “peanut butter” type substance. If
glycol is used, then it should be removed/drained from the tree.
v. Purge air out of the lubricator section by pressuring up to 1,000 lb and then
bleeding off. This prevents spontaneous combustion of products within the
lubricator.
Note This step necessary only on the first run into the wellbore.

w. Use a liquid chamber to inject corrosive inhibitor grease. This protects the
wireline and increases stuffing box life.
x. Install the liquid chamber immediately below the stuffing box.
y. When using exotic wire (mp35, stainless steel,.108,.125) or per customer
request, employ a grease seal with flow tubes. Three to five flow tube sec-
tions may be run.
Note The maximum line speed should be 200 ft/min. into and out of the well-
bore.
z. Inject grease sealant at a point one flow tube above the lubricator.
aa. Install a return line below the stuffing box to capture used grease. At this
point the stuffing acts as a wiper section or pressure backup device.
ab. Standard braided line should not be used when pressures exceed 3,000-
4,000 lb. Dia-form is recommended for pressure above 3,000-4,000 psi. Dia-
form is easier to seal and is a stronger braided wire.
ac. Use more weight/stem bar if braided line is employed on high pressure
wells. Lead, tungsten, or spent uranium stem is recommended to shorten
the tool string.
ad. When using braided line employ a double ram to accommodate the larger
OD.
Note If the seal is lost, it is necessary to close the double rams on your lines and
pump grease between the rams when closing the wireline valve.
ae. Fresh water should never be used on high-pressure gas wells.

2. High Temperature
af. Special packing and seals are needed when temperatures exceed 260oF.
ag. Use riton teflon and peak packing when working with high temperature/
pressures.
ah. Q-V o-rings can also be used.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.36: Downhole Power Unit Operations
SL 2.36: Downhole Power Unit Operations

1.0 Scope
A service tool which has the capacity to set wellbore devices without the use of
explosives.

The DPU has a gradual setting motion which allows the slips and seating ele-
ments of packers and bridge plugs to expand and conform uniformly against the
tubing/casing wall, thus decreasing the chance of a misrun.
The gradual setting motion also eliminates the high impact stresses that are
imposed upon downhole devices when using an explosive charge setting tool.
The DPU uses and electric gear motor and linear drive mechanism to generate
forces up to 60,000 lbs.
The design is inherently safer than the equipment requiring an explosive charge,
since the power to operate the tool is provided by standard alkaline batteries.
The tool can be redressed quickly at the wellsite, and routine maintenance
involves only lubrication and battery replacement.
The DPU is an electro-mechanical device that is designed to produce a bidirec-

tional linear force for setting or retrieving downhole tools.
The DPU consists of three sections:
•The top section of the tool encloses the pressure-sensing activator.

•The middle section is the control and power source.
•The lower section contains the linear drive mechanism.
The DPU has two operational modes. These are the tension (or pull) mode and the
extension (or push) mode.
3.0 Procedure
1. A gauge run should be made prior to running the DPU.
2. Make up the DPU with the attached subsurface device and lower into the well
to the desired setting depth. The control circuit then initiates the setting opera-
tion. With a stroke speed of approximately 0.7 in/min., The setting motion is
gradual or controlled, allowing the sealing element to properly conform
against the casing/tubing wall and the slips to full engage. When the sealing
element is sufficiently compressed and the setting force is reached, the DPU
shears loose from the subsurface device and is removed from the well.
3. See attachment on running and pulling operations.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 2.37: Memory Production Logging (MPL) Operations
SL 2.37: Memory Production Logging (MPL) Operations

1.0 Scope
Slickline run memory production logging tool.

• An economical way to log a well on slickline rather than expensive electric
line.
3.0 Procedure Run/Pull

1. Gauge/dummy run.
2. Need a technician to make up the tool - man in charge.
3. Run in hole to the desired depth.
4. Slowly POOH as per technician.

Section
3
Advanced Slickline Service Operations
SL 3.1 . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Slickline Service Systems and Design Specifications
SL 3.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AMS Systems
SL 3.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JobTrak™ Job Logger
SL 3.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downhole Power Unit (DPU) Operations
SL 3.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slickline Collar Trak™
SL 3.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General ETD Operations
SL 3.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Memory Gauges
SL 3.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slickline Memory Production Logging (BDMI) Operations
SL 3.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireline Wire Management Procedures

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.1: Advanced Slickline Service Systems and Design
SL 3.1: Advanced Slickline Service Systems and Design

Specifications
Advanced Measurement Systems (AMS)
New technology and methods, named Advanced Slickline Services, have facili-
tated the utlilization of slickline well servicing methods for jobs previously per-
formed by traditional electric line logging methods.
The Advancement Measurement System (AMS) provides slickline operations

with depth measurement performance that can equal electric line accuracy. Using
the JobTrak data job loggers with AMS facilitates and complements service tools
by providing a custom graphic presentation of the forces and other dynamic
information that occurs during a wireline job. The AMS can provide high-accu-
racy depth and time data to merge with memory production well log data.
The AMS units is configured in two basic types:
• Panel-mount unit for rack or panel mounting inside wireline operator cabins
in non-hazardous atmospheres
• Portable unit available for standard service and hazardous Zone 2 operation
(intrinsic safety, CSA assoc. [Exib] CL 1, Div 2 Grp C.D.T4 (CSA) and/or IEC
Eex N[ib] IIB T4).
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to operating manuals for panel
mount and portable AMS units:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_paslines_slkln.asp
The panel-mount version has digital and analog displays with switch-type input
controls and an RS-232 output for data collection. The portable version has a 9-in.
flat screen display with keypad functional inputs and extended RAM memory for
data storage. The portable versions also have the RS-232 serial port output for
real-time data retrieval. Both panel-mount and portable types have depth-cor-
rected outputs and displays.
All AMS units require an electronic strain gauge line tension sensor and an optical
encoder mounted on the depth counter wheel. The electronic strain gauge can be
mounted remotely (same as hydraulic Martin Decker load sensor) at the bottom
hay pulley or it can be part of the depth counter. Mounting the load sensor in the
counter is preferred because the rig-up equipment and rig-up time is reduced.

Halliburton Combination Two-Wheel Counter

The Halliburton combination two-wheel counter is available for measuring depth
and line tension with the AMS. The counter can be with wire sizes from .092 in. to
.125 in. slickline, 3/16 in. braided line, and 7/32 to 5/16 in. electric line without
changing the counter wheel. The AMS calculates the correct depth once the wire
size is entered into it. The two-wheel counter can be mounted to most wireline
units with some modifications, but it may not be practical for use on very small
units. Consult Engineering in Carrollton, TX to determine the modifications
required for a specific unit.
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to operating manuals for two-
wheel depth counter:
JobTrak Data Job Logger

The JobTrak Data Job Logger can produce logs of slickline jobs, logs that show
depth, line tension, line speed, and time. In addition, JobTrak job logger is used
with the Slickline Collar Locator (SLCL) to produce collar logs for depth correla-
tion. Besides recording data, the JobTrak data job logger can print it in real time
and can play back previously recorded files.
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to operating manuals for the
JobTrak data logger:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_content/slickline/JobTrak.pdf
Slickline Collar Locator (SLCL)

The Slickline Collar Locator (SLCL), in combination with the AMS and JobTrak
data job logger, verifies collar locations in a tubing or casing string. The SLCL tool,
when teamed with the AMS, complements the use of the Downhole Power Unit
(DPU) for accurately setting plugs and packers. The SLCL is a tension-inducing
tool. When it senses a collar, electromagnetic drag blocks on the tool activate and
increase the drag on the tubing or casing wall. This momentary tension increase is
detected by the weight indicator and is recorded on the JobTrak data job logger.
The stretch-corrected depth data calcaluted by the AMS provides an accurate cor-
relation of tubing or casing collars.
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to the Basic Design and Mainte-
nance Instructions (BDMI) for the Slickline Collar Locators:
Downhole Power Unit (DPU)

The Downhole Power Unit (DPU) is used to apply an axial forces to packers, per-
forating firing heads and any other downhole device that can be activated by an
axial force. A small-diameter DC electric motor drives through a gearbox into a
ball-screw linear actuator. This actuator pulls (or pushes) on the drive rod that
extends out of the DPU. An assembly of common alkaline batteries powers the
DPU units that are used on slickline. On these DPU units, adjustments on the

DPU electronic circuitry allow the operator to choose the actuation time. DPU
units used on electric-line are actuated and powered through the electric-line
itself.
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to the Basic Design and Mainte-
nance Instructions (BDMI) for Downhole Power Units:
Electronic Triggering Device (ETD) and SmartETD

The Electronic Triggering Device (ETD) and the Smart ETD allow an explosive
charge to be detonated downhole without using electric wireline. The primary
uses for these tools are perforating, cutting, tubing and casing, activating setting
tools for bridge plugs and packers, and dump bailing.
CAUTION Handling explosives is restricted to licensed (when applicable) and properly

trained personnel who are aware of the regulations governing explosives han-
dling as in the Halliburton Energy Services Explosives Safety Manual (Form
4170/8/94).
A gauge run must be made in the well to assure that the well is free of obstruc-
tions. All preparations must be completed so that the assembly can be used imme-
diately. Only then may the ETD, SmartETD tools, and explosive trains be
assembled.
LineTrak Eddy Current Slickline Wire Inspection Instrument

The LineTrak eddy current slickline wire inspection instrument is another tool for
good wire management, providing additional confidence in the integrity of the
slickline wire. Eddy current inspection is a well-established industrial inspection
technique that is particularly suited for inspecting solid wire. The instrument can
detect discontinuities in th wire that include cracks, pits, falt spots, and necked
down areas. Data generated from such a program can be used to:
• Reduce wire procurement costs by detecting flawed new wire

• Help establish predictable service life versus fatigue damage
• Help determine failure mechanisms
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to operating manuals for the
LineTrak eddy current wire inspection instrument:

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.2: AMS Systems
SL 3.2: AMS Systems

1.0 Scope
The Advanced Measurement System (AMS) is used for accurate depth control
and is an integral component in the Advanced Slickline Service System.

The Advanced Measurement System (AMS) has three primary components: the depth
panel, the optical encoder mounted on the measuring wheel, and the wireline tension mea-
suring load cell or load pin.
The AMS gives the wireline operator accurate depth, wireline tension, and wireline line
speed information. The AMS uses three independent digital displays as well as analog ten-
sion information with a resolution of better than 5 lb (2.27 kg). The wireline operator can
add the digital displays to provide his customer with an independent remote display. The
digital displays use extra-bright, light-emitting diodes which are more than 1/2 in
(12.7 mm) high; the analog displays are 3-3/4 in (95.25 mm) round dials.
The operator controls are easy to use with functions and applications plainly marked. Set-
ting up the AMS depth panel does not require complex codes or switching sequences. The
operator controls include English or Metric digital display, incremental tension zero, load
cell calibration, excessive line tension alarm, and approaching surface alarm.
The AMS depth panel automatically corrects for measuring wheel error caused by temper-
ature changes and corrects for wireline stretch. The operator must select the wireline size
to ensure proper wireline stretch corrections to the depth display. Operators must also
select the ambient temperature so the panel can make automatic wheel error corrections.
AMS depth panel supplies very high speed RS-232/422 serial communication to external
computers. This high speed serial communication provides current depth (corrected for
wireline stretch and wheel error), line tension, line speed, and direction of travel. Displays
are in both English and Metric.
The AMS depth panel uses two 8-bit processors in a master/slave arrangement to handle
the data from the optical encoder mounted on the measuring wheel and the wireline ten-
sion data from the load cell or load pin. This allows extremely fast and accurate response
for the important depth, line tension, and line speed displays along with continuous recal-
culation for wireline stretch and wheel error.
With easy to read, independent displays and easy operator control functions, along with
the high-speed dual processor technique, the AMS provides the most accurate wireline
depth measurement system available.

Safety Features
The AMS depth system offers a number of safety and safety-related features. These are
primarily directed at preserving depth information to allow safe retrieval of tools to the
surface. These features are described below.
Power
The 9-30 VDC power to the AMS depth panel is fused at 4 amperes maximum current and
has reverse polarity protection. If improper polarity voltage is applied to the panel no dam-
age or possible fire can occur.
Loss of Power
Loss of power to the AMS depth panel during operation will not cause a loss of depth data.
The panel continuously stores depth data every 100 milliseconds in a battery-supported
memory device. When power is applied to the panel, the last "Depth" is displayed.
Zero Depth Switch

This switch is only recognized and read by the AMS when line speed is equal to zero. If
this switch is pressed during a wire line operation the depth display will indicate zero
depth. To avoid this possible loss of depth data, the panel stores depth data until depth
changes from zero. To recover depth while downhole, press this button again to recall the
previous depth. Do not allow wireline movement (must be less than 0.1 ft or 0.03 m) or the
depth history will be lost.
Accidental or Inadvertent Switch Changes

Almost all operator switch functions are "shielded" by the AMS panel from changes in
setting during wire line operations. To prevent depth panel set-up changes most switch set-
tings are recognized and read only when depth is equal to zero and/or when line speed is
equal to zero. See Section 2 to determine when each switch is recognized and read by the
system CPUs.
Audible Indication of Depth Change

Operator control switches that directly change the depth display are accompanied by an
audible tone when depressed. The switches are "Zero Depth," "Up Depth," and "Down
Depth.”

Design Specifications
Advanced Measurement System, Kerr Measurement System, Inc. Model No. AMS-75
Panel.
• 996.17931 w/Metric analog gauges

• 996.17981 w/ English analog gauges
Design Specification
Temperature Rating -40o F to 185o F (-40o C to 86o C)
Power Supply 9-30 VDC, 4.0 amperes maximum with local and
remote displays. 2.0 amperes maximum without
remote displays
Line Speed 3000 ft/min (914 m/min) maximum

Line Tension 8000 lb (3629 kg max.) maximum
Wireline sizes Slickline .092 in, .105 in/.108 in, .125 in

Braidedline 3/16 in
Mono Conductor cable 5/16 in and 7/32 in
Measuring wheel circumference size English 2, 3 and 4 ft

Metric .625 and 1.25 m or universal wheel
Automatic depth adjust + or - 0 to 9.9 units/1000 units
Automatic scaling for load cell 0o to 150o in 15o increments

mounting
Automatic wheel temperature -40oF to +140oF in 1o increments (or Celsius

correction equivalent)
Depth offset adjustment Up or down adjustment in 0.1 ft or 0.1 m increments

to a maximum of 99999.9
Analog tension English 0-2000 lb and 0-5000 lb

Metric 0-1000 kg and 0-2500 kg
3-3/4 in dial face, 250o span, 5 lb or 50 kg increments
Analog tension (differential) 0 to +/- 200 lb or 0 +/- 100 kg incremental gauge;

3-3/4 in. gauge face, 250o span, 5 lb or
2-1/2 kg increments
Digital tension 0 to 7,500 lb or 0 to 3402 kg with 6 digits, 1 lb or 1 kg

resolution
Digital depth 6 digits with 0.1 ft or 0.1 m resolution
Digital line speed 0 to 3000 ft/min or 0 to 914 m/min with 0.1 ft/min or
0.1 m/min resolution using a 6 digit display
Battery Supported Memory 10 year minimum battery life

Data output TTL (5 VDC) level corrected depth signals

(differential type) and 0-2 V tension data (see Line
Tension Analog Switch)
RS-232/422 Output The AMS-75 is set up with 8 data bits and one start/
stop bit. Sending an upper case "D" to the unit will
return data in the following format:
E D sddddd.d 1111 tttt CR LF
Where:
E= E or M (ft or m)
D= Tool direction "U" or "D" or "S" for up, down or

stopped
sddddd.d= Current depth in ft or m with sign character. "+"

depths are in hole. "-" depths are out of hole.
1111= Line speed in ft/min or m/min
tttt= Line weight in lb, kg, or dan
CR= Carriage return
LF= Line feed
Weight 16.5 lb (7.5 kg)

Load Cell (P/N 996.17396)(Not Supplied With AMS Panel)

Kerr Measurement System, Inc. P/N AMS 8A003
Note For remote load cell at wellhead.
Temperature Rating -40o F to 185o F

Power 24 VDC, 200 ma (supplied by AMS panel)
Load Rating 12,500 lb
Output 4-20 ma. representing 0 to 12,500 lb

Shunt Calibration 16.8 ma representing 10,000 lb load
Accuracy + or - 10 lb at full load
Thermal offset less than 0.2%/100o F
Weight 3.2 lb
Load Pin Assembly (P/N 996.17178)

Kerr Measurement System, Inc. P/N AMS 7A080
Note For use with combination two wheel counter.
Temperature Rating -40o F to 185o F
Power 24 VDC, 200 ma
Load Rating 12,500 lb
Output 4-20 ma representing 0 to 12,500 lb
Shunt Calibration 16.8 ma representing 10,000 lb load

Accuracy + or - .25 lb at full load
Thermal offset less than 0.2%/100o F
Weight 3.2 lb (approx.)

3.0 Procedure
This section describes the typical operating procedure for the AMS. These instruc-
tions assume that the measuring wheel has been fitted with the proper optical
encoder, all electrical cables have been run to the AMS panel, and the electronic
load cell/load pin is mounted to the appropriate wireline sheave. The electrical
cables from both the optical encoder mounted on the measuring wheel and the
electronic load cell/load pin should be inspected for damage and properly con-
nected to the AMS depth panel. The connector type and configuration for each
function are unique and connecting the cables into the wrong connector on the
AMS depth panel is not possible.
Set Up AMS
1. Check and insure that the wheel size switch (located on the bottom of the
AMS depth panel) is set for the proper measuring wheel circumference; 2 feet,
3 feet, 4 feet, 0.625 meter, 1.25 meters or universal.
2. Set the wireline size using the switch located in the middle of the depth mea-
surement panel between the two analog tension meters. There are five
options: 0.092, 0.105/0.108, 0.125, 3/16, 7/32 or 5/16 inch diameter wireline
sizes.
3. After selecting the operating wireline size, go to the lower right side of the
depth measurement panel and set the excessive tension dial indicator.
4. Select English or Metric display (front and back panel).
5. Set the ambient temperature switch located in the upper right hand portion of
the depth measurement panel. This is a four character thumb-wheel type
switch. The first character is + or -, and the next three characters are for the
current ambient temperature at which the measuring wheel will operate. If
the digital panel is set to operate in the English mode, enter the temperature in
degrees Fahrenheit; if the digital panel is set to operate in the metric mode,
enter the temperature in degrees Celsius. The ambient temperature should be
checked periodically.
6. After the wireline has been rigged up on the job site, determine where the load
cell is to be mounted. If the load cell is mounted in the upper sheave, the
included angle will be zero. If located on the lower sheave the included angle
will be 90o, 105o or greater. For combination two-wheel counters using load
pins, the included angle will be zero in most applications. Set the load cell
scale and adjust the switch to the proper setting. The proper setting will have
the included angle of the wireline around the sheave that is supporting the
electronic load cell.
7. Power to the depth panel will initiate a number of functions including set up of
the load cell, scale adjust, ambient temperature, and the excessive tension
alarm. At first power the depth may not come up to zero. Allow 5-10 minutes
for component (and particularly the load cell) temperatures to stabilize.

Calibrating The Wireline Tension Load

1. The AMS depth measurement panel allows the operator to calibrate the load
cell at the beginning of each operation. This valuable option insures accurate
wireline tension.
2. To set the zero indication for zero line tension, press the zero cal button and
adjust the zero calibration knob until the line tension digital display reads
zero + or - 5 pounds or kilograms and the analog line tension meter reads
zero. Do this when the load on the line cell is mounted to the lower sheave
and there is no load on the line. If the load cell is mounted to the upper sheave
this should be done with the wireline rigged up and upper sheave in position
with the load cell supporting it. With the load cell located in the upper sheave,
this allows a proper line-tension zero without adding in the weight of the
upper sheave. Systems with load pins will be calibrated in the same manner.
3. After proper adjustment of zero line tension, move the load cell scale switch to
“0” for shunt calibration. Press the shunt calibration button and adjust the dig-
ital line tension display to read 5,000 pounds or 2268 kgs. This completes the
load cell/load pin calibration; the load cell will indicate true line tension on a
linear scale between zero and full scale which is 7,500 pounds or 3402 kgs.
Return the load cell scale adjust switch to the proper included angle.
4. Press the incremental tension zero button to zero. The incremental tension
meter is mounted slightly to the right of center on the depth measurement
panel. Using the winch pick up the tool weight and stop the wireline with the
tool suspended from the upper sheave. True tool weight should be indicated
by the line tension digital meter, the analog wireline tension meter, and the
incremental tension meter.
5. If the indicated line tension is correct for the tool weight being used, proceed
with setting the zero point for the wireline operation. If not, repeat the load
cell calibration as described in the paragraph above.
6. Using the wireline winch, set the wireline tool at the appropriate zero depth
position and stop the wireline. Press the zero depth button and confirm that
depth is displayed as zero. If the operator prefers zero depth to be in the hole
or above the hole by a certain amount, he can adjust the depth using the up
and down depth buttons.

Running The Line

1. Proceed with the normal wireline operation noting the line speed, line tension
and depth on the digital display.
English or metric digital display may be selected at any time during a wireline
operation. Most other operator-selectable options are not valid during a wire-
line operation unless the depth is zero and/or the line speed is zero.
2. At any time during the wireline operation, very precise wireline tension may
be measured and indicated using the incremental tension meter. To use this
feature, stop the wireline movement and press the incremental tension zero
button to set the incremental tension meter to zero. Any change in wireline
tension will then be displayed on the right hand analog meter with a resolu-
tion of better than 5 pounds (2.27 kgs.).
The AMS depth panel continuously records the depth data to memory and the
wireline operator should be able to recover true depth information regardless
of power failure or inadvertent operator switch selection.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.3: JobTrak™ Job Logger
SL 3.3: JobTrak™ Job Logger

1.0 Scope
The JobTrak job logger gives the wireline operator the tool depth, line tension, and
wireline speed information in a real-time plot. The wireline operator can supply
the customer with a printout of the work performed in the well as it is happening.
Operating controls on the JobTrak job logger have the functions and applications
marked, and help screens are availble for each step. The JobTrak job logger will
drisplay units in all English units, metric units, or Dan (Decanewtons) and metric
units.

The data job logger system has three primary components:
• the job logger

• the optical encoder mounted on the depth counter wheel
• an electronic load cell (at the hay pulley) or load pin (at the counter wheel)
that measures wireline tension
The JobTak data job logger has several features to preserve the correct depth infor-
mation and allow safe retrieval of the toolstring to the surface. These are
described in the JobTrak Operating Manual noted below.
Power input to the JobTrak job logger can be 12-30 VDC or 110-220 VAC. There is
a fuse to limit the current draw to 4 amperes and the job logger has reverse polar-
ity protection.
3.0 Operating Procedure

All slickline operating manuals can be found on the Halnet web site at:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_paslines_slickline_manuals.asp
The JobTrak job logger manual is titled JobTrak User’s Guide.
1. Attach ground cable to wellhead.

2. Power up the data job logger PC to the menu screen, then switch the job log-
ger power switch to “on.”
3. From the menu screen select 1 to enter the data job logger program. This will
bring you to the data job logger setup screen (Figure 1). For help at any time
press F1.
4. Set up parameters.
Note Use the arrow keys, tab, or mouse to skip to different fields.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.4: Downhole Power Unit Operations
SL 3.4: Downhole Power Unit Operations

1.0 Scope
The downhole power unit is a service tool which has the capacity to produce lin-
ear push and pull forces suitable for setting bridge plugs, cement retainers, pack-
ers, Monolocks®, etc. without the use of explosives.

The Halliburton Downhole Power Unit (DPU®) is an electromechanical device
that is designed to produce a linear force for setting (or pulling) wellbore tools
such as Monolocks®, bridge plugs, or packers. Batteries make the tool self-con-
tained, and an electrical timer starts the setting operation.
The DPU® and the attached subsurface device are run into the well on slickline or
on braided line to desired setting depth. The timer initiates the operation. The set-
ting motion is gradual and controlled (approximately 0.7 in./min), allowing the
sealing element to conform against the casing/tubing wall and the slips to fully
engage. When the sealing element is sufficiently compressed and the setting force
is reached, the DPU shears loose from the subsurface device and is free for
removal from the well.
There are three sizes of DPUs for use in diiferent tubing/casing sizes and for dif-
ferent setting forces. The largest DPU® is the 3.66 ft OD tool, for use in tubing/
casing above 4.5 in., that can produce up to 60,000 pounds force at 250°F. The mid-
dle size DPU is the 2.5-in. OD tool, for use in 3.5 to 4.5-in. tubing/casing that can
produce up to 30,000 pounds force. The smallest DPU is the 1.69-in. OD tool, for
use in 2.38-in. and 2.88-in. tubing/casing, that can produce up to 15,000 pounds
force.
Advantages of the DPU over explosive setting tools are:
• Slow setting speed allows slips and seal to expand slowly.

• No explosive charge is used. Power is generated by Alkaline® batteries.
• The DPU can be field-redressed quickly.
3.0 Procedure
1. Before operating the DPU®, read the BDMI for the respective DPU. The DPU
can be damaged by wrenching or vising in the incorrect location.
2. Follow operating procedure in the DPU BDMI.
4.0 Appendix
For reference:
DPU Adapter Kits to Bridge Plugs

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.5: Slickline Collar Trak™
SL 3.5: Slickline Collar Trak™

1.0 Scope
The Slickline Collar Trak™ is a service tool which produces real time depth corre-
lation to tubing/casing collar location in conjunction with the AMS/Jobtrak Sys-
tem.

The Halliburton Slickline Collar Locator (SLSCL) is an electro-mechanical device
that is designed to produce an increase in line tension when the tool passes
through a collar. This tool enables a slickline truck to locate collars and plot the
location of the collars in a manner similar to the logging truck collar logs. The
electric power is stored in the tool with alkaline batteries. The line tension
increase is the result of electromagnets being activated against the inside wall of
the well tubing (casing).
A timer in the SLCCL is set at the surface to a predetermined time to delay the
start of the operation of the tool at the approximate operating depth. The SLCCL,
downhole power unit (DPU), and packer or bridge plug are run into the well on
slickline below the desired setting depth of the packer/bridge plug. The bottom
hole assembly (BHA) is raised back past the desired setting area of the packer. The
slickline unit is equipped with an AMS. As the SLCCL passes through the desired
setting area, an API collar log is plotted using the data recorded with the AMS
and computer. Once the collar log is compared to the original well CCL log, the
exact location to set the packer/bridge plug can be located. The packer bridge
plug is positioned between the collars and the plug is set. The SLCCL turns off a
selected number of minutes after the last collar is detected. Once the setting com-
pleted, the SLCL and DPU™ are raised to the surface and removed from the well.
The Collartrak can be used in combination with the DPU™ and SMART ETD™.

3.0 Procedure
Make a dummy run with a drift tool and junk basket/gauge ring. The dummy
OD should be slightly larger then the maximum OD of the downhole device to be
run (bridge plug, packer, etc.) and longer than the SLCCL.
Attach the SLCCL and associated wellbore tools to the service string.
Measure and record the distance from the center of the CCL to the center of the
packer element. Also measure and record the distance from the center of the CCL
to the bottom of the packer tool.
While the tool string is setting on the ground next to the wellhead, release all
weight off the wire and calibrate zero weight on the AMS.
Before lowering the tools into the well, the depth setting on the AMS must be set
at zero. The original well log may have a KB (kelly bushing) height in the title
block of the log. The KB height is the reference zero point of the original well log.
In order to correlate the collar locations from the original CCL log to the CCL that
is going to be run, the zero point of the log that is going to be run must be the
same. The complete tool string (weight bar, jar, SLCL, DPU, and setting device)
should be assembled when this calculation is made. The offset depth to enter into
the AMS is equal to: (KB-distance from ground to center of CCL.)
Slowly lower the tools into the well. Monitor the hang-off weight during the
descent. After the required setting depth has been reached, continue to lower the
tool string at approximately 250 feet per minute.
Note the amount of time that has elapsed since the “on” switch has been started.
Depending on the setting of the “start” timer, the tool may have to set until the set
time has elapsed. If the start time has already elapsed, the tool will be ready to
start the collar log.
WARNING If the DPU is being used with the SLCCL, do not allow the tool string to remain
stationary long enough to start the DPU operation.
As the SLCL is raised up through the tubing that is to be logged, the line tension
will increase each time the CCL passes through a collar. The increase in line ten-
sion can be seen on the Halliburton AMS and the conventional hydraulic Martin
Decker load cells. Each collar indication will make the load cell increase approxi-
mately fifty pounds for approximately two seconds. If the Halliburton Jobtrak is
being used, a API collar log may be printed as the logging run is being performed.

Once the logging run has been completed end the software/PC run as instructed
on the PC screen. The API collar log can be used to compare to previous existing
API CCL logs for comparison. See BDMI for complete instructions.
4.0 Appendix
For reference:
BDMI

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.6: General ETD Operations
SL 3.6: General ETD Operations

1.0 Scope
The electronic triggering devices are run on slickline to fire various explosive
tools as an alternate to costly electric line.

1. Electronic triggering devices are used for several well applications.
• perforate tubing
• set bridge
• set packers
• set patches
• set cement retainers
• cut tubing or casing
• dump bail cement or sand
A licensed explosive specialist needs to make up the tools. The ETD specialist is in
charge once his tools are on the tool string.
Explosive handling procedures shall be in accordnance with local regulations.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make a gauge run to the desired depth.
2. The ETD specialist makes up his ETD tools onto the toolstring.
3. Run in the hole to the desired depth while the ETD tool is on slickline. The
ETD specialist is in charge of the running and pulling procedure.
4.0 Appendix
For reference:
Smart ETD Training Manual
Explosive Handling Manual

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.7: Electronic Memory Gauges
SL 3.7: Electronic Memory Gauges

1.0 Scope
A variety of electronic memory gauges can be deployed on slickline.

Memory gauges suspended on slickline enable accurate measurements of well
bore parameters, such as pressure and temperature, as a function of elasped time.
The advanced measurement system provides accurate depth correlation for post-
job analysis.
3.0 Procedure
1. Make gauges run as required.
2. Run electronic memory gauges to desired depth.
3. Retrieve tools after the pre-determined recording period.
4. Using electronic memory gauge software, download recorded information.
4.0 Technical Information

For reference:
TTTCP

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.8: Slickline Memory Production Logging (BDMI) Oper-
SL 3.8: Slickline Memory Production Logging (BDMI)

Operations
1.0 Scope
Slickline-run memory production logging tool.

Memory production logs are economical means of preforming well diagnostic
services and flow and reservoir analyses. AMS and Jobtrak provide depth control
data to merge with MPL data.
3.0 Procedure Run/Pull

1. Perform a gauge/dummy run.
2. Need MPL specialist to make up the tool.
3. Run in hole to desired depth.
4. Slowly POOH per the technician.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 3.9: Wireline Wire Management Procedures
SL 3.9: Wireline Wire Management Procedures

A combination of the procedures below should be used to manage all slickline
wires. There is no one method that will consistently catch all wireline problems
before the wire breaks.
1.0 Wireline Log and Wireline Management Program

Keep a wireline log for all spools. Send a copy of the log with any CPI (Correction,
Prevention, Improvement) forms. This wireline log should include:
• All details of the wireline: part number, material type, size, trace numbers,
and date installed
• Well data should include the well environment (at least the percent H2S, per-
cent chlorides, percent CO2, and the downhole temperature) and the well
location/number.
• Wireline operations performed - run plug, fishing, jarring (duration and max-
imum load), etc.
• Wireline inspection/test results
The Halliburton wireline management program can be used to help predict the
useful life of wireline. In the form of an Excel spreadsheet, the program accepts
job history data and calculates a prediction about the remaining life in each 100-ft
section of the entire length of the wire. This prediction is displayed on a plot of the
whole wire length.
The program’s output plot shows which sections of a wire have the most cycles
(the most fatigue) and are approaching potential failure. By seeing the high-cycle
sections of the wire on the plot, an Operator can distribute the load cycles over the
length of the wire and extend its useful life. When the display shows that any part
of the wire is near 100% of “used life”, the line can be pulled from service.
Although wire failures may originate at pits or other features, the failure mecha-
nism often is fatigue. Reviewing the output plot, and adjusting how the wire is
used, can help an Operator avoid wire fatigue failures. This can extend the time in
service for a reel of wire significantly.
Contact the Carrollton Center - Slickline Technology for a copy of the wire man-
agement program.
2.0 Wireline Inspection

By inspecting the wire before and after each job, it will be easier to determine at
what point the wireline should be replaced. If the wireline fails the visual inspec-
tion, wireline knot test, API 9A torsion test, or the eddy current test, wireline
should be cut off in 50-100 ft intervals until the wireline will pass the inspection/
test.
Note All tests should be performed when wireline is received new from sup-
plier, and before and immediately after a wireline job. If there are any questions
on acceptance of any defect, contact Technology - Dallas Center.

Visual Inspection
At the beginning and end of the wireline job, check the first 50 feet of wireline for
brightness, discoloration, pitting, necking down, flaking, flat spots, cracks, and
other surface damage.
Bend Test
Bend a short sample of the wireline into a sharp U-shaped bend and look for
cracks on the wire surface at the bend. A magnifying glass can be helpful. If the
wire has been damaged by hydrogen, bending the wire may help expose cracks
caused by hydrogen embrittlement. Reject the wireline if cracks are visible.
Wireline Knot Test (Wrap Test)

Tie a standard wireline knot before and after each job. If the wireline breaks or
cracks when the knot is tied, the wireline is either work hardened or has been
damaged by the well environment. It’s helpful to periodically compare the knot
tying capabilities of the used wireline with new wireline (preferably saved from
the same wireline spool when new). Even if a no-knot rope socket normally is
used, a wireline knot should be tied for wire test purposes. This test can be per-
formed on all wireline materials and diameters, including .125-inch line. If the
wireline cannot be wrapped closely on its on diameter for 8 wraps, the wireline
should be rejected.
Coil Test
Pull approximately 100 ft of wireline off the slickline reel and allow the line to lay
on the ground. Overworked wire (work-hardened) will not coil freely. It loses its
spring and tends to lay flatter than wireline that is not overworked. Wireline nor-
mally is not rejected as a result of this test. However, this test does help alert oper-
ators to the gradual deterioration of the wireline.
API 9A Torsion (Twist) Test

An API torsion or ductility test machine is used in the test. The device consists of
a base with two jaws/clamps spaced 8 inches apart; one jaw is rotated with a
crank while the other jaw is stationary. Wireline placed between the jaws is
twisted until the wireline breaks. The minimum turns before breakage is listed in
the API 9A specification. The torsion tester can be used only for carbon steel lines
(also known as bright steel).
Note Acceptance of the test results should be based on testing 2-3 samples from
adjacent wireline. If one of the first two samples fails the test or if there is a large
difference in the results, a third sample should be tested. Use the average of the
two lowest test values to determine if the wireline is acceptable.
The pass/fail values may vary from one field location to another because of varia-
tions in the severity of service or the type of service being performed. Acceptable
twist test values may be lower for wireline units primarily performing downhole
pressure surveys than for units involved with heavy jarring. Experience will dic-
tate what values are acceptable. It should be noted that the torsion values in API
9A are for new wireline.

Eddy Current Inspection Device

The Halliburton eddy current inspection device (LineTrak™) uses a small electri-
cal coil with a very low current to inspect wireline. The instrument checks the
wire as the line passes through the coil. Any changes in the wireline (such as
cracks, flats, laps, and other flaws) will be highlighted by the instrument. Eddy
current inspection currently is the only method that can test the entire length of
wireline. Refer to the eddy-current inspection manual for detailed instructions.
This manual is on Halworld at:
3.0 Reporting Wire Failures

If wireline breaks during use, complete a CPI and then send the fractured end(s)
with approximately 6-ft of wire to the Carrollton Center – Slickline Technology.
The fractured end should NOT be cleaned but should be wrapped to preserve the
fracture for evaluation. Although complete well data may not always be known,
the more well history that can be provided to Technology, the more accurate their
findings will be.

Section
For reference:
Completion Products Catalog
HES Equipment Catalog
Completion Products - Wellhead Pressure Control section
Completion Products - Slickline Equipment section
4
Technical Information
SL 4.1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Selection Criteria and Technical Charts and Tables
SL 4.2: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Line Stretch Calculations - Weight and Temperature
SL 4.3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Twist/Torsion Tester - Twist Test Chart
SL 4.4: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wire Inspection System
SL 4.5: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Braided Line Information
SL 4.6: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wire Fallback
SL 4.7: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Hydraulic Unit Specifications
SL 4.8: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slickline Reel Chart - Dimensions and Capabilities
SL 4.9: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reel Capacity Calculation
SL 4.10: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Counter System
SL 4.11: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Depth Counter System
SL 4.12: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advanced Measuring System (AMS)
SL 4.13: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight Indicators
SL 4.14: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General Purpose Pump Skid
SL 4.15: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pressure Control Equipment Color Coding
SL 4.16: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Halliburton Quick Union Connections
SL 4.17: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bowen Quick Union Connections
SL 4.18: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Quick Union Connections
SL 4.19: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stuffing Boxes List
SL 4.20: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hydraulic Packing Nuts
SL 4.21: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stuffing Box Packing Stacks
SL 4.22: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Braided Line/E-line Grease Head
SL 4.23: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liquid Chamber (Chemical Injection Sub) List
SL 4.24: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricator Purge Tool (Valve) List
SL 4.25: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Catcher and Tool Trap
SL 4.26: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubricator Section
SL 4.27: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lubricator Safety Valve
SL 4.28: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pump In/Flow Tee List
SL 4.29: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireline Valve List
SL 4.30: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Connection List
SL 4.31: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blanking/Tree Caps List
SL 4.32: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .O-Ring Service Selection Chart
SL 4.33: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting Champs and Caps
SL 4.34: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hay Pulleys and Ground Block Sheaves
SL 4.35: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Gin Poles and Accessories
SL 4.36: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rope Sockets - Slickline and Braided Line
SL 4.37: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stem — Non-Weighted and Weighted

SL 4.38: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stem Weight vs. Pressure Chart Table

SL 4.39: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Knuckle Joints
SL 4.40: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jars - Spang, Tubular, Hydraulic, and Spring Type
SL 4.41: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accelerators
SL 4.42: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool String Connections
SL 4.43: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quick Connects and Tools
SL 4.44: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Go Devils/Cutter Bars
SL 4.45: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinley Perforator
SL 4.46: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinley Power Jar
SL 4.47: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kinley Sneppers
SL 4.48: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sandline Cutters
SL 4.49: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shear Pin Chart
SL 4.50: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X and R® Nipple Selection Chart
SL 4.51: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . API Tubing Tables
SL 4.52: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . English to Metric Conversion Chart
SL 4.53: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handy Formulas and Data

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.1: Wire Selection Criteria and Technical Charts and Tables
SL 4.1: Wire Selection Criteria and Technical Charts and

Tables
Wireline Selection
Scope
Proper selection of the wire used in wireline service operations is important for
the safe and successful completion of any wireline job. It is important for the wire-
line service specialist to understand the limitations of the wire and the effects that
well environments may have on the wire being used.
General Information
Natural wellbore environments and those induced by man may cause corrosion to
the wireline. This corrosion can be controlled either through chemical inhibition
or by changing to a wireline with a different composition. Recent advances in
metallurgy have led to new types of alloy wirelines that have a very high resis-
tance to corrosion. The following is a discussion of the normal types of corrosion
and the methods used to combat them, followed by a discussion of wireline mini-
mum breaking strength.
Five types of corrosion will be discussed. These types of corrosion are pitting,
general weight loss, crevice corrosion, hydrogen embrittlement or sulfide stress
cracking, and stress corrosion cracking. Corrosion is caused by the presence of
oxygen, acid, carbon dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and chlorides, whether naturally
occurring or not.
The most common type of corrosion is pitting, which is caused by the presence of
oxygen, acid, or carbon dioxide. Oxygen converts iron or steel into rust or Fe2O3.
In the case of wireline, this can only occur on bright steel wire that has not been
used for some time and is not protected by a coating of oil or inhibitor. As rust
appears, pitting occurs which mean a loss of cross-sectional area. This means a
reduction in breaking strength of the wireline. Of course, all of the alloy steel
wirelines are extremely resistant to this type of corrosion.
Acids can still be present in the wellbore during wireline operations, during or
after workover operations. Since wireline operations are of limited duration, pit-
ting during operations will not be a problem. However, acid left on the wireline
will cause pitting to occur. This can usually be eliminated through the use of an
inhibitor placed in a chemical injection sub (liquid chamber).
Carbon dioxide (CO2) in the presence of water creates carbonic acid which will in
turn cause pitting. CO2 is of great concern to producers and pipeline companies
when selecting their tubulars. It is considered to be of much less concern when
selecting wireline. CO2 causes problems in tubulars mainly because the fluid or
gas is constantly in motion. When the fluids are not moving, acid will produce a
thin oxidant film which will partially protect the underlying metal. When the flu-
ids are moving, this film is continuously removed exposing fresh metal to attack.

Wireline is normally done under static conditions and CO2 is not usually a prob-
lem; however, if CO2 corrosion is considered to be a concern, the use of any of the
wirelines with more than about 8% chrome (Cr) will reduce the corrosion to
almost nothing. However, if H2S is not present, it is usually considered more cost
effective to use bright steel wireline, accept the pitting that does occur, and replace
the wire more often.
Almost all of the alloy steels are quite resistant to this type of corrosion. However,
duplex steels have been found to be affected during extended tests using boiling
hydrochloric acid. As noted earlier, wireline is never exposed to this severe envi-
ronment; however, advances in metallurgy have led to comparably priced wire-
lines that are much more resistant to acid. This has led to duplex steel being
seldom used for wireline anymore.
Pitting is a localized type of corrosion. Another type of corrosion is referred to as

weight loss, which is a more generalized type of corrosion. It involves the same
types of chemicals and reactions that are involved in pitting corrosion, but the loss
of material occurs over a much larger area. This type of corrosion still reduces the
OD of the wire and thereby the minimum breaking strength.
Crevice corrosion is an accelerated type of pitting corrosion that takes place in a

confined area, or crevice. This is most often seen in a sealing area such as inside
the wireline valve ram bore or in the o-ring groove on a section of lubricator. This
type of corrosion is not normally experienced with wireline, but it might occur if
wireline is allowed to stay inside the stuffing box packing.
The presence of H2S can lead to hydrogen embrittlement or sulfide stress cracking
if present in sufficient quantities to be considered sour service. Hydrogen embrit-
tlement is caused by the presence of free hydrogen ions. Sulfide stress cracking
(SSC) can be considered a type of hydrogen embrittlement where the hydrogen
ions are released by H2S. SSC is caused by the hydrogen ions penetrating the
metal along the grain boundaries, thereby reducing the cohesion between the
grains. The metal becomes brittle enough to actually shatter under stress. The pro-
cess can occur extremely quickly. Therefore, standard (sweet) service equipment
or wire cannot be used for sour service, even for short periods of time. The use of
one of the alloy steel wirelines virtually eliminates any problem caused by H2S.
These wirelines, like the alloy steels used for sour service lubricator equipment,
have a Rockwell hardness of less than Rc22.
Sour service is not determined solely by the presence of H2S. Instead, it is defined
by the partial pressure of the H2S which is a function of both the concentration
(ppm) and the pressure (psi) (see Figures 4.1-1 and 4.1-2). The ppm H2S divided
by one million and multiplied by the pressure equals the partial pressure of the
H2S. If the resulting H2S partial pressure is .05 psi or greater, the well is consid-
ered to be sour. For example, a well with 10,000 psi is considered sour if the H2S
concentration is only 5 ppm.

Stress corrosion cracking (SCC) can also cause premature failure of wireline. It is
caused by a combination of stress, high temperatures, and chlorides. Actually, the
presence of salt water or any of the salts used to make brine in the oil field, such as
table salt, calcium chloride, potassium chloride, or zinc bromide, can lead to
SCC.The term chlorides is used only as a general reference.
Metals containing almost no nickel (<2% Ni), or a large concentration of nickel

(>40%), exhibit essentially no stress corrosion cracking (see Figure 4.1-3). There-
fore, as noted in the wireline recommendation chart (Table 3), bright steel wireline
will show only pitting in hot chlorides. Therefore, if H2S is not present, bright
steel wireline may be the best choice. Most of the “mid-range” alloy steels contain
between 5% and 30% nickel. Unfortunately, concentrations of nickel in this range
lead to severe stress corrosion cracking. This means that for sour service, where
bright steel wireline cannot be used, one of the more exotic wirelines must be cho-
sen. Extremely hostile environments containing H2S, high chlorides and tempera-
tures above 350oF may require the use of a cobalt-based wireline such as MP35N.
This decision must be weighed carefully because of the extremely high cost, but
this wireline has been used under the most severe conditions for more than 10
years with essentially no corrosion.
Attached as Table 5 is a National Standard’s Wireline profiles. These show the ten-
sile strength, weight, and stretch for various types of wireline. These values were
derived by actual measurement and are considered the best available. These
sheets include at least one wireline from each of the wireline groups shown on
Table 1. All of the wirelines in each group have very similar compositions (see
Table 2) and therefore similar physical properties. Therefore, the minimum break-
ing strength shown on the NS profiles of a wireline in the same group as a wire-
line not listed will be quite similar. If a more exact value is required, contact the
PSL manager for slickline services.
The maximum amount of straight pull normally allowed for new wire is 60 to
65% of the minimum breaking strength. For heavy jarring loads, this is reduced to
approximately 50%. For wire whose OD has been reduced either by corrosion or
mechanical damage, the value used for minimum breaking strength must be
reduced. The wire should be measured with calipers in two directions and the
diameters averaged together. This current diameter is divided by the original
diameter and the result squared. This factor is then multiplied by the original
breaking strength to obtain an estimated current minimum breaking strength.

Appendix
1. Figure 4.1-1: NACE MR0175 Sour Gas Systems
2. Figure 4.1-2: NACE MR0175 Sour Multiphase Systems
3. Figure 4.1-3: Effect of Nickel Content on SCC
4. Table 4.1-1: General Categories of Available Wirelines
5. Table 4.1-2: Compositions of Common Wirelines
6. Table 4.1-3: Recommended Wireline Section
7. Table 4.1-4: Wireline Part Numbers
8. Table 4.1-5: National Standard Wireline Properties
9. Table 4.1-6: Definitions and Conversions

SOUR GAS SYSTEMS
MOL % H2S IN GAS

0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10
10000 10000
SULFIDE STRESS CRACKING REGION

1000 1000
TOTAL PRESSURE, PSIA
0.05 PSIA PARTIAL PRESSURE
100 100
65 PSIA TOTAL PRESSURE
10 10
1 10 100 1000 10000 100000
PPM H2S IN GAS

NACE MR-01-75 SOUR MULTIPHASE SYSTEMS
MOL % H2S IN GAS
0.0001 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10

10,000
SULFIDE STRESS
CRACKING REGION
0.05 PSIA PARTIAL PRESSURE

1,000
TOTAL PRESSURE, PSIA
265 PSIA TOTAL PRESSURE
100
10 PSIA PARTIAL
PRESSURE
10
1 10 100 1,000 10,000 100,000
PPM H2S IN GAS

E FFE CT O F N i O N SC C
1000
CRACKING
100
Breaking Time, Hrs
M inim um Tim e to Cracking in

Boiling 42% Magnesium
Chloride
10
NO CRACKING
1
0 20 40 60 80
Nickel, %
Table 4.1 - 1: Composition of Common Wirelines

Wire Metallurgy
Carbon Steel
• Bright Steel (API 9A Level 3 or Improved Plow Steel)
• Bright Steel (API Extra Improved Plow Steel; Hi-Strength or Monitor AA)
Austenitic Stainless Steel
• 316
6 Moly Stainless Steel
• Avesta 254SMO
• Bridon Supa 75
• 25-6 MO
• Bridon Supa 70 (discontinued)
• Bridon Supa 80 (discontinued)
Cobalt-Based Alloys
• MP35N

Table 4.1 - 2: Composition of Common Wirelines
C Mn P S Si Cr Ni Mo Cu N
Bright Steel (API .45 .60 .04 .05 .15 - - - - -

9A Level 3) min .90 max max .30
Bright Steel .60 .60 .40 .50 .15 - - - - -

(Extra Improved min .90 max max .30
Plow Steel)
316 .04 1.0 - - .50 17.5 11.5 2.2 - -
Avesta 254SMO .02 1.0 - - .80 20 18 6.25 .75 .20

max max max
Bridon Supa 75 .02 2.0 .03 .005 .50 20 25 6.5 1.10 .16
max max max
25-6 MO .02 2.0 - - .50 20 25 6.5 1.0 .20

max max max
MP35N .025 .15 - - .15 20 35 9.75 - 3

max max max 5

Table 4.1 - 3: Recommended Wireline Selection, Use, and Environmental Consideration
<200°F <350°F >350°F

Alloy Class H2S
Cl < 2% Cl > 2% Cl < 2% Cl > 2% Cl < 2% Cl > 2%
Carbon Steel1 NR P P P P P P
Austenitic Stainless2 E NR NR NR NR NR NR
3
6 Moly Stainless E E E E E I NR
Cobalt Bases Alloys4 E E E E E E E
Legend:
• NR - Not recommended, may cause cracking or embrittlement
• P - Pitting, weight loss corrosion; may be used for short duration
• I - Satisfactory for intermittent service
• E - Satisfactory for extended service
Notes:
1. Carbon Steel - can be used in any temperature/chloride (salt water) range

when there is no H2S or other corrosive fluids. However, the chlorides will
cause pitting-weight loss corrosion. The pitting would need to be monitored
and the wire discarded when the pitting becomes excessive.
2. 316 Stainless Steel - austenitic stainless can be used in salt water up to 150-
180 degrees F. Since most wells are hotter than this temperature range and
most have salt water (chlorides), 316 SS is rarely recommended.
3. 6 Moly Stainless Steel - such as 254SMO (Supa 70 equivalent, which has been
discontinued) and 25-6MO (Supa 75 Equivalent) are good for any combination
of H2S and chlorides in temperatures up to 350 degrees F. 25-6MO can also be
used in H2S and CO2 wells that have low concentrations (2% or less) of chlo-
rides for intermittent service at temperatures above 350 degrees F.
4. MP35N - is good for any combination of H2S and chlorides in temperatures
over 350 degrees F. As with the other wirelines acids can crack MP35N. How-
ever, MP35N will withstand acids much better than the other wirelines.
MP35N is considered the best wireline available.

Table 4.1 - 4: Wireline Part Numbers for Reference*
Reference
Size Length Description
Part No.
.072 10M Bright Steel - Improved Plow 92L5
.082 18M Bright Steel - Extra Improved 92L24

Plow (Monitor AA)

Plow (Monitor AA)
.082 25M 316 Stainless Steel 92L62
.092 10M Bright Steel - Improved Plow 996.MW005
.092 15M Bright Steel - Improved Plow 996.05364

Plow (Monitor AA)
.092 18M 316 Stainless 92L31

Plow (Monitor AA)
.092 20M 316 Stainless 92L21
.092 20M Bridon Supa 75 92L153
.092 25M Bright Steel - Extra Improved 996.05398

Plow (Monitor AA)
.092 25M 316 Stainless 92L73
.092 25M Avesta 254 SMO 92L151
.092 25M MP35N 92L65
.105 15M 316 Stainless 92L167
.105 15M Avesta 254 SMO 996.18993

Table 4.1 - 4: Wireline Part Numbers for Reference*
Reference
Size Length Description
Part No.
.105 18M Avesta 254 SMO 92L148
.105 20M 316 Stainless 92L138
.105 20M Avesta 254 SMO 92L150

Plow (Monitor AA)

Plow (Monitor AA)
.108 20M 316 Stainless 804.62008
.108 20M MP35N 996.19205

Plow (Monitor AA)
.108 25M Avesta 254 SMO 996.MW006
.108 25M Bridon Supa 75 996.19180
.108 25M 25-6 MO 996.19184
.108 25M MP35N 996.05406

Plow (Monitor AA)
.125 20M 316 Stainless 996.18865

Plow (Monitor AA)
.125 25M Avesta 254 SMO 996.MW001
.125 25M 25-6 MO 996.MW002

* Wireline part numbers above are for reference only. Refer to Equipment Catalog
for complete up-to-date information.
Table 4.1 - 5: Wireline Mechanical Properties
Weight
Size Breaking Stretch(in./
Material Per1000 ft.
(dia - in.) Strength (lb.) 100 ft./100 lb.)
(lb.)
API-9A Bright .072 961 13.83 .996

Improved Plow Steel
(Carbon Steel) .082 1239 17.93 .771
.092 1547 22.58 .615
.105 1966 29.41 .476
.108 2109 31.11 .450
.125 2794 41.68 .340
API-9A Bright Extra .072 1169 13.83 .996

Improved Plow Steel
(Carbon Steel) .082 1479 17.93 .771
Monitor AA
.092 1828 22.58 .615
.105 2329 29.41 .476
.108 2455 31.11 .450
.125 3203 41.68 .340
316 Stainless Steel .082 1083 18.37 .812

(Austenitic Stainless)
.092 1363 23.14 .645
.105 1732 30.14 .495
.108 1786 31.88 .468
.125 2270 42.71 .349
254-SMO(6 Moly .092 1462 23.02 .622

Stainless)
.105 1818 29.98 .478
.108 1924 31.71 .452
.125 2454 42.48 .337
Bridon Supa 75(6 .092 1550 23.29 .79

Moly Stainless)
.105 N/A N/A N/A
.108 2030 32.1 .58
.125 2560 43.0 .43
25-6MO(6 Moly .092 1475

Stainless)
.105 N/A N/A N/A
.108 2050
.125 2550

Table 4.1 - 5: Wireline Mechanical Properties
Weight
Size Breaking Stretch(in./
Material Per1000 ft.
(dia - in.) Strength (lb.) 100 ft./100 lb.)
(lb.)
MP35N(Cobalt Based .092 1582 24.26 .547

Alloy)
.105 2009 31.59 .423
.108 2080 33.42 .401
.125 2724 44.77 .302

Table 4.1 - 6: Definitions and Conversions

1. Sulfide Stress Cracking (SSC) - A form of hydrogen embrittlement which takes
place in the presence of H2S. Single hydrogen atoms, or ions, enter the metal
matrix at the grain boundaries. The presence of the hydrogen between the
grains weakens the metal and makes it brittle. If no stress occurs and the H2S
is removed, the hydrogen ions will eventually work their way out, leaving the
metal in its former condition. If stress is applied while the hydrogen ions are
still between the grains, the metal may fracture.
2. Stress Corrosion Cracking (SCC)- In the presence of hot chlorides, corrosion
cracking is greatly accelerated in metals with nickel content between 2% and
40%. If no H2S is present, it is common to use bright steel wireline since it is
not susceptible to SCC. In extremely hostile environments (>350 o F), it may be
necessary to use a cobalt-based alloy such as MP35N.
3. 1 pound = 7000 grains
4. mol% H2S = moles of H2S/moles of gas
5. ppm H2S = Mol% H2S x 10,000
6. ppm H2S = (grains H2S per 100 ft 3 /6.7) x 1,000
7. Partial pressure = (ppm H2S/1,000,000) x pressure in psi
8. Partial pressure = (Mol% H2S/100) x pressure in psi
9. Partial pressure = (grains H2S per 100 ft 3 /6.7) x 1,000 x psi

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.2: Line Stretch Calculations - Weight and Temperature
SL 4.2: Line Stretch Calculations - Weight and

Temperature
Wire Stretch Calculation
Formula 1 Unit Stretch = 4/(πd2E) Ft/Ft/Lb; where d = wire diameter (inch), and E = Modu-
lus of Elasticity or Young’s Modulus (psi).
Total Stretch (Ft) = unit stretch x tool depth x total weight
For bright steel wireline with E = 30 x 106 lb/in2
Unit Stretch = 4/[πd2(30 x 106)] = (.0424/d2 x 1/1 million) Ft/Ft/Lb; for E =

30 x 106 psi
Wire Size Unit Stretch
.062 11.04 / 1 mil
.072 8.19 / 1 mil
.082 6.31 / 1 mil
.092 5.01 / 1 mil
.105 3.85 / 1 mil
.108 3.64 / 1 mil
.125 2.72 / 1 mil
Example: Find total stretch and actual tool depth for .092 Bright Steel wire with
800 lb total weight and at 18,000 ft tool depth.
Total Stretch (ft) = unit stretch x tool depth (ft) x total weight (lb)=
5.01/1,000,000 x 18,000 ft x 800 lb = 72 ft; actual tool depth = 18072 ft
Note Use Formula 1 for other steel with Modulus of Elasticity different from 30
x 106 psi.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.3: Wire Twist/Torsion Tester - Twist Test Chart
SL 4.3: Wire Twist/Torsion Tester - Twist Test Chart

Slickline Management System Wire Tester
Figure 4.3 - 1
Note Cover wire length with safety shield when testing.
Note Use appropriate PPE when using tester.
Tester Specifications
Grade Min Breaking Weight

Min. Twists
Diameter Strength Required
.066 11.62 32 min
.072 13.83 29 min
.082 1239 17.93 26 min
.092 1547 22.58 23 min
29.41 20 min
2109 51.11 19 min
41.68 17 min

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.4: Wire Inspection System
SL 4.4: Wire Inspection System
Wireline Inspection Instrument

While not as thorough as a complete metallurgical analysis, the Halliburton Wire-
line Inspection Device provides a portable, nondestructive, on-the-spot method of
examining the entire length of the wire for physical defects. The inspection
method indicates manufacturing defects, pitting, mechanical damage, necked
areas and cracks in both ferrous and non-ferrous metal wires from.092 in. to .125
in. OD.
The system consists of the Eddy Current Inspection Instrument, an AC adapter/

charger and connecting cable in a carrying case, and hardware for mounting the
inspection coil to the wireline unit’s depth counter. A different size coil is required
for each wire size and is ordered separately. The instrument can be programmed
for various wires.
For a more in-depth explanation of this wire inspection tool and how it is used,
see the Slickline Manual titled “Eddy Current Tester, Part Number 996.17363”. It
can be found at the Halworld web site that lists Slickline manuals:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_paslines_slickline_manuals.asp.
Wire Management Software

A slickline wire management program is available that tracks the life of wireline.
Using an Excel spreadsheet program, the operator records the wire history includ-
ing job details and well environment. The program uses this data to estimate and
to display a graph of the wire’s “used life”. Having the “used life” percentage, the
operator knows when to remove the wireline from service. The program also can
be used to help determine when to make adjustments in the length of the line or
to reverse the line on the wireline unit. By periodically cutting off a few feet of
wireline or reversing the wireline, the operator can increase the useable life of the
overall wire length.
Though the program does not predict the “used life” with 100% accuracy, the pro-
gram will show which wireline sections have been subjected to the highest num-
ber of cycles. Improving distribution of these cycles throughout the wireline is the
key to increasing wireline life. Long term use of the program and periodic testing
of used wireline samples will help improve the accuracy of the wireline manage-
ment program.
The program, instructions for its use and a sample application can be obtained
from the Slickline Technology group in Carrollton, Texas.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.4: Wire Inspection System
A copy of API Specification 9A, “Specifications for Wire Rope”, can be ordered
from the API. Their Internet page is at http://www.api.org/. The web page for
finding and ordering API documents over the Internet is at:
http://www.cssinfo.com/apigate.html.
Documents also can be ordered by mail:
American Petroleum Institute

Order Desk
1220 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005-4070
USA
Or, the document can be ordered by telephone:
Call (202) 682-8375, 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Eastern Time.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.5: Braided Line Information
SL 4.5: Braided Line Information

Braided line (wire rope) is produced in a number of sizes, type construction
(strand configuration), and materials. Braided line is available plain, galvanized,
or die drawn/formed. Galvanized wire has better resistance to saline conditions
than the uncoated plain line, but the protection from the zinc is sacrificial. Once
the zinc is corroded, the line is no longer protected. The die formed line gives a
higher breaking strength for any given diameter as compared to the standard
braided line.
Braided line is recommended for heavy-duty wireline work including difficult

fishing jobs. For low-pressure wells, a swabbing stuffing box is used as part of the
lubricator rig-up to pack-off pressure around the line. For well pressures above
1500 psi, a grease head and grease injection system is needed to pack-off the
braided line against well pressure.
Table 4.5 - 1: Galvanized Steel Braided Line
Size > 3/16 3/16 7/32 7/32
** 1 X 19 ** 1 X 19
Construction > 1 X 16 1 X 16
Dycam Dycam
Length - ft
15,000 * 92L58 - 996.MW007 -
17,000 * 92L28 - - -
20,000 996.05385 - - 996.MW003
25,000 - * 92L157 - -
* - 92L, 804, and 996 series part numbers for reference only. These part numbers
will be replaced by SAP numbers at some point. For sizes not listed, order by
description.
** Dycam (Camesa) is braided line pulled through a die to form a smooth OD. The
process closes some of the voids between braids and increases the strength of the
line compared to the same OD standard braided line. Bridon’s version is called
Dyform.
Table 4.5 - 2: Braided Line - Breaking Strengths (Galvanized Carbon Steel)
Size 3/16 3/16 7/32 7/32
Construction 1 X 16 ** 1 X 19 1 X 16 ** 1 X 19
Dycam Dycam
Breaking 4500 6400 6000 8600

Strength (lbs.)
Note Breaking strength will vary slightly depending on manufacturer.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.6: Wire Fallback
SL 4.6: Wire Fallback

“Rule of Thumb” for Wire Fallback
By cutting measured lengths of wire on numerous fishing exercises in a 3,000 ft
training well, the following table has been compiled. The table shows the distance
that the wire will fall back down the hole per 1,000 ft of length. Although not
totally accurate under all conditions, field experience has proved the table to be a
reasonable guide in determining the depth of the top of the broken wire.
Amount of Wireline Fallback per 1,000 ft
Fallback per
Tubing Size (in.) Wireline OD 1000-ft. of Wire
Length (ft.)
2 3/8 .082 8
2 3/8 .092 10
2 7/8 .082 10
2 7/8 .092 12
3 1/2 .092 16
3 1/2 .108 15
3 1/2 3/16 20
4 1/2 .108 27
4 1/2 3/16 35
5 1/2 .108 40
5 1/2 3/16 50
7 .108 90
7 3/16 100

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.7: General Hydraulic Unit Specifications
SL 4.7: General Hydraulic Unit Specifications
Open-Loop Hydraulic Drives

Most slickline units are configured with open-loop hydraulic systems. That is, the
oil flows in a path that is "open" at the reservoir, where the oil returning from the
drive is open to atmospheric pressure and the bulk of oil mixes together before
returning to the pump. The oil flows from the reservoir, to pump, to four-way
valve, to motor, back to four-way valve and back to the reservoir. Along the way,
the oil is directed through filters and a cooler, and may be directed to various con-
trol valves. The same power components are used whether it is an all-in-one skid
unit, or a two piece unit with separate power and skid units where the hoses are
coupled with quick-connectors. There are variations in the control components
and there are other variations between slickline units so always check the units’
parts list before ordering parts.
With two-piece slickline units, there is some flexibility in matching an open-loop

power unit to drive an open-loop reel unit. However, there is a difference in
where the main relief and pressure control valve is mounted and how it is con-
trolled. Older reel units have the pressure control valve mounted in their hydrau-
lic system and the pressure control is "local" to the reel unit. Newer reel units have
the pressure control valve mounted on the power unit. These newer reel units
require that a pressure control pilot hose be connected to the pilot-operated relief
valve on the power unit.
A newer power unit with a remote control relief valve can be used with an older
reel unit that has the pressure control in its circuit. An older power unit that does
not have a remote pressure control valve cannot be used with a newer reel unit
that requires this remote pressure control valve. However, older power units can
be modified to operate with the newer reel units as well as with the older reel
units.
Most heavy-duty open-loop slickline units require a hydraulic supply of:
Sustained Flow Rate Capability = 56 Gallons per Minute (212 Liters per
Minute)
Sustained Pressure Capability = 2000 pounds per square-inch (138 Bar)

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.7: General Hydraulic Unit Specifications
Closed-Loop Hydraulic Drives

Many newer slickline units have been equipped with closed-loop hydraulic sys-
tems, also known as hydrostatic drives. In these systems, most of the oil follows a
"closed" path. Only a portion of the oil being circulated returns to the reservoir
during each circuit of the system. Most of the oil being circulated flows from the
pump to the drive motor and directly back to the pump. The direction and speed
of the reel is varied through controls on the variable pump and motor. A portion
of the oil being circulated is removed through a built-in valve and flows through a
cooler and filters. This oil is put back into the system by a charge pump that is
part of the main pump. Units with closed-loop hydraulic systems cannot be
"mixed" with power units other than those specifically designed for the reel unit
being used.
Operating Procedures
Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual(s) for the specific unit(s) being used.
Perform pre-start inspections, starting, operating and shutdown procedures, and
post-job inspection and maintenance as indicated in manual(s).
See the following Halworld Intranet site for a link to operating manuals for
hydraulic units:

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.8: Slickline Reel Chart - Dimensions and Capabilities
SL 4.8: Slickline Reel Chart - Dimensions and Capabilities

Table 3: Wireline Reel Capacities and Dimensions
"AMAP" Nominal Flange Between Core Shaft

Reference Recommended
Reference Capacity Diameter Flanges Diameter Diameter
Number Wire Size
Number (Ft.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.)
996.03486 82M2317 .092 16 19 8.25
996.03487 82M2318 .187 17,000 24 19 10.75
996.03495 82M2399 .187 20,000 24 22.8 10.75
996.03502 82M2496 .187 9000 18 15 8
996.03539 82M2934 .187 20,000
996.03564 82M3444 .108 26,000 18 22.8 7.88
996.03574 82M3582 7/32 25,000 30 24 11
996.03685 82M4420 .108 22,000 16 20 8
996.03715 82M4483 7/32 12,500 26 15 8
996.03732 82M4518 7/32 17,000 28 19 11
996.03743 82M4530 .108 20,000 16 19.8 7.88
996.03749 82M4563 7/32 25,000 30 24 11
996.03796 82T889 .092 20,000 15 18 6
996.04195
996.14389 .125 25,000 24 22.8 14.75
996.15483 .125 22,000 24 19.38 14.75
996.16529 .092 30,000 26 25.5 19.75 Direct

.125 20,000 Drive*
996.16530 .188 20,000 26 25.5 14.75 Direct

Drive*
996.17541 7/32 15,000 24 22.8 10.75
996.17958 .125 22,000 25 16 14.75 Direct

Drive*
996.18163 .188 22,000 28 25.5 14.75 Direct

7/32 20,000 Drive*
996.18167 .092 30,000 26 25.5 19.75 Direct

.125 25,000 Drive*
996.18682 .188 22,000 32 16 14.75 Direct

Drive*
996.18940 .092 27,000 18 18 7.88 Direct

.108 20,000 Drive**
996.19052 .092 25,000 16 19.32 7.88

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.8: Slickline Reel Chart - Dimensions and Capabilities
Table 3: Wireline Reel Capacities and Dimensions
"AMAP" Nominal Flange Between Core Shaft

Reference Recommended
Reference Capacity Diameter Flanges Diameter Diameter
Number Wire Size
Number (Ft.) (In.) (In.) (In.) (In.)
996.19207 .092 27,000 18 18 7.88 Direct

.108 20,000 Drive**
996.19386 .188 30,000 30 25.5 14.75 Direct

7/32 22,000 Drive*
**Direct drive "Lightweight" unit.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.9: Reel Capacity Calculation
SL 4.9: Reel Capacity Calculation
Conversion Factors to Estimate Wire Capacities of Reels

The following table lists conversion factors that can be used to estimate the capac-
ity of a reel when spooling on a different size of wire.
CAUTION Using wire larger in diameter than the recommended size can cause structural
failure of the reel. Using wire on reels with smaller core diameters than recom-
mended can shorten the useful life of the wire on wraps closest to the reel core.
Multiply To Estimate
By This
Capacity of This Capacity of This
Factor
Wire Size Wire Size
.092 1.12 .082
.092 0.81 .108
.092 0.28 3/16
.108 1.23 .092
.125 1.33 .108
.125 0.44 3/16
3/16 0.73 7/32
3/16 0.61 1/4
3/16 0.39 5/16
7/32 0.534 5/16
Example: To estimate how many feet of .108 wire a reel will hold when it is known
that the reel will hold 30,000 ft. of .092 wire.
30,000-ft. capacity of .092 wire x 0.81 = 24,300 ft. estimated capacity of .108
wire

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.9: Reel Capacity Calculation
Formula to Estimate Wire Capacity from Reel Dimensions

Following is a formula that can be used to estimate the wire capacity of a reel
when only the dimensions are known, not the capacity of any wire size.
WrapDia (in.) = Diameter of Outer Wrap (Usually the Rim Diameter minus
1-inch.)
CoreDia (in.) = Diameter of Reel Core
CoreWidth (in.) = Distance Between Inside Surfaces of Rims
WireDia (in.) = Diameter of Wire to be Spooled on Reel
Formula 2 Capacity in Feet = [(WrapDia2 - CoreDia2) x CoreWidth] / (WireDia2 x 15.28)
Note Capacities calculated with the above factors and formulas are approximate
only. Reel capacities vary depending on how the wire is spooled onto the reel.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.10: Mechanical Counter System
SL 4.10: Mechanical Counter System
Counter Wheels
Heavy-duty slickline units have "four-foot" counter wheels, sometimes called "16-
inch" wheels. Using this size of counter wheel helps to extend the useful life of
slickline wire. Running wire over smaller-diameter "two-foot" counter wheels can
reduce the fatigue life of the wire. For best accuracy, the counter wheel should be
in good condition without excessive wear of the surface on which the wire wraps.
Each size of wire requires a certain size of counter wheel and wheels measuring in
feet are a different size than wheels measuring in meters. Pressure wheels some-
times are different too, depending on the size of the counter wheel. When the size
of wire being used is changed the counter wheel and pressure wheels also must
be changed to the correct sizes. The following table lists the various sizes of
counter wheels and pressure wheels required for each wire size. During manufac-
turing, the wheels are marked on their sides with their Part Number or Reference
Number. For checking purposes, the table also lists the nominal dimensions of the
counter wheel.
WIRE SIZE .082 .092 .105/.108 .125 .187 .225 (7/32 NOMINAL) .250
FT/METER FEET METER FEET METER FEET METER FEET METER FEET METER FEET METER FEET METER
COUNTER
WHL. REF. NO. 996.13918 996.13922 996.03619 996.13921 996.03620 996.03625 996.14495 996.15378 996.13925 996.13920 996.13924 996.13919 996.13923 996.13917
“AMAP”
WHL. REF. NO. 82M4155 82M4156 82M4109 82M4157 82M4110 82M4152 82M4615 82M4620 82M4111 82M4158 82M4112 82M4159 82M4113 82M4160
GROOVE
DIA., IN. 15.197 15.583 15.187 15.573 15.171 15.557 15.153 15.540 15.092 15.478 15.054 15.439 15.029 15.415
GROOVE
WIDTH, IN. .179 .179 .197 .197 .226 .226 .272 .272 .408 .408 .490 .490 .544 .544
WHEEL
OD, IN. 15.70 16.375 15.70 16.375 15.70 16.375 15.70 16.375 15.70 16.375 15.70 16.375 15.70 16.375
WHEEL
WIDTH, IN. .64 .64 .64 .64 .64 .64 .67 .67 .77 .77 .83 .83 .86 .86
PRESSURE
WHL. REF. NO. 804.12338 804.12338 804.12534 804.12534 804.1331 804.1331 804.1227 804.1227 804.1321 804.1321 804.20069 804.20069 804.20072 804.20072
Right-Angle Drives and Veeder-Root Counters

A "four-foot" counter wheel measuring in feet makes exactly one revolution for
each four-feet of wire that goes past the wheel. A "four-foot" counter wheel mea-
suring in meters makes exactly one revolution for every 1.25 meters of wire that
goes past the wheel. Because the length of wire being measured is different, each
type of counter wheel (feet or meters) must be matched with the correct right-
angle drive (at the counter wheel) and Veeder-Root indicating counter.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.10: Mechanical Counter System
Measuring in Feet
Counter Wheel, 1 Revolution Output = 4-feet
Right-Angle Drive with 1:2 Increasing Ratio 2 Revolution Output
Veeder-Root with 1:2 Increasing Ratio 2 Revolutions Input = 4 Counts
(Veeder-Root calls this a 0.5 Ratio, 0.5 turns input = 1 count)
Reference Numbers:
Right Angle drive, Reference 996.10260. "AMAP" Reference Number, 98C22
Veeder-Root counter, Reference 996.04168. "AMAP" Reference Number, 82TO130
Measuring in Meters
Counter Wheel, 1 Revolution Output = 1.25
meters
Right-Angle Drive with 1:2 Increasing Ratio 2 Revolution Output
Veeder-Root with 1:0.625 Decreasing Ratio 2 Revolutions Input = 1.25
Counts
(Veeder-Root calls this a 1.6 Ratio, 1.6 turns input = 1 count)
Reference Numbers:
Right Angle drive, Reference 996.10260. "AMAP" Reference Number, 98C22
Veeder-Root counter, Reference 996.04229. "AMAP" Reference Number,

82TOM130

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.11: Electronic Depth Counter System
SL 4.11: Electronic Depth Counter System

The Halliburton electronic depth-counter system consists of the Advanced Mea-
suring System (AMS), which is panel mounted or portable, an electronic load cell
(instead of the hydraulic Martin-Decker load cell) and an optical encoder, which is
an "electronic counter". The electronic load cell can be mounted remotely at the
bottom hay pulley, the same as with hydraulic load cells, or it is mounted as part
of the two-wheel counter. The optical counter can be "added on" to an existing
system, or it is mounted as part of the Halliburton two-wheel counter. All types of
AMS displays have features that adapt them to many different rig-up and equip-
ment combinations. Each equipment combination has specific input requirements
before the system will provide accurate and usable outputs.
Separate Load Cell and Optical Encoder, Any AMS Type

Instead of a hydraulic load cell (Martin-Decker), an electronic load cell is mounted
at the hay pulley. Additionally, an optical encoder is mounted to the slickline unit
and driven by its counter wheel. This setup can be used with any AMS unit, panel
or portable type, as long as an Intrinsically Safe (IS) load cell, and an IS optical
encoder, is used with the Portable-IS-AMS.
Note Be sure to use the correct values when setting the AMS.
1. Correct load angle at pulley where load cell is mounted. See Section SL 4.13
for explanation.
2. Correct size of counter wheel: 2-ft.; 4-ft.; 1.25-meter; etc.
3. Correct wire size.
4. Correct rotation. There are two choices. The wrong choice will cause the AMS
to count "backwards".
Halliburton Two-Wheel Counter Assembly

The Halliburton two-wheel combination counter was developed for direct mea-
surement of line tension and depth. It uses two in-line 4-foot-circumference
wheels. One wheel is the Universal "depth-counter" wheel used to count rota-
tions, and the other wheel includes a load sensor that is used as its axle. The two-
wheel combination counter allows the wireline to wrap around the two wheels in
a non-reverse bend, thereby reducing wire fatigue. The counter accommodates
.092-in. to .125-in. slickline, 3/16-in.-braided line, and 7/32-in. to 5/16-in. electric
line (the same selections as the AMS panels). The Universal counter wheel is a
fixed circumference wheel that is used with all the wire sizes above. The operator
inputs the wire size being used. Software in the AMS computes the depth using
this setting and the circumference of the Universal wheel. This way, the Universal
measuring wheel enables the AMS to compute the true depth without having to
change counter wheels to "match" the wire size.

The rear-most wheel uses a load pin as an axle. A load pin is a device with strain
gauges that sends out an electrical signal in proportion to the load on the pin. The
load pin is mounted in an eccentric housing that is marked to indicate the effec-
tive load angle. When a job is set up, the wire passes over the forward Universal
counter wheel (toward the well), passes over the rear wheel, which is on the load
pin, and exits towards the well. The load pin wheel pivots on the eccentric axis
and the effective load angle is indicated on the load pin housing. This angle is
entered into the AMS so that the software can calculate the correct value of wire
tension. (See Section SL 4.13 for description of load angles.) The AMS uses actual
line tension to calculate line stretch. Line stretch is used in the depth calculation.
Rotation of the Universal counter wheel drives an optical encoder (a counter)

through the "T"-shaped right-angle drive. The other leg of the "T" drives a flexible
shaft connected to a Veeder-Root mechanical counter. This supplies a backup
depth indication if the electronic system fails although the mechanical system is
less accurate than the AMS.
Note Because one wheel (Universal wheel) is used for all wire sizes, the
mechanical and electronic depth systems will not agree. Refer to the AMS operat-
ing manual for correlation charts used to correct the mechanical depth readout for
the appropriate wire size.
Under normal operating conditions, wire is held in contact with the wheel
grooves by the tension of the wire and the retainer wheels at the front counter
wheel originally were designed only to keep the wire inside the wheel groove.
Under certain operating conditions, however, tool weight may not be enough to
keep the wire in contact with the groove. If the contact is lost momentarily, some
relative movement of the wire with respect to the wheel may occur. The "slippage"
will cause incorrect depth calculations by the AMS. Slippage may not be apparent
to the operator. See the following section, Two-Wheel Counter Maintenance, for
information on adjusting the retainer wheels.
Note Be sure to use the correct values when setting the AMS.
5. Input the load angle correctly so that the AMS correctly calculates he actual
line tension.
6. Correct size of counter wheel - Universal.
7. Correct wire size.
8. Correct rotation. There are two choices. The wrong choice will cause the AMS
to count "backwards".
9. Retainer wheels must be adjusted to maintain contact between the wire and
the wheel groove.
10. The eccentric bushing must move freely about its axis when not under load.

Two-Wheel Counter Maintenance

• Refer to the Two-Wheel Counter Equipment Manual for general maintenance
instructions. The site is:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_content/slickline/2wcountr.pdf
• Make sure the optical encoder shaft is not end-loaded. Any end load on this
shaft will damage the encoder.
• Adjusting Retainer Wheels - Periodic adjustment is not needed unless a differ-
ent size wire size is used, new wire of the same size is spooled onto the reel, or
the mounting bolt has loosened. After a wire is placed in the groove, loosen
the retainer-wheel mounting bolts and slide the top retainer wheel against the
wire. Maintain moderate pressure against the wire while tightening the
mounting bolt. Make sure that the wheel is snug against the wire but avoid
crushing the wire. Note that this wheel is used as a retainer wheel, not a "pres-
sure" wheel. Repeat this procedure on the lower retainer wheel.
• Lubricate fairlead guide roller bearings using grease.
• Lubricate the tension angle indicator shaft using grease to protect the self-
aligning machined surface from corrosion.
• Lubricate swivel base and linear rod bearings using grease.
• Lubricate right angle drive adapter with powdered graphite and inspect con-
dition of drive tang.
• If equipped with optional line oiler, make sure the line oiler is supported
properly to avoid damage to the wire.
Two-Wheel Counter Reference Numbers

Reference Number Description
996.17927 Standard duty with Universal wheel and swivel base

996.18127 Intrinsically Safe with Universal wheel and swivel base
996.18375 Intrinsically Safe with Universal wheel and overhead pivot
996.18481 Standard duty with Universal wheel and overhead pivot

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.12: Advanced Measuring System (AMS)
SL 4.12: Advanced Measuring System (AMS)

The AMS depth panel automatically corrects for wireline stretch and error caused
by temperature changes in the measuring wheel. The operator must select the
wireline size to ensure proper wireline stretch corrections to the depth display.
Operators must also select the ambient temperature so the panel can make auto-
matic wheel error corrections.
The complete operator’s manual can be accessed at the following Halliburton site:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_content/slickline/ams.pdf
Power required by the AMS panel is 9-30 VDC. The AMS depth panel is fused at 4
amperes maximum current and has reverse polarity protection. If improper polar-
ity voltage is applied to the panel no damage or possible fire can occur. Loss of
power to the AMS depth panel during operation will not cause a loss of depth
data. The panel continuously stores depth data every 100 milliseconds in a bat-
tery-supported memory device. When power is applied to the panel, the last
"Depth" is displayed.
Beginning a job, the Zero Depth switch sets the panel depth display at zero. This
switch is only recognized and read by the AMS when line speed is zero. If this
switch is pressed during a wire line operation the depth display will indicate zero
depth. To avoid this possible loss of depth data, the panel stores depth data until
the depth changes from zero.
Note If this switch is pressed in error, do not allow the wire to move. To recover
depth while downhole, press this button again to recall the previous depth dis-
play. Do not allow wire line to move before the switch is pressed again or the
depth history will be lost.
The AMS panel is programmed to prevent almost all switches from making set-
ting changes during wire line operations. Most switch settings are recognized and
read only when depth is equal to zero and/or when line speed is equal to zero.
Operator control switches that directly change the depth display are accompanied
by an audible tone when depressed. These switches are "Zero Depth", "Up Depth"
and "Down Depth".

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.12: Advanced Measuring System (AMS)
Panel Mounted AMS Reference Numbers

Several panel-mounted AMS units have been supplied with special features. Fol-
lowing are the three standard units. All panel-mounted AMS units display depth
and speed using Feet or Meters according to a switch selection by the operator.
996.18265 With analog and digital depth displays indicating Kilograms

996.18266 With analog and digital depth displays indicating
Decanewtons
996.18808 With analog and digital depth displays indicating Pounds
Portable and Portable IS-AMS Units

The Advanced Measuring System is available in two portable versions, a stan-
dard-duty unit for unclassified areas and an Intrinsically Safe (IS) unit designed
and certified for Class 1 Division 2 areas. Both units are housed in a weatherproof
aluminum body and have a color LCD screen with a row of operating buttons
under the screen. Both models have internal rechargeable batteries and may be
operated independently of external power supplies.
All portable AMS units require separate electronic load cells to measure line ten-
sion and optical encoders to "count" wire displacement. Like the panel-mounted
versions, the portable units calculate the wire depth. Starting with the "counts" of
the optical encoder, the software program takes into account the stretch of the
wire and the effects of temperature upon the counter wheel.
The complete operator’s manual can be accessed at the following Halliburton site:
http://halworld.halnet.com/hes/hesps/hespscp/hespscp_content/slickline/ams.pdf
Portable AMS Reference Numbers

Portable AMS units have been supplied separately, and with load cell and optical
encoder.
996.18130 Intrinsically Safe portable unit only

996.18350 Standard service portable unit only for unclassified areas
996.18711 Intrinsically Safe portable unit with load cell and optical encoder
996.WM101 Standard service portable unit with load cell and optical encoder

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.13: Weight Indicators
SL 4.13: Weight Indicators
Weight Indicator Correction Factor

Because of the way forces act, a load cell/weight indicator cannot directly mea-
sure the tension on wireline. Figure 4.13 - 1 shows a wireline passing over a
sheave suspended over a lubricator stack. If the tool string weighs 150 lb., and the
operator is pulling 150 lb., then a 300-lb. force is exerted on the sheave. To make
the weight indicator display a line tension of 150 lb., the indicator manufacturer
must build in a correction factor of 0.5.
LOAD CELL
− 300 LB.
↓ 150 LB. 150 LB. ↓ ↓ 150 LB.
STUFFING
Figure 4.13 - 1

When there is an angle other than 0° between the wires, the force on the weight
indicator no longer is twice the line tension. There will be a different correction
factor for each angle. The Martin-Decker weight indicator is manufactured with a
correction factor for an angle between the wires of 90°. This factor built into the
indicator is 0.7071. At an angle of 90°, as shown in Figure 4.13 - 2, a line tension of
150 lb. exerts a force of 212 lb. on the weight indicator. The correction factor of
0.7071 multiplied times this 212 lb. corrects the reading to 150 lb. This correction
factor is built in and cannot be changed. If the job requires a rig-up where the
angle is different than 90°, the weight indicator reading must be corrected. The
equations at the bottom of Charts 1 & 2 show how the corrections are calculated.
− TO STUFFING BOX
90° HAY PULLEY
LOAD CELL
← WIRELINE UNIT
Figure 4.13 - 2

Example:
Figure 4.13 - 3 shows a situation where the angle between the wires is 60°. Chart 1
shows a correction factor of 1.225 for 60°. Multiplying 200 lb. times 1.225 equals
245 lb. Therefore, the weight indicator reading should be 245 lb. at an actual line
tension of 200 lb.
− TO STUFFING BOX
60°
HAY PULLEY
LOAD CELL
Figure 4.13 - 3
These correction factors are useful when spooling wire on the reel and maintain-
ing the proper tension. The recommended spooling tension is 20% of the mini-
mum breaking strength of the wireline.
Example:
For .092 bright steel, 20% of the minimum breaking strength is approximately 309
lb. When using a wireline unit’s own spool off device, the angle between the wire
at the load cell sheave usually is less than 10°. The factor from Chart 1 for 10° is
1.410. Multiplying 309 lb. times 1.410 equals 436 lb. This shows that to have
approximately 309 lb. of tension on the wire, the spool off drag should be adjusted
so that the weight indicator at the sheave indicates between 430 and 440 lb.

Table 4.13 - 1: Known Load - What Should the Weight

Indicator Read?
Calculating the expected reading on the weight indicator for a known load.
Knowing the wire angle and the desired wire tension, multiply the desired wire
tension by the factor to determine the weight indicator reading.
Formula 3 (Desired Wire Tension) x (Conversion Factor) = Expected Weight

Indicator Reading
Table 4.13 - 1: Known Load - What Should the Weight Indicator Read?
Wire Angle Conversion

(Degrees) Factor
Less Than 10 1.410

20 1.393
30 1.366
40 1.329
50 1.282
60 1.225
70 1.158
80 1.083
90 1.000
100 0.909
110 0.811
120 0.707
130 0.598
140 0.484
150 0.366
160 0.246
170, Maximum 0.123
How it’s calculated: Conversion Factor = cosine (angle/2) x 1.4142

Table 4.13 - 2: Known Weight Indicator Reading - What is

Wire Tension?
Calculating the actual wire tension for a known weight indicator reading. Know-
ing the wire angle and the actual weight indicator reading, multiply the weight
indicator reading by the factor to determine the actual wire tension.
(Weight Indicator Reading) x (Conversion Factor) = Actual Wire Tension
Table 4.13 - 2: Known Weight Indicator Reading - What is Wire Tension?
Wire Angle Conversion

(Degrees) Factor
Less Than 10 0.709
20 0.718
30 0.732
40 0.752
50 0.780
60 0.816
70 0.864
80 0.923
90 1.000
100 1.100
110 1.233
120 1.414
130 1.672
140 2.066
150 2.732
160 4.065
170, Maximum 8.130
How it’s calculated: Conversion Factor = 1 / [cosine(angle/2) x 1.4142]

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.14: General Purpose Pump Skid
SL 4.14: General Purpose Pump Skid

These pump skids are designed to test wireline lubricators and blow out preven-
tors (BOP’s) and to be used for chemical injection. Typically they have a holding
tank of 225 gallons (852 liters). The tank has been supplied made of stainless steel
and some skid frames have been made of corrosion-resistant metals. Nominal rat-
ing of the fluid pump is 10,000 psi (690 bar) maximum pressure, 4800 psi (331 bar)
working pressure, and maximum flow rate of 15.6 gal/min (59 liter/min).
A hydraulic power source is required for operation. For maximum rated output
from the pump skid, the hydraulic supply should be capable of providing 40 gal/
min (151 liter/min) of hydraulic fluid at 2000 psi (138 bar).
The pump skid units use a small triplex piston pump. These pumps can be sup-
plied with different plunger sizes. The size plunger that is used determines the
skid unit’s fluid pressure and flow ratings. Be aware that some units have been
supplied with smaller plungers and those units can develop significantly higher
pressures than other units. Check the skid’s Operation Manual and the piston
pump nameplate to verify pressure and flow specifications.
Note Never change the plunger size of a pump skid unit without thoroughly
reviewing the pressure and flow capabilities of the other components, particularly
the valves and piping connected to the piston pump’s outlet.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.15: Pressure Control Equipment Color Coding
SL 4.15: Pressure Control Equipment Color Coding

Paint Specifications for H2S and Cold Service Equipment
Pressure Code Coating Per Engineering Drawing or Bill of Material:
1. H2S ES-C-62-*.
2. Cold, -50°F to -75°F (-45.5°C to -59.4°C) ES-C-62-*.
Service Code Coating Per Engineering Drawing or Bill of Material:
1. H2S ES-C-62-*. Pressure color code w/green stripe ES-C-115-6 over pressure
code. Stencil the letters “H2S” 1-in. high in white (ES-C-28) inside the green
stripe on all assemblies.
2. Cold, -50°F to -75°F (-45.5°C to -59.4°C) ES-C-62-*. Pressure color code with
brown stripe ES-C-115-14 over pressure code. Stencil the letters “cold” 1-in.
high in white (ES-C-28) inside the brown stripe on all assemblies.
Table 4.15 - 1: Pressure Rating Color Code Coating
ES-C-* Paint
Working Pressure Color ES-C-62-* Eng. Drawing
Spec.
2,000 ES-C-115-4 Blue ES-C-62-4
3,000 ES-C-1 Black ES-C-62-1
5,000 ES-C-115-3 Gray ES-C-62-3
6,000 ES-C-2 Red ES-C-62-2
10,000 ES-C-115-5 Yellow ES-C-62-5
15,000 ES-C-115-63 Orange ES-C-62-63
20,000 ES-C-28 White ES-C-62-28
30,000 ES-C-13 Aluminum ES-C-62-13
Lubricators: Class 46AO, 46AW, 46WO, 46FO, 46RF, 46RC.
Note For short lubricator sections (those with tube lengths too short for the
12-in. band or those with no tube at all) the ES-C-1 black finish can be eliminated
with the exception of 3,000 psi (20.7 MPA) working pressure assemblies (where
the ES-C-1 is used as the pressure color code). The external surfaces should be
coated entirely with the pressure code color. The service code stripe (with the
exception of the masked thread and seal areas) should be 2-in. wide and centered
on the short lubricator sections.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.16: Halliburton Quick Union Connections
SL 4.16: Halliburton Quick Union Connections

Standard HES QUN Connections
QUN Seal Work Collar Standard

ID Service
Conn. Dia. Press OD Flange ID
5-4 3.50 2.06 5.000 STD 5.79 2-1/16

5-4 3.50 2.06 10.000 STD 5.79 2-1/16
5-4 3.50 2.06 15.000 STD 5.79 2-1/16
5-4 3.50 2.56 5.000 STD 5.79 2-9/16
5-4 3.50 2.56 10.000 STD 5.79 2-9/16
5-4 3.50 2.62 15.000 STD 5.79 2-9/16
5-4 3.50 3.00 5.000 STD 5.79 3-1/8
5-4 3.50 2.94 10.000 STD 5.79 3-1/16
5-3/4-4 4.00 2.06 5,000 H7S 6.54 2-1/16
5-3/4-4 4.00 2.06 10,000 H7S 6.54 2-1/16
5-3/4-4 4.00 2.06 15,000 H7S 6.54 2-1/16
5-3/4-4 4.00 2.56 5,000 H7S 6.54 2-9/16
5-3/4-4 4.00 2.56 10,000 H7S 6.54 2-9/16
5-3/4-4 4.00 3.00 5,000 H7S 6.54 3-1/8
5-3/4-4 4.00 3.00 10,000 H7S 6.54 3-1/16
6-1/4-4 4.00 2.62 15,000 H7S 7.54 2-9/16
7-1/2-4 5.50 3.00 15,000 H7S 8.54 3-1/16
6-1/2-4 4.75 4.00 5,000 STD 7.54 4-1/16
6-1/2-4 4.75 4.00 10,000 STD 7.54 4-1/16
8-3/8-4 5.25 4.00 5,000 H7S 9.55 4-1/16
8-3/8-4 5.25 4.00 10,000 H7S 9.55 4-1/16
9-1/2-4 6.25 4.00 15,000 H7S 10.94 4-1/16
8-1/4-4 6.18 5.00 5,000 STD 9.54 5-1/8
8-1/4-4 6.18 5.00 10,000 STD 9.54 5-1/8
9-4 6.75 5.00 5,000 H7S 10.40 5-1/8
9-4 6.75 5.00 10,000 H7S 10.40 5-1/8
12-1/4-4 7.00 5.12 15,000 H7S 14.54 7-1/16
8-3/4-4 7.50 6.38 5,000 STD 9.79 7-1/16
9-1/2-4 8.00 6.38 5,000 H7S 10.54 7-1/16
Figure 4.16 - 1
11-1/2-4 8.25 6.38 10,000 H7S 13.04 7-1/16
12-4 10.31 9.00 5,000 H7S 13.54 9

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.17: Bowen Quick Union Connections
SL 4.17: Bowen Quick Union Connections

Standard Bowen QUN Connections
QUN Work
Seal Dia. ID Service
Conn. Press
4-1/16-4 3.00 2.00 7,500 H7S

4-1/16-4 3.00 2.00 10,000 STD
4-1/2-4 3.00 2.00 10,000 H7S
4-1/2-4 3.00 2.00 15,000 STD
4-3/4-4 3.75 2.50 5,000 STD
4-3/4-4 3.75 2.50 5,000 H7S
4-3/4-4 3.75 3.00 5,000 H7S
4-3/4-4 3.75 3.00 5,000 H7S
4-3/4-4 3.75 2.50 10,000 STD
5-1/2-4 4.38 3.00 5,000 STD
5-1/2-4 4.38 3.00 5,000 H7S
5-1/2-4 4.38 3.00 10,000 STD
6-4 4.88 3.50 5,000 STD
6-4 4.88 3.50 5,000 H7S
6-5/16-4 4.38 2.50 10,000 H7S
6-5/16-4 4.38 2.50 15,000 STD
6-5/16-4 3.63 2.00 15,000 H7S
6-5/16-4 3.75 2.50 15,000 H7S
6-5/16-4 4.00 2.00 20,000 STD
7-5 5.25 4.00 5,000 STD
Figure 4.17 - 1
7-5 5.25 4.00 5,000 H7S
7-5 4.75 3.00 10,000 H7S Figure 4.17 - 1
7-5 4.38 3.00 15,000 H7S

7-5 4.50 2.50 20,000 STD
7-25/32-4 4.88 3.50 15,000 H7S
8-1/4-4 6.00 4.00 10,000 STD
8-1/4-4 6.00 4.00 10,000 H7S
8-7/8-4 6.50 5.00 10,000 STD
8-7/8-4 6.50 4.75 10,000 H7S
8-7/8-4 6.00 4.00 15,000 STD
8-7/8-4 5.50 4.00 15,000 H7S
10-5/16-4 8.00 6.00 10,000 STD
10-5/16-4 7.50 6.00 10,000 H7S
13-4 9.50 7.00 10,000 STD
13-4 9.50 7.00 10,000 H7 S

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.18: Other Quick Union Connections
SL 4.18: Other Quick Union Connections
Figure 4.18 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.19: Stuffing Boxes List
SL 4.19: Stuffing Boxes List
Stuffing Boxes
Scope
Stuffing boxes are considered critical pressure-containing components of the
lubricator stack, so it is very important that they be maintained and tested to
ensure proper operation.
General Information
A wireline stuffing box is designed to control well pressure up to working pres-
sure of the equipment while still allowing the wireline to pass through the pack-
ing.
Stuffing boxes are available in sizes and ratings equivalent to the lubricator equip-
ment.
All stuffing boxes must be color coded to reflect their pressure rating and service
per ESC-62 and ESC-63. Also, each stuffing box must have a metal tag with the
property number attached to it. All the scheduled testing and inspection will be
documented against this number per SO1103.
The sealing pressure exerted on the wireline by the stuffing box packing is
adjusted using the packing nut. Manual packing nuts are available, but hydraulic
packing nuts are recommended. Hydraulic packing nuts allow remote adjust-
ment, thus eliminating the necessity for climbing equipment. Climbing and fall
safety is discussed in Section WL1.23.
CAUTION Cat lines should never be used to lift personnel.
Stuffing box packing is sized for only one diameter of wireline. Packing kits are
available for rapid conversion to another size wire (see Technical Section XX.XX).
A 16-in. stuffing box sheave should be used with .108-in. and .125-in. wire. Use of
the 10-in. sheave with the larger wire size will greatly reduce the anticipated life
of the wireline. Converting a stuffing box to the larger size sheave will require the
replacement of both the sheave and the sheave staff.
Operation
When threading the wire through the stuffing box it is important to check the con-
dition of the upper packing gland, the condition of the packing, and the condition
of the BOP rubber which is in the bottom of the stuffing box. Periodically the bear-
ings in the yoke housing and the bearings on the shaft should be lubricated and
checked for wear. If a hydraulic packing nut is being used it should be serviced
periodically. The o-ring on the quick union should be inspected each time the
stuffing box is installed, and should be replaced if necessary.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.19: Stuffing Boxes List
Appendix
Stuffing Box Drawing
Figure 4.19 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.20: Hydraulic Packing Nuts
SL 4.20: Hydraulic Packing Nuts
Figure 4.20 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.21: Stuffing Box Packing Stacks
SL 4.21: Stuffing Box Packing Stacks
Stuffing Box Packing

Scope
Proper elastomer selection for a particular environment is essential for a success-
ful job. Stuffing box packing is particularly critical for pressure control, as well as
environmental protection.
General Information
Attached is a list of all of the stuffing box packing and packing kits for which Otis
has part numbers. Also attached is a list of general advantages and disadvantages
for nitrile and polyurethane as well as more exotic materials. In general, nitrile is
used for both standard and H2S environments and pressures up to 10,000 psi.
However, extended use in H2S and/or bromides causes the packing to become
brittle. The polyurethane packing is generally used for extreme pressure condi-
tions. The exotic materials are not set up with a part number but are very general
since choice of packing must be dictated by experience and well conditions.
Due to the many different well environments encountered, recommendations

must be on a well-by-well basis. For additional information, refer to Engineering
Bulletin 336.
Attached is a diagram showing some possible arrangements of the packing stacks

used in various well environments. Other arrangements may be dictated by well
conditions.
Liquid chambers (chemical injection subs) are usually recommended for wireline
work in wells with sour, corrosive, or sandy conditions. The use of liquid cham-
bers immediately below the stuffing box has virtually eliminated packing prob-
lems. The recommended liquid is a 50-50 mixture of glycol and STP. This will also
lubricate the wire coming out of the hole, thereby increasing the life of the pack-
ing. Care must be taken during rig-up and rig-down to prevent chemical spills.

Stuffing Box Packing
Wire
Part Number Description
Size
91M1624 .092 5M Solid Nitrile 75 Durometer
91M2086 * .092 5M Solid Nitrile 75 Durometer
91M2112 * ALL 10M Nitrile Red Fabric
91M2467 * ALL 10M Nitrile Gold Fabric
91M2577 .086 Rubber
91M2708 ALL 15M Nitrile 12 Layer Black Fabric
91M2709 ALL 10M Yellow Polyurethane 75 Durometer
91M2743 .092 20M Red Polyurethane 90 Durometer
91M2744 .092 20M Black Polyurethane 75 Durometer
91M2906 * ALL 15M Nitrile 12 Layer White Fabric
91M3077-3 ** .092 20M Blk Polyu w/.110 ID 75 Durometer
91M3077-4 ** .108 20M Red Polyu w/.125 ID 90 Durometer
91T6 .082 10M Nitrile Red Fabric (91M2112)
91T97 .092 Bowen Nitrile One Layer Black Fabric
91T120 * .082 20M Red Polyurethane 90 Durometer
91T136 * .082 20M Blk Polyurethane 75 Durometer
791M2112 ALL Certified 10M Nitrile Red Fabric
* Packing most commonly used.
** For use with grease seal such as 46G0111.
Stuffing Box Packing Kits
46DHK1-1 .072 10M 3-91M2906 15M Nitrile 12 Layer White Fabric

4-91M2467 10M Nitrile Gold Fabric




46DHK2-1 .072 20M 3-91T136 20M Blk Polyu 75 Durometer

4-92T120 20M Red Polyu 90 Durometer

Stuffing Box Packing Kits




46DHK3-1 .072 5M 7-91M2467 10M Nitrile Gold Fabric
46DHK4-3* .092 20M 3-91M3077-3 Oversized ID (.110) Blk Polyu 75 Duro 10M
4-91M2112 Nitrile Red Fabric
46DHK4-4* .108 20M 3-91M3077-4 Oversized ID (.125) Blk Polyu 75 Duro 10M
4-91M2112 Nitrile Red Fabric
* For use with grease seal such as 46GO111.
WIreline Stuffing Box Packing Comparison of Various Materials
Advantages Disadvantages
Nitrile
Cheap Becomes brittle in H2S
Readily available Pressure rating is limited
Good up to 200oF for extended use It swells in the presence of toluene or xylene
Good for low temperatures It swells in the presence of Zn and Ca bromide
Good with diesel
Good with inhibitors
Polyurethane
Cheap Brittle in cold weather
Good up to 20M Degraded by amines and methanol
Good for H2S Degraded by diesel
Readily available Degraded by temperatures above 150oF
Fluorel/Viton
Various durometers available Expensive
Good for high or low pressures Degrades in amines and methanol
Good for high temperatures Not a standard part (special order)
Good for H2S Brittle in low temperatures

WIreline Stuffing Box Packing Comparison of Various Materials
Advantages Disadvantages
Kalrez/Aflas
Various durometers available Very expensive
Good for high or low pressures Very brittle in low temperatures
Good for high temperatures Not a standard part (special order)
Good with amines and methanol
Good with diesel
Expanded Teflon
Good for low pressure Very expensive
Good for low temperatures Not recommended for high pressures
Good with amines and methanol Not recommended for high temperatures
Good with diesel Not a standard part (special order)
Good for H2S and CO2
Well Category Well Environment Packing Recommended
1 Up to 10,000 psi Use seven pieces C or D

Standard H2S service
Very low temperatures
Temperatures up to 200o
2 10,000 to 15,000 psi Use four pieces C or D and three

Standard service pieces A or B
Any temperature
3 10,000 to 15,000 psi Use four pieces D and three

Sour service pieces A or B
Any temperature
4 Above 15,000 psi Use three pieces D and four

Standard or sour service pieces A or B
Any temperature
Suggested Packing
A- 91T120 Polyurethane (Red)
B- 91T136 Polyurethane (Black)
C- 91M2112 Nitrile w/red fabric
D-92M2467 Nitrile w/gold fabric

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.22: Braided Line/E-line Grease Head
SL 4.22: Braided Line/E-line Grease Head
Figure 4.22 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.23: Liquid Chamber (Chemical Injection Sub) List
SL 4.23: Liquid Chamber (Chemical Injection Sub) List
Figure 4.23 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.24: Lubricator Purge Tool (Valve) List
SL 4.24: Lubricator Purge Tool (Valve) List
Lubricator Purge Valve

Scope
Lubricator purge valves are considered critical pressure-containing components.
General Information
Prior to performing an onsite hydrostatic test of the lubricator stack, the lubricator
must be filled with water. A purge valve can be placed near the top of the lubrica-
tor stack to allow the air to be purged while the lubricator is being filled. This is
especially helpful when using an extremely long rig-up. The purge valve is placed
immediately below the stuffing box and chemical injection sub. The valve consists
of an exhaust port and a plunger which is moved off-seat by pulling the rope
socket up against it. Relaxing the tension on the wireline allows the plunger to
again form a seal. The pressure test can then be continued as usual. Obviously,
this cannot be used simultaneously with a tool catcher.
Appendix
Figure 4.24 - 1: Purge valve drawing.
Figure 4.24 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.25: Tool Catcher and Tool Trap
SL 4.25: Tool Catcher and Tool Trap
Tool Catcher and Tool Trap

Scope
Both tool catchers and tool traps are considered critical pressure-containing com-
ponents.
General Information
Tool Catcher
The tool catcher is placed immediately below the stuffing box and chemical injec-
tion sub. It is designed to latch the fishing neck of the rope socket to prevent the
tool string from falling back downhole in the event that the wire pulled out of the
rope socket. The catcher is composed of a collet-type catcher and a hydraulically
operated piston used to retract the collet fingers and release the tool string. Tool
catchers are used most often with electric line tool strings containing expensive
and extremely fragile logging tools.
Tool Trap
The tool trap is placed immediately above the wireline valve. It is manually or
hydraulically operated flapper with a slot that is slightly larger than the wireline.
It is opened just before the tool string is lowered into the well and just before the
string is pulled back into the lubricator. The flapper is intended to prevent any
part of the tool string, or anything fished from the hole, from falling back out of
the lubricator.
Figure 4.25 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.26: Lubricator Section
SL 4.26: Lubricator Section
Description
The lubricator sections are tubing risers which allow the running and removal of
wireline service tools from the well without having to kill the well. The standard
stack and optional equipment lubricator sections shown in the Standard Stack
and Options section are 8 ft (2.44 m) long. Other lengths are available upon
request. All lower lubricator sections have two needle valves for pressure bleed-
off.
The lubricator sections of braided/E-line are identical to those used in slickline.

While the middle and upper lubricator sections normally have smaller IDs than
with the lower sections for slickline and braided-line operations, for E-line opera-
tions all lubricator sections normally have the same ID throughout the stack
because of the increased logging tool size. In some cases, lubricator crossover sec-
tions may be needed. These crossovers are not listed in catalog but are available
upon request.
Lubricator Section Chart
Part Tube Up End Working Quick Union Quick Union Length Needle
Number ID ID Pressure Service Box End Pin and Collar Valve
See
Note psi MPa in. mm
46LA11101 2 2 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC11201 2 2 5,000 34.474 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC12101 2 2 10000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
3 3
46LC12201 2 2 10,000 68.948 H 2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 5 /4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC13101 2 2 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC13201 2 2 15,000 103.421 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
3 1
46LC13202 2 2 15,000 103.421 H 2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 6 /4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC13203 2 2 15,000 103.421 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC14201 2 2 20,000 137.895 H 2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LA21101 2.42 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LA21102 2.42 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 NONE
46LA21103 2.42 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LA21150 2.42 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC21201 2.5 2.5 5,000 34.474 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC21202 2.5 2.5 5,000 34.474 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 96 243.84 NONE
3
46LC21203 2.5 2.5 5,000 34.474 H 2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC21204 2.5 2.5 5,000 34.474 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC21251 2.5 2.5 5,000 34.474 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LC22101 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC22102 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC22103 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC22151 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC22201 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC22202 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 96 243.84 NONE
3
46LC22203 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 H 2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC22251 2.5 2.5 10,000 68.948 H 2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LC23101 2.56 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
9
46LC23150 2.56 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 /16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46LC23201 2.56 2.56 15,000 103.421 H 2S 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC23202 2.56 2.56 15,000 103.421 H 2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
1 1
46LC23203 2.56 2.56 15,000 103.421 H 2S 7 /2-4 (5.50) 9 /2-4 (6.25) 96 243.84 NONE
(Continued)

Lubricator Chart (Continued)

Part Tube Up End Working Quick Union Quick Union Length Needle
Number ID ID Pressure Service Box End Pin and Collar Valve
See
Note psi MPa in. mm
1 1 9
46LC23250 2.56 2.56 15,000 103.421 H2S 6 /4-4 (4.00) 6 /4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 /16 HP AUTOCLAVE
1 1
46LC24201 2.56 2.56 20,000 137.895 H2S 6 /4-4 (4.00) 6 /4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC24250 2.56 2.56 20,000 137.895 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 9
/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46LA31101 2.93 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LA31102 3 3 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 8 3/4-4(7.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LA31103 2.93 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 48 121.92 NONE
1
46LA31150 2.93 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
3 3
46LC31201 3 3 5,000 34.474 H2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 5 /4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
3
46LC31251 3 3 5,000 34.474 H2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LC32101 2.93 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC32151 2.93 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 5-4 (3.50) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC32201 3 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 NONE
3
46LC32202 3 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC32203 3 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 144 365.76 NONE
3 3 1
46LC32251 3 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 5 /4-4 (4.00) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC33201 3 3 15,000 103.421 H2S 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC33202 3 3 15,000 103.421 H2S 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 12 1/4-4 (7.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC33250 3 3 15,000 103.421 H2S 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 96 243.84 9
/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46LA41101 3.94 3.94 5,000 34.474 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LA41150 3.94 3.94 5,000 34.474 STD 6 /2-4 (4.75) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LA41180 3.94 3 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 NONE
3 3
46LC41201 4 4 5,000 34.474 H2S 8 /8-4 (5.25) 8 /8-4 (5.25) 96 243.84 NONE
3
46LC41251 4 4 5,000 34.474 H2S 8 /8-4 (5.25) 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LC42101 4 4 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC42151 4 4 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
3 3
46LC42201 4 4 10,000 68.948 H2S 8 /8-4 (5.25) 8 /8-4 (5.25) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC42251 4 4 10,000 68.948 H2S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
1 1
46LC43201 4 4 15,000 103.421 H2S 9 /2-4 (6.25) 9 /2-4 (6.25) 96 243.84 NONE
1 9
46LC43250 4 4 15,000 103.421 H2S 9 1/2-4 (6.25) 9 /2-4 (6.25) 96 243.84 /16 HP AUTOCLAVE
1 1
46LC51101 5 5 5,000 34.474 STD 8 /4-4 (6.18) 8 /4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC51150 5 5 5,000 34.474 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LC51151 5 5 5,000 34.474 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 48 121.92 1
/2 NPT
46LC51201 5 5 5,000 34.474 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC51251 5 5 5,000 34.474 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
1 1
46LC52101 5 5 10,000 68.948 STD 8 /4-4 (6.18) 8 /4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 NONE
1 1 1
46LC52151 5 5 10,000 68.948 STD 8 /4-4 (6.18) 8 /4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC52201 5 5 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC52251 5 5 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
3
46LC52280 5 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 /4-4 (4.00) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC52282 5 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
1 1
46LC53201 5.12 5.12 15,000 103.421 H2S 12 /4-4(7.00) 12 /4-4 (7.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC53250 5.12 5.12 15,000 103.421 H2S 12 1/4-4(7.00) 12 1/4-4 (7.00) 96 243.84 9
/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
3 3
46LC61101 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 STD 8 /4-4(7.50) 8 /4-4(7.50) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC61150 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 STD 8 3/4-4(7.50) 8 3/4-4(7.50) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
46LC61201 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC61251 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 96 243.84 1
/2 NPT
(Continued)

Lubricator Chart (Continued)

Part Tube Up End Working Service Quick Union Quick Union Length Needle
Number ID ID Pressure Box End Pin and Collar Valve
See
Note psi MPa in. mm
1 1
46LC62201 6.37 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 /2-4 (8.25) 11 /2-4 (8.25) 96 243.84 NONE
1 1
46LC62202 6.37 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 /2-4 (8.25) 11 /2-4 (8.25) 48 121.92 NONE
1 1 1
46LC62251 6.37 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 /2-4 (8.25) 11 /2-4 (8.25) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC43250 4 4 15,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (6.25) 9 1/2-4 (6.25) 96 243.84 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46LC51101 5 5 5,000 34.474 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC51150 5 5 5,000 34.474 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
1
46LC51151 5 5 5,000 34.474 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 48 121.92 /2 NPT
46LC51201 5 5 5,000 34.474 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC51251 5 5 5,000 34.474 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC52101 5 5 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC52151 5 5 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC52201 5 5 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC52251 5 5 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
1
46LC52280 5 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
1
46LC52282 5 3 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 9-4 (6.75) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC53201 5.12 5.12 15,000 103.421 H2S 12 1/4-4(7.00) 12 1/4-4(7.00) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC53250 5.12 5.12 15,000 103.421 H2S 12 1/4-4(7.00) 12 1/4-4(7.00) 96 243.84 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46LC61101 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 STD 8 3/4-4(7.50) 8 3/4-4(7.50) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC61150 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 STD 8 3/4-4(7.50) 8 3/4-4(7.50) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC61201 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 96 243.84 NONE
1
46LC61251 6.37 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 96 243.84 /2 NPT
46LC62201 6.37 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 96 243.84 NONE
46LC62202 6.37 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 48 121.92 NONE
1
46LC62251 6.37 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 96 243.84 /2 NPT

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.27: Lubricator Safety Valve
SL 4.27: Lubricator Safety Valve
Figure 4.27 - 1
Figure 4.27 - 2

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.27: Lubricator Safety Valve
Figure 4.27 - 3
Figure 4.27 - 4

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.28: Pump In/Flow Tee List
SL 4.28: Pump In/Flow Tee List

Part Number ID Working Service Quick Unions Side Port Weco
Pressure
psi MPa
46LE22201 2.50 10,000 68.948 H2 S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 1502
46LE23101 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) 1502
46LE23201 2.56 15,000 103.421 H2 S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 2202
46LE32101 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 1502
46LE32201 3.00 10,000 103.421 H2 S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 1502
46LE33201 3.00 15,000 103.421 H2 S 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 2202
46LE42101 4.00 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 1502
46LE42201 4.00 10,000 68.948 H2 S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 1502
46LE43201 4.00 15,000 103.421 H2 S 9 1/2-4 (6.25) 2202
46LE52101 5.00 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 1502
46LE52201 5.00 10,000 68.948 H2 S 9-4 (6.75) 1502
46LE53201 5.12 15,000 103.421 H2 S 12 1/4-4 (7.00) 2202
46LE61101 6.37 5,000 34.474 STD 8 3/4-4 (7.50) 1502
46LE61201 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2 S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 1502
46LE62201 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2 S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 1502

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.29: Wireline Valve List
SL 4.29: Wireline Valve List
Description
The wireline valve is normally placed on top of the wellhead (tree) connector and
is designed to allow work to be performed on the other surface equipment above
the valve while the wireline is in the well. The wireline valve uses rams to close on
the wireline and seal off pressure below the well without damaging the wire.
Wireline valves with a single set of rams are normally used for slickline and in
low pressure [below 3,000 psi (207 bar)] braided line or E-line operations. When
pressures rise above the level at which a single set of rams can effect a seal on
braided or E-line, a dual wireline valve is used. In braided and E-line operations,
grease can be injected between the ram bores to help effect a seal. Dual/triple
valves may also be used when working with different wire sizes on the same
wireline unit. Logging operators often use triple or quad valves for additional
safety on high-pressure wells.
Note Hydraulic wireline valves are recommend for STD service above 5,000 psi
(345 bar) and for all H2S service wells.

Wireline Valve Chart

Part Number ID Working Pressure Service Quick Unions Type Ports
psi MPa
46BA21101-* 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) MAN/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BA21102-* 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BA21150-* 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) MAN/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BA21151-* 2.42 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE22102-* 2.50 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE22152-* 2.50 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE22153-* 2.50 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/TRIPLE 1/2 NPT
46BE22202-* 2.50 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE22252-* 2.50 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE22253-* 2.50 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) HYD/TRIPLE 1/2 NPT
46BE23101-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/SNGL 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23150-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/DUAL 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23151-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/TRIPLE 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23152-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/QUAD 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23201-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) HYD/SNGL 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23250-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) HYD/DUAL 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23251-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) HYD/TRIPLE 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BE23252-* 2.56 15,000 103.421 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) HYD/QUAD 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46BA31101-* 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) MAN/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BA31102-* 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BA31150-* 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) MAN/DUAL 1/2 NPT
(Continued)

Wireline Valve Chart (Continued)

psi MPa
46BA31151-* 2.93 5,000 34.474 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE32103-* 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE32104-* 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) MAN/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE32152-* 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE32153-* 2.93 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) HYD/TRIPLE 1/2 NPT
46BE32203-* 3.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE32204-* 3.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) MAN/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE32252-* 3.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BA41101-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) MAN/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BA41102-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BA41150-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) MAN/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BA41151-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE41202-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 H2S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE41251-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 H2S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE41282-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 H2S 6 1/2-4 (4.75) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE41283-* 4.00 5,000 34.474 H2S 6 1/2-4 (4.75) MAN/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE42102-* 4.00 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE42152-* 4.00 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE42153-* 4.00 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) HYD/TRIPLE 1/2 NPT
46BE42202-* 4.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE42252-* 4.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE51202-* 5.00 5,000 34.474 H2S 9-4 (6.75) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE51252-* 5.00 5,000 34.474 H2S 9-4 (6.75) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE52102-* 5.00 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE52152-* 5.00 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE52153-* 5.00 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) HYD/TRIPLE 1/2 NPT
(Continued)

Wireline Valve Chart (Continued)

psi MPa
46BE52203-* 5.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE52252-* 5.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE52253-* 5.00 10,000 68.948 H2S 9-4 (6.75) HYD/TRIPLE 1/2 NPT
46BE61202-* 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE61251-* 6.37 5,000 34.474 H2S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT
46BE62202-* 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) HYD/SNGL 1/2 NPT
46BE62252-* 6.37 10,000 68.948 H2S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) HYD/DUAL 1/2 NPT

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.30: Tree Connection List
SL 4.30: Tree Connection List
Wellhead Adapters
Wellhead Adapters
When rigging-up pressure control equipment to a wellhead, there are generally
two methods used. The preferred method is a flanged adapter connected to the
uppermost flange on the wellhead. In low pressure work, a threaded adapter may
be screwed into the top threaded connection on the wellhead.
Flanged Adapters
This is the preferred and safest method of connecting to a wellhead. This connec-
tion must carry the weight of the entire lubricator string, which, if subjected to
side loading, can impose a considerable bending stress on the wellhead adapter.
Flanged adapters are used for through tubing work, 2 1/2-in. ID up to 13 5/8-in.
for adapting to rig BOP stacks.
Information needed to identify the particular flanged adapter required, would be:
•Nominal size, pressure rating and ring number.
Note Instead of a pressure rating, the obsolete series number might still be used.
•The top connection, which may be a quick union box or a threaded connec-
tion for large diameter risers.
In general, API type 6B flanges are for 2,000 psi through 5,000 psi working pres-
sure and type 6BX flanges are for 5,000 psi through 20,000 psi working pressure.
6B flanges require R or RX ring joint gaskets and 6BX flanges require BX ring joint
gaskets.
Flange identification charts

Example:
3 1/6-in. 10,000 psi, 6BX with a 4 3/4-in. -4 Union Box
3 1/16-in. is the nominal ID or bore in this flange, however the 4 3/4-4 union
box limits the ID to a maximum of 2 1/2-in. 10,000 psi is the working pres-
sure. This flange will require a BX-154 ring gasket.
Threaded Adapters
Threaded adapters can be used for lower working pressure requirements and rely
on torque to seal rather than a replaceable gasket or seal rings.

Size Grade API Thread Torque
2-3/8 J-55 8RD 1,200 ft/lbs
2-3/8 N-80 8RD 1,500 ft/lbs
2-7/8 J-55 8RD 1,500 ft/lbs
2-7/8 N-80 8RD 1,800 ft/lbs
The use of threaded adapters is limited to 5,000 psi maximum working pressure.
Line pipe, 2 1/2-in. and larger, is limited 3,000 psi maximum working pressure.
Use a suitable thread compound with threaded adapters.
Adapting to Rig BOP Stack

While the configuration of rig BOP stacks varies considerably, the uppermost ele-
ment to which pressure-control equipment must be connected is usually an annu-
lar type (Hydril) BOP. The annular BOP’s rubber packing element is energized
hydraulically by the wedge-shaped piston squeezing the packing element inward
till it closes and seals around pipe or cable.
•Flanging up to the top of the Hydril is the safest way to rig up. Flanges with
a threaded connection are available in all sizes. Hydrolex adapter flanges
with Slimline riser connections have Acme threads with o-ring seals.
•Hydril Adapters have replaced the old “shooting nipple.” These adapters are
a section of riser, usually six feet long, with a flange at the lower end. The
Hydril Adapter is set in the Hydril so that the flange is below the sealing
element and the Hydril is closed around it. Care should be take to not
deform the riser.
•The Hydril flange adapter is, by far, the fastest way to rig up for a logging
job. A flange sized to the Hydril has a large ID union box connection up, and
a union half on the lower end of the Bell Nipple is connected to it during
drilling. When ready to log, the union connection is broken out and a section
of riser with the same union connection is made up.
Crossovers and Union Adapters

1. Crossovers are required in special situations and come in three basic configu-
rations:
•Quick union box by box
•Quick union pun and collar by pin and collar
•Quick union box by pin and collar
2. Union adapters are used when it is necessary to combine two assemblies of
pressure-control equipment that have diffferent union sizes.

Figure 4.30 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.31: Blanking/Tree Caps List
SL 4.31: Blanking/Tree Caps List

Part Number Working Service Quick Union Port Type
psi Mpa
46AS88 10,000 68.948 STD 5-4 (3.50) 1/2 NPT
46AS608 15,000 103.421 STD 5-4 (3.50) 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46AH382 10,000 68.948 H2S 5 3/4-4 (4.00) 1/2 NPT
46AH597 15,000 103.421 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46AO595 20,000 137.895 H2S 6 1/4-4 (4.00) 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46AS211 10,000 68.948 STD 6 1/2-4 (4.75) 1/2 NPT
46AO588 15,000 103.421 H2S 7 1/2-4 (5.50) 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46AS598 10,000 68.948 STD 8 1/4-4 (6.18) 1/2 NPT
46AH599 10,000 68.948 H2S 8 3/8-4 (5.25) 1/2 NPT
46AS411 5,000 34.474 STD 8 3/4-4 (7.50) 1/2 NPT
46AH602 10,000 68.948 H 2 S 9-4 (6.75) 1/2 NPT
46AH601 15,000 103.421 H2S 9 1/2-4 (6.25) 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46AH604 5,000 34.474 H2 S 9 1/2-4 (8.00) 1/2 NPT
46AH603 15,000 103.421 H2 S 12 1/4-4(7.00) 9/16 HP AUTOCLAVE
46AH179 10,000 68.948 H2 S 11 1/2-4 (8.25) 1/2 NPT

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.32: O-Ring Service Selection Chart
SL 4.32: O-Ring Service Selection Chart

The information below is Halliburton Energy Services’ "best practices" for the
design, manufacture, and periodic test and inspection of Wellhead Pressure Con-
trol Equipment (WPCE). These guidelines should be used to ensure that all
WPCE will perform safely and as intended. This document replaces the Otis
Standard of Operations (SO) 1 103 and Engineering Bulletin 441.
For reference:
CPS 010
Definitions
WPCE - Stuffing boxes, lubricators, liquid chambers, wireline valves, swages, tool
traps, tree connections, grease injection heads, crossovers, and like equipment
used to control well pressure during wireline operations (Slickline, braided line,
or E-line).
H2S Service - Sour gas - Wells are considered sour if the H2S partial pressure is .05
psi or above. The parts per million of H2S must be used in a calculation that
involves the maximum down-hole pressure to calculate the "gas partial pressure."
Multiply either the mol percent or volume percent H2S in the gas by the maxi-
mum pressure; for example: a well producing a gas containing 10 ppm H2S at
5,000 psi would result in an H2S partial pressure of 10/1,000,000 x 5,000 psi, or
0.05 psi. A well producing 0.001 mol % H2S in 5,000 psi gas would also represent
0.05 psi H2S partial pressure, because 0.001 x 0.01 x 5,000 psi = 0.05 psi. The sig-
nificance of 0.05 psi partial pressure H2S is that it is the cutoff for either sweet or
sour service. Wells producing 0.05 psi H2S partial pressure are, by law in Texas
and per NACE, sour; H2S partial pressures less than 0.05 psia are sweet.
Standard (STD) Service - "sweet" wells, standard wells, those not considered H2S
or Cold service.
CO2 Service - CO2containing well. No special WPCE is built for this service. STD
service WPCE is used for CO2 Service.
Cold Service - Temperatures below - 20°F (-28.9°C). Any WPCE used below -20°F
must be rated for Cold Service. New equipment should be ordered with a -75°F (-
59.49C) temperature rating, though existing cold weather equipment may be
rated for a higher temperature. See Technology Bulletin CPE 96004 for further
details.
High Temperature Service- above 250°F (121.1°C). ES-I-* and ES-T-* Specifica-
tions - these are Halliburton D/FW Center specifications. Equivalent Halliburton
alliance partner specifications or IMS specifications from other Halliburton cen-
ters are also acceptable.

General Requirements and Design Standards

• All Wellhead Pressure Control Equipment (WPCE) and devices used for lift-
ing WPCE (such as lift caps, lubricator clamps, slings, etc.) must be built,
repaired, and tested by approved Halliburton suppliers or facilities.
• Halliburton drawings and specifications furnished to non-Halliburton facili-
ties must be handled according to company policy which includes a Manufac-
turing and Confidentiality Agreement.
• WPCE must be designed, manufactured, and hydrostatically tested in compli-
ance with accepted engineering and industry standards. Although API 6A
does not specifically cover WPCE, API 6A should be used as a guide. All
WPCE used in H2S service must comply with NACE Standard MR-01-75.
industry standard materials and calculations (to determine pressure ratings,
acceptable loading, and safety factors) must be used.
• Components must be built to engineering drawings and specifications.
• All pressure containing or load bearing components must be traceable.
• Field welding on WPCE should not be performed for any purpose unless
authorized by Halliburton D/FW Center Technology - Production Services
and Equipment Engineering.
• Repairs of all WPCE is limited to existing engineering drawings or written
instructions from the manufacturer.
• Maintenance, Testing, and Inspection
• WPCE must receive regular maintenance and periodic testing and inspection
to insure that the equipment functions correctly and remains safe to use.
• Inspection and test records must be maintained for all WPCE.
Equipment Selection/Safety
• On all wireline jobs, the WPCE selected for use must be designed and built for
the intended pressure and service.
• An assembled unit cannot be rated or used at a pressure higher than the rated
working pressure of the lowest pressure rated item in the assembly.
Elastomer
1. STD or CO2 Service - Nitrile (Buna-N)
2. H2S Service - Fluorocarbon (Viton or Fluorel)
For Fluorocarbon o-rings purchased from D/FW Center, 91QV@---M series
should be used for quick unions or other equipment that may be experienc-
ing difficulty sealing pressure. The 91QV@---H series o-rings are too hard to
effect a seal in many cases (see Engineering Bulletin 355 for details).
3. Cold Service - Low Temperature Nitrile (see Technology Bulletin CPE 96 004
for further details).

4. Temperature Service
Note Ratings below are for elastomers meeting requirements of Halliburton

D/FW Center ES-R-* specifications. Ratings of elastomers from other Halliburton
Centers or suppliers may differ.
• Fluorel - up to 400°F (204.4°C)

• Viton - up to 325°F (162.8°C)
• EPDM - up to 575°F (301.7°C) - applies only to modified Y-267. EPDM is
intended for geothermal wells and cannot be used when elastomers come
in direct contact with hydrocarbons.
• Aflas - between 100°F (37.8°C) and 400°F (204.4°C). Aflas cannot consis-
tently seal pressure at temperatures below 100°F and is therefore seldom
used for WPCE since surface temperatures are almost always below 100°F
at some point during a wireline operation.
• Metals - primary material is 4130/4140 for WPCE, with stainless steels or
high alloys such as Incoloy 925 used for some smaller components to
extend life. Yield strengths and hardness listed below are for 4130/4140
components; consult manufacturer for values for other materials.
Note No cold worked steels are to be used to manufacture WPCE.
5. STD or CO2 Service - 80,000 to 110,000 psi minimum yield; screw type swages
(tree connections) must be no less than P-105 grade (105,000 psi minimum
yield material). Rockwell hardness must be 36HRC (Brinell 341) or less.
Note CO2 produces a weight loss corrosion that should be monitored. WPCE
built of 4130/4140 material will have an equal amount of weight loss corrosion
whether the material is heat treated for STD or for H2S Service. WPCE used peri-
odically in CO2 can typically be used for years without excessive corrosion prob-
lems. For extended use on CO2 wells, more frequent inspections of the WPCE
should be made until the rate of corrosion is known. If little corrosion is found,
the frequency of inspection can be reduced to that listed in this manual.

February 4, 2000
Halliburton Energy Services
(1)
General Guidelines For Seals

Compound PEEK(2), (4) Ryton(2), (4) Fluorel (3) Aflas (3) Chemraz(3) Viton(3) Neoprene(3) Nitrile(3) Kalrez (3) Teflon (3)
Filled Unfilled Unfilled Filled Unfilled Filled Filled Filled Filled Unfilled
Service °F 350 350 450 350 325 300 275 450 400 325
(°C) (177) (177) (232) (177) (163) (149) (135) (232) (204) (163)
(2), (4) Above Below

Pressure psi 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000 5000 5000 3000 15,000 15,000 5000
(MPa) (103) (68.9) (103) (34.4) (34.4) (34.4) (20.7) (103) (103) (34.4)
Environments
H2 S A A A A A B B NR NR A A A
CO2 A A B B A B B C A A A A
CH4 (Methane) A A A A A A A B B A A A
Hydrocarbons
(Sweet Crude) A A A A A A A B C A A A A
Xylene A A A C A A A NR NR A A A
Alcohols A A C B A C C B A A A A
Zinc Bromide A A A A A A A NR NR A A A
Inhibitors A A NR A A NR NR NR B A A A
Salt Water A A A A A A A C A B A A
Steam A A NR A A NR NR NR NR NR B B
Diesel A A A NR A A A B B A A A
A-Satisfactory B - Little or no effect C - Swells D - Attacks NR - Not recommended NT - Not tested
NOTE: (1) This information provides general guidelines for the selection of seal materials and is provided for informational purposes only. Seal Specialists with Halliburton Energy Services should be consulted for the actual
selection of seals for use in specific applications. Halliburton Energy Services will not be liable for any damage resulting from the use of this information without consultation with Halliburton Seal Specialists.
(2) Contact Technical Services at Halliburton Energy Services - Dallas for service temperature and pressure.
(3) Back-Up Rings must be used.
(4) There could be a slight variation in both temperature and pressure rating depending on specific equipment and seal designs.
Figure 4.32 - 1

4-75
Halliburton Energy Services
(1)
February 4, 2000
General Guidelines For Seals
Compound(2) Nitrile Fluoro-Carbon Fluoro-Carbon Aflas(5) Urethane Neoprene Chemraz(4) Fluoro-Silicone EPDM Kalrez(4)
Series Q QV QVM QVA QE QS QCH QY QEP QP

Service (6) °F -10 to 275 -10 to 325 -10 to 400 100 to 400 -70 to 200 -20 to 250 40 to 400 -50 to 175 -30 to 300 100 to 400
(°C) (-21 to 135) (-21 to 162) (-21 to 204) (38 to 204) (-57 to 93) (-29 to 121) (4.4 to 204) (-46 to 79) (-34 to 149) (38 to 204)
Pressure(3) psi 10,000 9000 9000 8000 2000 2000 6000 6000 3000 6000
(MPa) (69) (62.1) (62.1) (55.2) (13.8) (13.8) (41.4) (41.4) (20.7) (41.4)
Environments
H2 S NR A A A B NR A C NR A
CO2 A B B B B C A C NR B
CH4 (Methane) B A A A B B A C NR B
Hydrocarbons
(Sweet Crude) A A A A A B C A A NR A
Xylene NR A A C NR NR A A NR A
Alcohols A C C B D B A A B A
Zinc Bromide NR A A A NT NR A NT NT A
Inhibitors B(7) NR NR A NT C A NT NT B
Salt Water A A A A A C A A A A
Steam NR NR NT B NR NR B NR A B
Diesel B A A C B B A A NR A
Hydrochloric
Acid (HCI) NR A A A NT NR A NR NR A
A-Satisfactory B - Little or no effect C - Swells D - Attacks NR - Not recommended NT - Not tested Good for O-rings, Packer
Elements and Molded Seals
NOTE: (1) This information provides general guidelines for the selection of seal materials and is provided for informational purposes only. Seal Specialists with Halliburton Energy Services should be consulted for the actual
selection of seals for use in specific applications. Halliburton Energy Services will not be liable for any damage resulting from the use of this information without consultation with Halliburton Seal Specialists.
(2) These materials are mainly used as o-rings.
(3) All pressure tests were done using 6 mil (.006) gaps, — larger radial gaps will reduce pressure rating.
(4) Back-up rings must be used above 250° F (121.1° C) and 4000 psi (27.6 Mpa).
(5) Back-up rings must be used above 250° F (121.1° C) and 5000 psi (34.5 Mpa).
(6) ° C = (° F-32) x 5/9.
(7) Water soluble inhibitors only.

Figure 4.32 - 2
4-76
Packer Element Selection Chart

(1)
N N Y N PACKER N Y
IN BROMIDE
STEAM/THERMAL PERMANENT PACKER IN OIL TEMP
START APPLICATION W/NO BASE MUD OVER 24 COMPLETION FLUIDS 40°F TO NITRILE ELEMENTS
PACKER
HYDROCARBON HOURS BEFORE
MORE THAN 36 HOURS
325°F W/STANDARD METAL BACKUPS
DESIGN BEFORE
FLUIDS SET? SET?
Y N Y Y N
Y
TEMP NITRILE ELEMENTS W/TEFLON
40°F TO AND METAL BACKUPS
400°F
Y
TEMP AFLAS ELEMENTS
100°F TO W/STANDARD METAL BACKUPS
400°F
Y
TEMP
AFLAS ELEMENTS W/TEFLON AND
100°F TO
GRAFOIL WIREMESH AND METAL BACKUPS
450°F
N
TEMP CHECK WITH YOUR HALLIBURTON

GREATER THAN 450°F REPRESENTIVE FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
N Y
RETRIEVABLE PACKER TEMP
NITRILE ELEMENTS
PACKER EXPOSED TO 40°F TO
W/BONDED GARTER SPRINGS
DESIGN BROMIDES? 275°F
Y N
PACKER
N Y
ELEMENTS TEMP FLUOREL ELEMENTS
EXPOSED TO AMINE 40°F TO
CORROSION W/BONDED GARTER SPRINGS
INHIBITORS?
400°F
Y N
Y
TEMP
AFLAS ELEMENTS
100°F TO W/BONDED GARTER SPRINGS
400°F
N
CHECK WITH YOUR

TEMP HALLIBURTON REPRESENTIVE
GREATER THAN 400°F FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Y
TEMP
EPDM ELEMENTS WITH
LESS THAN
BACKUPS
550°F
NOTE: (1) This information provides general guidelines for the selection of seal materials and is provided for informational purposes only. N
Seal Specialists with Halliburton Energy Services should be consulted for the actual selection of seals for use in specific
applications. Halliburton Energy Services will not be liable fo r any damage resulting from the use of this information without CHECK WITH YOUR
TEMP HALLIBURTON REPRESENTIVE
consultation with Halliburton Seal Specialists. GREATER THAN 550°F FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
Figure 4.32 - 3
N Y N PACKER N Y
PACKER IN OIL IN BROMIDE
STEAM/THERMAL PERMANENT BASE MUD OVER
TEMP
COMPLETION FLUIDS NITRILE ELEMENTS
START APPLICATION W/NO PACKER 24 HOURS MORE THAN 36 HOURS 40°F TO
HYDROCARBON DESIGN BEFORE SET? BEFORE 325°F W/STANDARD METAL BACKUPS
FLUIDS SET?
Y N Y Y N
Y
TEMP NITRILE ELEMENTS W/TEFLON
40°F TO AND METAL BACKUPS
400°F
N
Y
TEMP
AFLAS ELEMENTS
100°F TO
W/STANDARD METAL BACKUPS
325°F
Y
TEMP AFLAS ELEMENTS W/TEFLON AN
100°F TO GRAFOIL WIREMESH AND METAL
450°F BACKUPS
N
Figure 4.32 - 4 TEMP CHECK WITH YOUR HALLIBURTO

GREATER REPRESENTIVE FOR SPECIAL
THAN 450°F APPLICATIONS

N Y
STEAM/THERMAL
PERMANENT
START APPLICATION W/NO
PACKER DESIGN
HYDROCARBON
FLUIDS
Y N
N Y
RETRIEVABLE PACKER TEMP NITRILE ELEMENTS
PACKER EXPOSED TO 40°F TO W/BONDED GARTER SPRINGS
DESIGN BROMIDES? 275°F
Y N
N Y
PACKER
ELEMENTS TEMP
FLUOREL ELEMENTS
EXPOSED TO AMINE 40°F TO
CORROSION W/BONDED GARTER SPRINGS
400°F
INHIBITORS?
Y
TEMP
100°F TO AFLAS ELEMENTS
400°F W/BONDED GARTER SPRINGS

GREATER
Figure 4.32 - 5 THAN
REPRESENTIVE FOR SPECIAL
APPLICATIONS
400°F
N
STEAM/THERMAL
START APPLICATION W/NO
HYDROCARBON
FLUIDS
Y
TEMP
LESS THAN EPDM ELEMENTS WITH BACKUPS
550°F

GREATER REPRESENTIVE FOR SPECIAL
Figure 4.32 - 6 THAN 550°F APPLICATIONS

Relative Production Seal Costs

Compared with Molded Nitrile
Cost Comparison
80
X74 X75
70
X69
60
X60
50
40
X36
30
X29 X30
20
X21
X20
10 X15 X15
X1
0 X6
MSN MSF VTR RTR MSA VTP ATR PTP ATP CTR KTR CTP KTP
275 400 350 450 400 350 450 450 450 450 450 450 450
TEMPERATURE IN FAHRENHEIT
Figure 4.32 - 7

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.33: Lifting Clamps and Caps
SL 4.33: Lifting Clamps and Caps

Pick-up Clamp F/Standard Stacks
Assembly Lub Tube Tube OD Pick-up Clamp Size
46RF78 46R108 2.63 46W458 96WO91 2-5/8
46RF41 46R134 2.63 46W458 96WO91 2-5/8
46RF58 46R104 3.00 46W668 96WO138 2-7/8
46RF211 46R187 3.00 46W668 96WO138 2-7/8
46RF165 46R145 3.38 46W705 96WO137 2-5/16
46RF202 46R164 3.25 46W662 96WO126 3-1/8
46RF215 46R149 3.25 46W662 96WO126 3-1/8
46RF204 46R205 3.50 46W704 96WO136 3-5/8
46RF227 46R17 3.50 46W704 96WO136 3-5/8
46RF206 46R164 3.25 46W662 96WO126 3-1/8
46RF217 46R149 3.25 46W662 96WO126 3-1/8
46RF208 46R174 3.50 46W704 96WO136 3-5/8
46RF237 46R47 5.00 46W654 5
46RF209 46R164 3.25 46W662 96WO126 3-1/8
46RF220 46R55 4.12 46W613 4

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.34: Hay Pulleys and Ground Block Sheaves
SL 4.34: Hay Pulleys and Ground Block Sheaves
Hay Pulley and Sheave Selection

Scope
Hay pulleys and sheaves are used to guide wireline from the wireline unit to the
lubricator. Proper selection of pulleys and sheaves will prevent undue stress on
the wireline.
General Information
Slickline
Slickline normally travels horizontally from the wireline unit to the hay pulley/
weight indicator at the base of lubricator. It makes a 90o turn around the hay pul-
ley, travels up the lubricator, and makes a 180o bend at the stuffing box to pass
into the lubricator.
For .092-in. wireline and smaller, a standard 7- or 8-in. hay pulley is used. For the
larger sizes of slickline, a 16-in. hay pulley is recommended. Use of the small hay
pulley with .108-in. and .125-in. wireline will cause the wire to be overstressed
and can lead to premature wire failure.
More unusual rig-ups may necessitate the use of several hay pulleys to achieve a
90o bend at the weight indicator and to prevent the wireline from scraping on
obstructions. If a 90o angle at the hay pulley/weight indicator is not possible, a
correction factor must be applied to the weight indication. This can be found in
section WL1.20.
Several operational difficulties with the 16-in. hay pulley have recently been
addressed. It has been impossible to use a standard line wiper with the large hay
pulley. An adaptor (part # 46PA16204) is now available which allows the use of
the standard slickline wiper. Another problem has been noted with the large hay
pulley that usually occurs during downward jarring. As the wire becomes slack,
the hay pulley and wire will “flop” against the tree or deck. When tension is again
applied, the wire shows a tendency to slip off of the wheel and can become kinked
around the shaft. A hay pulley stand (part #46PA16205) is now available that will
prevent the pulley from laying over on its side. Care must be taken to prevent the
stand from interfering with the weight indicator.
Braided Line
Braided line is most commonly run using a floor sheave and a crown block
sheave. Most logging units have a weight indicator built into the levelwind
assembly. This eliminates the need for a weight indicator to be attached to the
floor sheave (hay pulley). A crown block sheave is commonly used instead of

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.34: Hay Pulleys and Ground Block Sheaves
having a sheave attached to the lubricator. The wireline can be used to pick up the
lubricator. This arrangement also allows heavy jarring without any danger of
bending the lubricator. See Figure 4.34 - 2.
Reference Number Type
312SM3 8-in. F/.092 and smaller
46PA16203 16-in. Aluminum
996.19436 16-in. Composite
Figure 4.34 - 1
Figure 4.34 - 2

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.35: Gin Poles and Accessories
SL 4.35: Gin Poles and Accessories

Gin Poles
Part Number Description
82TO233 Standard
82TO239 Heavy Duty
82TO260 Heavy Duty - 70oF
Detail Part Name Part Number Quantity
1 Weight Indicator 82TO110 M/D 0-2000 1

93GO2 M/D 0-4000 1
2 Hay Pulley 312SM3 1
3 Wireline Clamp 93G1 1
4 Lubricator Pick-Up Clamp See Listing For Size 1
5 Wire Rope Clip 94C296 2
6 Rope Block 94S8 2
7 Rope 94R2 150 ft
8 Screw Pin Anchor Shackle 3/8 in. 3
9 Load Binder (Ratchet Type) 92TB15 1
10 Proof Coil Chain 94CO1 3/8 in. x 15 ft 4

with 2 hooks
11 Grab Hook 3/8 in. 7
12 Cold Shut 3/8 in. 11
13 Turn Buckle 3/8 in. eye and eye 4
14 Proof Coil Chain 94C34 (2 ft length) 4
15 Bolt 410BH229 4
16 Nut 410NH130 4
17 Stake 46K83 4
18 Wire Rope 94C309 40 ft
19 Line Wiper 312PM213 1
20 Hay Pulley Chain 94CO9 1/4 in. x 4 ft 1

with 1 hook
21 Gin Poles 82TO233 Standard

82TO239 Heavy Duty
82TO260 Heavy Duty - 70°F

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.35: Gin Poles and Accessories
Figure 4.35 - 1

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.36: Rope Sockets - Slickline and Braided Line
SL 4.36: Rope Sockets - Slickline and Braided Line

Wireline Rope Socket provides a means for connecting the wire-
line to the tool string. A disc in the socket is free to rotate to pro-
vide a swivel connection between the wireline and tools below
the socket. A small spring within the socket serves as a cushion to
prevent the wireline tie from straightening out and releasing dur-
ing prolonged jarring.
Otis© Rope Socket

Specify: nominal size, wire size,
type (knot, no-knot).
Part number prefix: 43BO
CN03560
Figure 4.36 - 1
NOMINAL FISH NECK

WIRE SIZE TYPE MAXIMUM OD THREAD SERVICE
SIZE OD
3/4 .092 Knot .687 .750 1/2-13 NC Std.
3/4 .092 Knot .750 .750 5/8-11 Std.
1 .092 Spring 1.00 1.00 5/8-11 Std.
1-1/4 .092 Disc 1.00 1.25 3/4-10 Std.
1-1/4 .105 Disc 1.187 1.25 15/16-10 Std.
1-1/2 .105 Disc 1.375 1.375 15/16-10 Std.
1-1/2 .105 Disc 1.375 1.375 15/16-10 H2S
1-1/2 .092/.105 No Knot 1.375 1.375 15/16-10 Std.
1-1/2 .108 No Knot 1.375 1.375 15/16-10 Std.
1-1/2 .108 No Knot 1.375 1.375 15116-10 H2S
1-1/2 .187 Wedge 1.375 1.50 15/16-10 Std.
1-1/2 .187 3-Hole 1.375 1.50 15/16-10 Std.

Thimble
1-1/2 .250 3-Hole 1.375 1.50 15/16-10 Std.

Thimble
1-1/2 .187 Slip-Type 1.375 1.50 15/16-10 Std.
1-1/2 .250 Slip-Type 1.375 1.50 15/16-10 Sid.
1-7/8 .092 Disc 1.750 1.875 1-1/16-10 Std.
1-7/8 .092/.105 No Knot 1.750 1.875 1-1/16-10 Std.
1-7/8 .108 No Knot 1.750 1.975 1-1/16-10 Std.

NOMINAL FISH NECK

WIRE SIZE TYPE MAXIMUM OD THREAD SERVICE
SIZE OD
1-7/8 .108 No Knot 1.750 1.875 1-1/16-10 H2S
1-7/8 .092 Disc 1.750 1.075 1-1/16-10 H2S
2 .187 Wedge 1.750 1.90 1-1/16-10 Std.
2 .187 Thimble 1.750 1.90 1-1/16-10 H2S
2-1/2 .108 No Knot 2.313 2.313 1-1/16-10 Std.
2-1/2 .187 3-Hole 2.313 2.31 1-1/16-10 Std.

Thimble
The slickline rope socket provides a means of connecting to tool string to the end
of the wire.
For slickline operations there are two basic types of rope sockets available:
• Conventional "knot" type

• Wedge "no-knot" type
Figure 4.36 - 2
The knot-type rope socket (Fig. 4.36-2) is what we will call the traditional type,
because it has been around the longest. In this type of rope socket the wire is
threaded through the body, spring and spring support, wrapped around a disc,
then wound around itself with tight wraps (Fig. 4.36-3). For typical slickline oper-
ations, the operator would make between 7 to 14 wraps to complete the knot.
Figure 4.36 - 3

However, there are situations (crooked tubing, wire fishing, etc.) where the wraps
would be reduced to 1 ¾ to 2 wraps. With only 1 ¾ to 2 wraps, the operator could
pull the wire out of the rope socket if the tool string became stuck.
The no-knot (Fig. 4.36-4) rope socket is quickly becoming the favored method of
connecting the wire to the tool string for two reasons.
• It is easier to make up (with larger wire sizes currently being used).

• It is stronger.
With the no-knot rope socket the wire is threaded through the
body and thimble eye and folded around the thimble (wedge).
The wedge is then inserted into the thimble eye.
The strength of this type of rope socket is due to the reduction

of tight bending radii.
There is a downfall to this type of connection, due to its design

it loses its ability to swivel. Therefore a knuckle or tool string
CN03560
swivel should be used below the no-knot rope socket to keep
the natural twist of the wire.
Figure 4.36 - 4
Note The rope socket used should be sized to ensure that a
pulling tool could retrieve it and the tool string from the wellbore.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.37: Stem — Non-Weighted and Weighted
SL 4.37: Stem — Non-Weighted and Weighted

Otis Stems are used as weight to overcome stuffing-
box packing friction and well pressure on the cross-
sectional area of the wireline. The stem can also trans-
mit force either upward or downward to set or
retrieve subsurface controls. Size and weight of the
stem are determined by the impact force required and
the size of the subsurface control to be run or pulled.
For normal conditions, five feet of 1 ¾-in. OD stem is
made up by combining 2, 3, or 5 ft (0.61, 0.91, 1.22 m)
lengths of standard stem. For high-pressure applica-
tions when additional weight is needed, lead or mal-
lory-filled stems are available.
CN03560
Otis® Stem
Otis© Stem
Specify: nominal size; length:
2, 3, 4 ft (.61, .91, 1.22 m);
solid or filled (Y/N-lead, mallory
Part number prefixes:
44B-solid stem, 44AO-filled stem

Weight required to equal (balance) the force of the surface, shut-in well pressure
that is trying to push the wireline up and out of the stuffing box packing. Addi-
tional weight will be required to pull the wireline into the well.
250 250
240
230
.125 220
210
200 200
.108 190
180
170
160
.105
STEM WEIGHT, LB
STEM WEIGHT, LB
150 150
140
130
120
.092
110
100 100
.082 90
80
.072 70
60
.066
50 50
40
30
20
10
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
TUBING S URFACE P RES S URE, (P S I IN THOUS ANDS )
Figure 4.37 - 1
The stem (weight bar) (Fig. 4.37 - 2) provides the weight to:
1. Overcome the friction of the stuffing box packing on the wire.

2. Overcome the force created by the well pressure acting on the cross sectional
area of the wire which is "packed off" (sealed) in the stuffing box. This force is
trying to push the wire up and out of the well.

The stem must provide the

weight necessary to overcome the
friction and force and pull the
wire into the well.
The stem also provides the "mass"

or weight which is needed to
deliver the impact (hammering
effect) that is required to set
(install) or retrieve the various
subsurface flow control devices.
The amount of stem used in a tool

string is determined primarily by:
1. The amounts of well pressure

(working against the area of
the wire).
2. The impact required to
accomplish the downhole
work to be done.
The deviation of the well at the
depth of operations, the type of
fluid in the well, and the size of
the tubing also effect the amount
and size of the stem being used.
CN03561
In some situations the rig-up con-

ditions can effect the type of stem
Figure 4.37 - 2
that is used. On some offshore
platforms, there is limited space
and special "weighted" stem (Fig.
4.37 - 2) has to be used to reduce
length and maintain the weight
required for successful opera-
tions.
Note When selecting the stem size, consideration needs to be given to the tub-
ing size and the cutter bar that might be used to cut the wire at the rope socket. If
the cutter bar and the stem can fit side-by-side in the tubing, when the cutter bar
is dropped, it might fall along side of the tool string creating a very difficult fish-
ing operation.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.38: Stem Weight vs. Pressure Chart Table
SL 4.38: Stem Weight vs. Pressure Chart Table

CAUTION When determining the wireline tool string weight that is required to pull the wire-
line into the well when running a sub surface device, consideration must be given
to the design of the device being run. In the larger ID of the wireline lubricator
and in the larger ID of the tree, the weight of the device may be beneficial in pull-
ing the wireline into the well. However, if the device has centralizers or spring
loaded components that contactthe tubing wall, a portion (if not all) the weight of
the device, and possibly some of the tool string weight, way be supported by the
centralizers or spring loaded components when they enter the smaller ID of the
tubing. Therefore, it is a general practice to disregard the Weight of this type of
device when calculating the weight required to pull the wireline into the well. In
fact, additional weight will be required to overcome the "drag" effect of the cen-
tralizers or spring loaded components that may be in contact with the tubing wall.
Although the following chart is extended to 20,000 psi well pressures and to wire
sizes up to .125-in. diameter, under certain conditions such as extremely high well
pressures and/or smaller tubing sizes, it may be impractical to use the larger wire
sizes.
Cross Sectional Areas of W/L Approximate Weights of W/L
Wt/1000 Ft in
Diameter Area wt/ft in pounds
pounds
.066 .0034 sq. inch .01162 11.62
.072 .0040 sq. inch .01382 13.82
.082 .0052 sq. inch .01793 17.93
.092 .0066 sq. inch .02257 22.57
.105 .0087 sq. inch .02940 29.40
.108 .0092 sq. inch .03110 31.10
.125 .0123 sq. inch .04167 41.67

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.39: Knuckle Joints
SL 4.39: Knuckle Joints

The knuckle joint (Fig. 4.39 - 1) has a ball and socket design to
allow for "swivel" and angular action between the jars and the
tool or control device that is attached below the knuckle joint.
In most slickline operations the tool or control device attached
to the lower end of the knuckle joint is considerably large in
diameter than the tool string. The importance of the knuckle
joint is to allow the larger tool or control device to align or cen-
tralize itself in the tubing bore, especially if the tubing is
crooked or "corkscrewed."
Some operators will not use knuckle joints because they feel
that it will create a weak link in their tool string. If a knuckle
joint is not properly cared for, it could easily part.
When you look at the design of the knuckle joint, where the top
sub screws into the socket, the connection has a thin wall on the
socket. A roll pin keeps the socket from backing off.
CN03562
Maintenance is the key to ensure that the knuckle joint remains
in operational condition. Careful placement of the pipe
wrenches to keep them off the thin wall of the socket, removing
the roll pin and socket to clean and grease the threads are part Figure 4.39 - 1
of the maintenance required. The condition of the socket
should be inspected before each use to determine its condition.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.40: Jars - Spang, Tubular, Hydraulic, and Spring Type
SL 4.40: Jars - Spang, Tubular, Hydraulic, and Spring Type

Otis Accelerators are used with and just above hydraulic jars for shallow, weighty jarring. Accel-
erators help maintain constant pull as the hydraulic jars begin to open. The accelerator inhibits
pulling the wireline out of the wireline socket at these shallow depths.
Otis Knuckle Joints have a special ball and socket design allowing
angular movement between the jars and the running or pulling tool to
help align them with the tubing. Knuckle joints are important if the
tubing is corkscrewed and when wireline work is done in a direc-
tional hole. In these conditions, joints are used at every connection in
the tool string. Where stem and jars will not align or move freely, tool
operation may be impossible; however, the knuckle joint inhibits the
wireline tools from hanging up.
Otis Jars are available in mechanical and hydraulic types. With a set
of mechanical jars below the stem, the weight of the jars and stem can
be used to jar-up or down by pulling and releasing the wireline. A
Halliburton Wireline Specialist can easily feel the jars and manipulate
CN03562
CN03563
the wireline. Hydraulic jars are designed to provide jarring action in
wells in which it is difficult to obtain good jarring action with
mechanical jars. Hydraulic jars, which allow an upward impact only,
are usually run just above the regular mechanical jars. They require Otis® Otis®
Knuckle Joint Blind Box
careful maintenance for maximum use in the tool string. Jar operation
is monitored by a weight indicator.
Otis B Blind Box serves as the impact point when downward

jarring operations are required.
Standard Wireline Tool String

Normal Tool OD Fishneck OD
Thread Connection*
in. mm in. mm
3/4 19.05 5/8 in. - 11 UNC 0.750 19.05
1 25.40 5/8 in. -11 UNC 1.000 25.40
1 1/4 31.75 15/16 in. - 10 UNS 1.188 30.18
1 1/2 38.10 15/16 in. - 10 UNS 1.375 34.93
1 7/8 47.63 1 1/16 in. - 10 UNS 1.750 44.45
2 50.80 1 1/16 in. - 10 UNS 1.750 44.45
2 1/2 63.50 1 1/16 in. - 10 UNS 2.313 58.75
*Other thread connections available

Ordering Information
Specify: nominal size, stroke: 20-in. or 30-in. (50.8 - 76.2 cm) — mechanical only.
Part number prefixes:
44AO—mechanical jars, 44HO—hydraulic jars, 44BA—knuckle jars,
CN03565
CN03564
CN03566
44AC—accelerator 45BO—knuckle joint

Specify: nominal size and thread, maximum OD, tubing size and weight.
Part number prefix: 44B—blind box Otis® Otis® Otis®
Mechanical Hydraulic Jar Accelerator
Jar

Mechanical Jars
With the mechanical jars attached below the stem, the weight of the stem can be
used to "jar" up by quickly pulling up on the wire to rapidly "open" (extend) the
jars to create an upward impact. To jar down, the wire would be pulled up slowly
to extend the jars and then released quickly to allow the stem to fall, closing the
jars and creating a downward impact.
We might think of the stem as the weight of a ham-

mer and the length of the jar stroke as the distance
the hammer can move up or down and the slick-
line as the hammer handle.
A greater impact can be obtained while jarring up

because the wire can be pulled rapidly by the slick-
line unit, to move the stem at a very fast rate of
speed. When jarring down, only the weight of the
stem controls the rate of speed at which it falls. We
can not use the wire to "push" the stem downward.
There are two types of mechanical jars:
• “Spang" link jars

• Tubular jars
Spang jars are available in two different stroke
lengths 20-in. and 30-in. stroke. The 20-in.-stroke
jars are most commonly used because it is felt that
they are stouter, with less chance of becoming
"scissored." The 30-in.-stroke jars are used when
extensive upward jarring is required.
CN03566
Tubular jars are used most often when well condi-

tions or the operation might cause the Spang jars “Spang” link Tubular jars
to become fouled. Jar
Note The OD of the jars should match the OD of the stem.
Hydraulic Jars
The Hydraulic Jar (Fig. 4.40 - 1) is designed to provide upward jarring impacts
under conditions where it may be difficult or impractical to obtain adequate
upward jarring impacts with the mechanical jars.
Hydraulic jars are capable of providing an upward jarring impact only. They do
not provide a downward jarring impact. When used, the hydraulic jar should be
installed immediately above the mechanical jars in the slickline tool string. The
hydraulic jar is not intended to replace the mechanical jar in the slickline tool
string.

Essentially the hydraulic jar

consists of two basic sub
assemblies:
• The mandrel sub assem-

bly that has a piston at its
lower end and a top sub
(fishing neck) at its upper
end. Inside the piston,
there is a valve and port
assembly that will not
allow fluid flow from
above the piston to below
but will allow fluid flow
from below to above the
piston.
• The body (housing) sub
assembly. Near its lower
end, the body has a
restricted internal diame-
ter (cylinder) that will
accept the piston end of
the mandrel assembly.
Also note that a balance
piston is installed in the
lower end of the restricted
internal diameter (cylin-
der) in the body. The bal-
ance piston seals in the
cylinder and is free to
move up and down as
required to equalize the
pressure of the hydraulic
fluid, inside the jar, with
the well pressure outside
the jar. The balance piston
also compensates for any
expansion of the hydraulic Figure 4.40 - 1
fluid, and resultant pres-
sure increase, that could
be caused by temperature.
When the hydraulic jar is in the "closed" position, the piston (at the lower end of
the mandrel assembly) is inside the restricted internal diameter (cylinder) of the
body. When an upward strain is taken on the slickline, the mandrel assembly is
pulled upward in relation to the body. The upward movement of the mandrel is
impeded by the hydraulic fluid that must pass through the extremely narrow
annular space between the outside diameter of the piston (on the mandrel) and
restricted internal diameter (cylinder) in the body. As soon as the piston moves
out of the restricted internal diameter (cylinder) of the body and into the enlarged

internal diameter of the body, the fluid resistance ceases. At this point, the
"stretch" that has been pulled in the slickline causes the mandrel subassembly to
travel upward at a constantly accelerating velocity until the top shoulder on the
piston strikes the stop in the upper end of the body. This transmits an upward jar-
ring impact to the tool(s) that are below the hydraulic jar.
After the upward jarring impact has been completed, the wire is slacked off to
allow the weight of the slickline stem to "close" the hydraulic jar. During closing,
as the piston enters the cylinder, the valve assembly in the piston is moved off seat
to permit rapid displacement of hydraulic fluid from below the piston to above.
When the mandrel/piston assembly has completed its downward travel, the
valve in the piston is closed by a small spring and the jar is ready for the next
upward jarring impact.
The slickline operator can control the intensity of the upward jarring impact of the
hydraulic jar by increasing or decreasing the amount of tension (and the resulting
stretch) that is pulled on the wire.
One of the problems associated with the use of hydraulic jars is that they can "gas
up" and created a shock absorber that hinders jarring. Understanding the opera-
tion and function of the components of the hydraulic jars and using good redress
practices can reduce the risk of getting gas into the jars.
When the hydraulic jars enter the wellbore, a pressure differential is created if the
balance piston does not move. The fluid inside the jars will remain at atmospheric
pressure. Then when the mandrel/piston is pulled out to effect an upward jar the
differential is greater. This pressure differential, causes rapid deterioration of the
seals and gas enters.
Pre-testing the hydraulic jars on the surface, and visually inspecting the move-
ment of the balance piston, will assure longer use.

Spring Jars
Spring jars (Fig. 4.40 - 2) were developed in response to the "gas up" problems of
the hydraulic jars and to increase the effective stroke thereby increasing the
impact forces downhole.
Spring jars uses a stack of disc spring washers, that are fully
adjustable giving them the ability to simulate the function of
hydraulic jars without the risk.
Figure 4.40 - 2

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.41: Accelerators
SL 4.41: Accelerators
The accelerator is used in conjunction with the hydraulic or spring jars, primarily,
when unseating and retrieving unusually heavy sub surface devices from shallow
depths in the well.
At shallow depths and deeper depths in highly deviated wells, the

amount of "stretch" that could be pulled in the slickline to activate
the hydraulic jar would be minimal. Slickline riding along the
tubing wall can cause a change in the effective stretch of the wire.
Additionally, this load applied to the slickline at shallow depths
would tend to either break the slickline or cause it to pull out of
the slickline socket.
Installation of the accelerator in the slickline tool string between

the slickline socket and the stem allows the hydraulic jar to be
used at shallow depths or more effectively in highly deviated
wells.
When a strain is pulled on the slickline, with the accelerator in

place, the spring in the accelerator is compressed a given distance.
The distance that the spring is compressed is greater than the dis-
tance that the mandrel/piston assembly of the hydraulic jar must
travel when moving from its "closed" to its "open" position. By
maintaining a constant tension on the slickline, the compressed
spring in the accelerator tends to accelerate the upward speed of
CN03566
the mandrel/piston assembly of the hydraulic jar when it acti-
vates. This delivers an upward jarring impact to the tools below
Otis®
the hydraulic jars. Accelerator
In effect, at shallow depths, the accelerator simulates the wire

"stretch" that is normally required to operate the hydraulic jar. The accelerator
also provides a cushioning effect that helps to avoid either breaking or pulling the
wire out of the slickline socket at shallow depths. At deeper depths the accelera-
tor can increase the speed of the impact to generate more force.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.42: Tool String Connections
SL 4.42: Tool String Connections
Figure 4.42 - 1
Item Number Description
51C1 SUB 1 1/16-10 X 15/16-10
51C2 SUB 3.00
51C 3 SUB X-OVR ADPT 1 1/16-
51C5 SUB 15/16-10 UNS X 1 1/16
51C 9 SUB 15/16-10 X 3/4 API
51D 1 SUB 15/16-10 X 1 1/16-10
51D 3 SUB 1 1/16-10 X 5/8-11
51D 4 SUB 1 9/16-10 X 15/16-10
51D 5 SUB 1 1/16-10 UNS X 15/16
51D 6 SUB 15/16-10 X 3/4-16
51D 7 SUB 1 1/16-10 X 3/4-16
51D 8 SUB 3/4-16 X 15/16-10 P-B

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.43: Quick Connects and Tools
SL 4.43: Quick Connects and Tools

Before its extensive field history, the
Otis Quick Connect was thoroughly
tested in both the engineering labo-
ratory and the Halliburton test well
in Dallas, Texas. During the design
proving phase, a 1 ¾-in. (38.1 cm)
Otis Quick Connect was jarred
through 50,000 cycles at impact
loads of 9,000 to 10,000 lb (4082.33
to 4535.92 kg) in both directions.
Tensile testing on the tool after jar-
ring revealed the Otis Quick Con-
nect had retained full strength
throughout the operation.
Now Halliburton toolstring compo-

nents and wireline service tools are
available with integral Otis Quick
Connects.
Features
• spacing of load-bearing shoul-
ders will not allow coupling to
connect until full engagement
of all shoulders are in place
• self-washing feature minimizes
sand buildup in the locking
mechanism
• designed for manual operation;
CN00756
CN00757
CN00758
no special tools are required
Mechanical Wireline Quick Knuckle Joint

Wireline Jar Connect Stem Quick Connect
Benefits
• Otis Quick Connect design
ensures proper tool string
make-up
• reliable disconnect, even in
sandy environment
• safe assembly/disassembly on
location; no special tools
required
• faster turnaround on location
minimizes job time

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.43: Quick Connects and Tools
Part Numbers for HES Toolstring Components with Integral Quick Connects
1 7/8 in.
Rope Socket 43 QC 1870
Stem 24 in. 44 BQ 1870
Stem 36 in. 44 BQ 1871
Stem 60 in. 44 BQ 1872
Jars 20 in. Stroke 44 AOQ 18701
Knuckle Joint 45 BQ 1870
1 1/2 in.
Rope Socket 43 QC 1500
Stem 24 in. 44 BQ 1500
Stem 36 in. 44 BQ 1501
Stem 60 in. 44 BQ 1502
Jars 20 in. Stroke 44 AOQ 15000
Knuckle Joint 45 BQ 1500

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.44: Go Devils/Cutter Bars
SL 4.44: Go Devils/Cutter Bars

Auxilliary Tools for Use with
Slickline Tool String
Otis® Gauge Cutter and
Swaging Tools
CN03568
CN03567
CN03569
It is important to run a gauge cutter before run-
ning subsurface controls to: (1) determine if con-
trol will pass freely through the tubing; and (2)
to locate the top of the landing nipple if any are Otis® Otis® Otis®
in the tubing. The gauge cutter knife (larger Swaging Tool Gauge Cutter Impression Tool
than OD of the control) is designed to cut away
paraffin, scale, and other debris in the tubing.
Mashed spots in the tubing and large obstruc-
tions may be removed with the swaging tool.
These tools are available in sizes for all tubing
IDs.
Otis Impression Tool is a lead-filled cylinder
CN03572
with a pin through the leaded section to secure
CN03571
CN03570
it to the body of the tool. It is used during a fish-

ing operation to ascertain the shape or size of
the top of the fish and to indicate the type of tool
Otis® Otis® M Otis®
necessary for the next operation. Tubing Broach Magnetix Fishing G Fishing Socket
Otis Tubing Broach is made up of three major Tool
parts: (1) mandrel, (2) nut, and (3) a set of three
spools. Spools are tapered and used to cut burrs
in the tubing ID caused by perforation, rust,
bent tubing, etc. A small OD spool is run first
followed by the next larger size, followed by a
spool corresponding to the original ID of the
tubing. Broach assemblies are run on wireline.
Otis M Magnetic Fishing Tool is designed to
CN03573
CN03574
remove small particles of ferrous metals from

the top of tools in the well.
Otis G Fishing Socket was designed primarily
Otis® P Otis®
to extract prongs with fishing necks from Halli- Wireline Grab Go-Devil
burton subsurface equipment, such as the Otis
PS Plug Choke. Gauge Cutter, Swaging Tool, Impression Tool, Tubing Broach
Specify: nominal size and thread, maximum OD, tubing size and weight.
Otis P Wireline Grab is a fishing tool designed Part number prefixes: 65A—swaging tool, 65G—gauge cutter, 52C—impression tool,
65B—tubing broach
to extract broken wireline or cable from the tub-
ing or casing. Magnetic Fishing Tool, Fishing Socket
Specify: nominal size and thread.
Otis Go-Devil is a slotted stem with a fishing Part number prefixes: 52MO—magnetic fishing tool, 52GO—G Fishing socket
neck. A small strip of metal is pinned in the slot Ordering Information
to inhibit the wireline from coming out. Its use is Wireline Grab, Wireline Retrievers
Specify: tubing size and weight, wireline toolstring nominal size and thread.
usually limited to fishing operations in which a Part number prefixes: 52P—wireline grab, 52PO—wireline retrievers
wireline socket is inaccessible and the line must Ordering Information

Go-Devil
be cut. Otis Go-Devils designed to cut the wire- Specify: nominal size, length,
line at the wireline socket are also available. style bottom (flat or angled).
Part number prefix: 47AO

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.45: Kinley Perforator
SL 4.45: Kinley Perforator
Uses
• Effective economical gas lift
• Produce alternate zones
• Circulate your well and kill it
• Loosen sand-bridges or mud between tubing and casing
• Place a standard orifice, or a check valve, in order to inject glycol, inhibitor, or
hot oil
• Perforate a hole to avoid pulling a “Wet String!”
• Perforate tubing inside sand screen without damaging screen
Advantages
• Runs on wireline through a lubricator, without killing the well.
• Punches a hole. Does not burn or perforate the casing!
• Works in deep wells. Jobs have been performed below 17,000 ft.
• Can be run and fired with electric line for critical depth location.
• New programmable timer can fire the perforator at any depth.
• Works safely; exclusive safety feature helps prevent premature firing.
• Power: Can punch 3/4-ft hole or place a 1/2-ft Orifice Insert thru 5/16-ft thick
tubing.
• Orifices and check valves temporarily extend the productive life of the tubing.
Sizes
Figure 4.45 - 1 • Standard Orifice Insert: 2/64 ft thru 32/64 ft
• Check Orifice sizes: 2/64 in. thru 16/64 ft
• Circulating button will punch a .25 ft, .34 in., .48 ft, or .75 ft hole in tubing from
1.315.
• OD thru 10-3.4 ft OD tubing

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.46: Kinley Power Jar
SL 4.46: Kinley Power Jar
Service
The Kinley power jar was adapted from the Kinley tubing perforator, which has
given safe and dependable service in thousands of wells.
It hits hard enough to cut out the bottom of a 2-7/8-ft and is estimated to hit 40
times harder than Bull Plug any Mechanical Jar.
Uses
• knock a stuck choke loose
• knock out bridge plug
• knock out flapper valve
• shift a sliding sleeve
• drive a spear into tangled wire
• knock loose stuck tool string
• knock out packer ball seat
Advantages
• Tremendous savings possible by avoiding workovers. One job saved a cus-
tomer over $2,000,000.00.
• Power jar does not anchor itself and can be pulled and reloaded after each
Figure 4.46 - 1 shot.
• Force of blow can be varied to suit the job by changing to a more powerful car-
tridge for each shot.
• Hits a harder, straighter blow, even in deep wells, as compared with any
mechanical jar propelled by gravity and impeded by well fluids. It is less apt
to batter the Fish off-center.
• A hammer, chisel, cutter, etc., can be used to perform different jobs. These
attachments remain a part of the tool and are pulled with the jar.
Sizes
Available for use in 2-1/16-ft, 2-3/8-ft, 2-7/8-ft, and 3-1/2-ft tubing. The 3-1/2-
ft size is suitable for use in larger tubing and casing sizes.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.46: Kinley Power Jar
Safe and Effective Operation

The power jar is run on a wireline to contact with the fish. A few strokes of the
jars shears two safety pins and causes a firing pin to strike the primer and to fire
the cartridge. The explosion forces the drive pin downward to strike the drive
head, which rests on the fish. The drive head delivers a quick, hard blow. The
explosive force is entirely contained within the tool and does not the line above
the tool string.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.47: Kinley Sneppers
SL 4.47: Kinley Sneppers

The Kinley Snepper is a dependable mechanical wireline tool designed to be
dropped into the hole to cut slick line. It operates by the impact of its own
weight and cuts the line when it hits bottom. Tests show that it will do the job
with a free fall of only two feet. The cut is made just 2-1/2-ft above the rope
socket, making an easy fishing job. The Snepper has cut a .082’ line at 11,000 ft
and will cut any size line up to and including .108’. There are Snepper sizes to
cut in wells as small as 1.25-ft ID. We also have an Upside-Down Snepper for
cutting in deviated wells, wells with side pocket gas-lift mandrels, standing
fluid levels, or where Snepper could strike a solid surface and cut prematurely.
Available Sizes
Jumbo Snepper, 1-7/8-ft x 36-7/16-ft Junior Snepper, 1-1/4-ft x 26-3/8-ft’
Instructions for Use

The Kinley Snepper is simple to assemble and use. It won’t go together in any
way but the right one. The knife, slipper and crimper make up a sub-assembly
which is pushed into the body and held there by the bottom cap. The procedure
for assembly is as follows:
1. The first step is to cover the well hole so that none of the small parts can
drop into it while the cutter is being assembled on the measuring line.
Figure 4.47 - 1
2. Cut 1/16-in. brass welding rod to 4-in. long, and push it clear through the
two lengthwise holes in the slipper. The upper end of the slipper may be
identified by the rounded (crimper) edge where the slot comes to the diago-
nal end.
3. Put the slipper on the measuring line so that the measuring line lies in the
back of the slot.
4. Put the crimper on the measuring line in the same way, above the slipper,
and bring the two pieces together, pushing the 1/16-in. brass shear pin up
into the crimper, and out the far side just enough so that it can be crimped
down into the recess for it.
5. Screw the set screw into the tapped hole at the top of the crimper until it is
tight.

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.47: Kinley Sneppers
6. Put the knife on the measuring line in the same way, below the slipper, and
bring the pieces together, pushing the 1/16-in. brass shear pin down into the
knife. Crimp the end of the shear pin slightly, and screw the set screw in all
the way. This completes the sub-assembly.
7. Put the body on the measuring line and push the subassembly up into it.
8. Line up the 1/16-in. shear pin hole which goes across the knife with the cor-
responding 1/16-in. shear pin slot which is to be found in the last 3 or 4
threads at the bottom of the body. Push another 1/16-in. shear pin through
and cut it off so that it won’t interfere with the threads.
9. Put the bottom cap on the measuring line, below the body and sub-assem-
bly, and screw it tightly onto the body.
10. The cutter is now ready to drop into the well. If the well is not full of fluid,
run in a few barrels ahead of the cutter to break its fall, and to be sure it
doesn’t cut the line when it hits fluid. Drop the cutter.
11. The cutter will cut the measuring line when it hits the rope-socket. It will
also crimp the end of the line and clamp onto it at the same time. When the
line is brought out of the hole, the cutter will be on the end of it.
Figure 4.47 - 2

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.48: Sandline Cutters
SL 4.48: Sandline Cutters

The Kinley Sand Line Cutter can save the whole line in one piece by cutting it just
above the Rope Socket. This saved line alone can pay for the cutting job and make
an easier fishing job.
Advantages
1. Economical and efficient. Most jobs in tubing take only an hour. Compare
this with the usual long time and heavy expense of pulling the line in two, and
then cutting the remaining line, joint by joint, as the tubing is pulled.
2. Helps to save the fish as well as the line. When the cutter rests on the fish and
cuts the line just ten inches above it, the stub is short and it is possible to fish
for the stuck tools.
• Cuts in casing, tubing, or coiled tubing (1-in. OD or larger).
• Cuts in drill pipe (1-7/8-ft minimum OD. or larger).
• Cuts sand line any size up to, and including 1/4-in. 1 1/2-ft OD tubing,
1/2-in. 2 1/16-ft OD tubing, 9/16-in. 2-3/8-ft OD tubing, 3/4-in. 2-7/8-ft
OD tubing, 7/8-in. 3-1/2-ft OD tubing and 1-1/8-in. 5-ft OD tubing.
3. Optional electronic programmable timer designed to fire the sand line cutter
Figure 4.48 - 1 after a pre-selected interval.
Operation
The cutter can be lowered or dropped into the well. A groove down one side
keeps the line in front of the knife. After the cutter rides the stuck line down to
the top of the rope socket, it is fired by a drop weight or timer. It is the powder
charge that drives the wedge, which forces the knife to cut the sand line.
In 2-3/8-ft tubing (or larger) the drive wedge that operates the cutting knife also
forces a crimper (not shown) to clamp the line against a sleeve. This crimper
allows the cutter and the drop weight to be recovered on the end of the cut line,
which can eliminate the fishing job (which may be necessary in smaller sizes of
tubing).

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.49: Shear Pin Chart
SL 4.49: Shear Pin Chart

The following table was compiled from tests that were conducted in 1971. (Refer-
ence Test JA 003-001-1.) The raw data has been verified a number of times over the
years. However, be aware that there are many variables to consider in determin-
ing when a rod will shear. Use these tables as guides only.
For these tests, each specimen was measured, three shear tests were made on each
nominal size and average shear strength was calculated by using the actual shear
area of the specimen. The test fixture performed a double shear (two diameters)
so the average that was calculated was the average double shear strength. The
average single shear strength listed in the table is the average double shear
strength divided by two.
Table 4.49 - 1: Shear Strength of Various Bar Stock Materials
Single Shear Shear

Material Diameter (in.)
(lb) Strength (psi)
2024-T4 .125 483 39,361

Aluminum
.188 1181 42,782
.250 2210 45,022
.313 3310 43,153
.373 5007 45,330
.500 9120 46,447
.563 10,133 40,776
Free-Cut .125 474 38,598

Yellow Brass
.188 1307 47,334
.250 2197 44,750
.313 3392 44,229
.373 4868 44,072
.563 10,706 43,081
1018 Steel, .125 670 54,597

Rc 14 Max.
.188 1133 59,059
.250 2812 57,295
.313 4234 55,205
.373 6872 62,217
.500 10,996 56,003

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.49: Shear Pin Chart
Table 4.49 - 1: Shear Strength of Various Bar Stock Materials
Single Shear Shear

Material Diameter (in.)
(lb) Strength (psi)
303 Stainless, .075 489 110,612

Rc 14 Max.
.094 690 99,907
.125 1182 96,291
.156 1860 96,950
.188 2914 105,530
.250 4800 97,785
.313 6737 87,834
R-Monel .125 825 67,227
.188 1927 69,787
.250 3333 69,706
.375 7117 64,442
.438 9137 60,782
.500 13,375 68,118
.563 16,024 64,481

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.50: X and R® Nipple Selection Chart
SL 4.50: X and R® Nipple Selection Chart
Otis X and R Landing Nipples and Lock Mandrels

Halliburton X and R landing nipples are run into the well
on the completion tubing to provide a specific landing
location for subsurface flow control equipment. The com-
mon internal profiles of these landing nipples make them
CN03542
universal. The X landing nipple is used in standard
CN03539
weight tubing; the R landing nipple is typically used with
heavyweight tubing.
The completion can have as many selective nipples with X® Landing Nipple
the same ID in any sequence as desired on the tubing and Lock Mandrel
string. This versatility results in an unlimited number of
positions for setting and locking subsurface flow controls.
The flow control, which is attached to the required X or R
lock mandrel, is run in the well via the selective running
CN03540
tool on slickline.
CN03541
The slickline operator using the selective running tool can
set the flow control in any one of the landing nipples at
the desired depth. If this location is unsatisfactory or if
well conditions change, the flow control may be moved R® Landing Nipple
up or down the tubing string to another nipple location. and Lock Mandrel
These operations can be done by slickline under pressure
without killing the well.

Otis XN and RN No-Go Landing Nipples and Lock Mandrels

This equipment is designed
for use in single nipple
Fishing
installations or as the bot- Fishing
Neck Neck
tom nipple in a series of Otis

Expander
X or R landing nipples. Mandrel Expander
Mandrel
Double-
These landing nipples have Acting Double-
Spring Acting
the same packing bore ID Spring
for a particular tubing size Locking
CN03542
CN03544
Keys Locking
and weight. X and XN land- Packing
Keys
ing nipples are designed for Packing

No-Go
use with standard weight
CN03543
Equalizing No-Go
Sub
CN03545
Equalizing
tubing; R and RN landing Sub
nipples are designed for use
with heavyweight tubing. XN® No-Go Landing
(The N designates no-go RN® No-Go Landing
Nipple and Lock Mandrel
nipples.) Nipple and Lock Mandrel

Otis X, XN, R, and RN Landing Nipples and Lock Mandrels

Applications • faster slickline service Ordering Information
• plugging under pressure because of the retractable keys Specify: X or XN; R or RN;
• almost unlimited locations • operator control of locat- packing bore; tubing size,
for setting and locking sub- ing, landing, and locking in weight, grade, and thread;
surface flow controls the selected nipple service environment (stan-
• inside fishing neck pro- dard, %H2S, %CO2, amines/
Features and Benefits vides large ID to maximize other chemicals, chloride co
Landing Nipples production tent, temperatures, pressure
• large bore for minimum etc.); API monogramming o
• optional hold-down fea-
restriction other certification require-
ture for high flow rates and ments; special hold-down
• universal nipple with one safety valve installations
(interference or shear pin on
internal profile Optional Hold-down lock mandrel); special mate-
• versatility helps reduce • interference hold-down rial and elastomer require-
completion and production for smaller locks ments, if applicable
maintenance costs • shear pin hold-down for
• simple operation larger locks Part number prefixes: 11X,
XN—landing nipple; 711X,
• multiple options when
Note The optional hold- XN—API/monogrammed
running, setting, or retrieving
down feature is recom- landing nipple; 10XO, XN—
subsurface flow controls
mended for SSSV installa- lock mandrel; 710XO, XN—
Lock Mandrels API/monogrammed lock
tions. Both features
• retractable locking keys mandrel; 11R, RN—landing
provide additional locking
• locks designed to hold integrity to withstand rig- nipple; 711R, RN—API/
pressure from above or below orous well conditions. monogrammed landing nip
or from sudden reversals ple; 10RO, RN—lock mandre
• extra large ID for higher 710RO, RN—API/mono-
flow volumes grammed lock mandrel
Otis X and XN Landing Nipples and Lock Mandrels Specifications
For Standard Tubing Weights
Tubing X® Profile XN Profile Lock Mandrel ID
Size Weight ID Drift Packing Bore Packing Bore No-Go ID
in. mm lb/ft kg/m in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
1.050 26.67 1.20 1.79 0.824 20.93 0.730 18.54
Available on Request
1.315 33.40 1.80 2.68 1.049 26.64 0.955 24.26
2.30 3.42
1.660 42.16 1.380 35.05 1.286 32.66 1.250 31.75 1.250 31.75 1.135 28.83 0.62 15.75
2.40 3.57
2.40 3.57 1.660 42.16
1.900 48.26 2.76 4.11 1.610 40.89 1.516 38.51 1.500 38.10 1.500 38.10 1.448 36.78
0.75 19.05
2.90 4.32
2.063 52.40 3.25 4.84 1.751 44.48 1.657 42.09 1.625 41.28 1.625 41.28 1.536 39.01
4.60 6.85
2 3/8 60.33 1.995 50.67 1.901 48.29 1.875 47.63 1.875 47.63 1.791 45.49 1.00 25.40
4.70 6.99
2 7/8 73.03 6.40 9.52
2.441 62.00 2.347 59.61 2.313 58.75 2.313 58.75 2.205 56.01 1.38 35.05
6.50 9.67
9.30 13.84 2.992 76.00 2.867 72.82 2.813 71.45 2.813 71.45 2.666 67.72
3 1/2 88.90 1.75 44.45
10.20 15.18 2.922 74.22 2.797 71.04 2.750 69.85 2.750 69.85 2.635 66.93
4 101.60 11.00 16.37 3.476 88.29 3.351 85.10 3.313 84.15 3.313 84.15 3.135 79.63 2.12 53.85
4 1/2 114.30 12.75 18.97 3.958 100.53 3.833 97.36 3.813 96.85 3.813 96.85 3.725 94.62
2.62 66.55
5 127.00 13.00 19.35 4.494 114.14 4.369 110.97 4.313 109.55 4.313 109.55 3.987 101.27
5 1/2 139.70 17.00 25.30 4.892 124.26 4.767 121.08 4.562 115.87 4.562 115.87 4.455 113.16 3.12 79.25

Otis® R® And RN® Landing Nipples And Lock Mandrels Specifications

For Heavy Tubing Weights
Tubing
R® Profile RN® Profile Lock Mandrel ID
Size Weight ID Drift Packing Bore Bore ID
in. mm lb/ft kg/m in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm
1.660 42.16 3.02 4.49 1.278 32.46 1.184 30.07 1.125 28.58 1.125 28.58 1.012 25.70 Avail. on Request
1.900 48.26 3.64 5.42 1.500 38.10 1.406 35.71 1.375 34.93 1.375 34.93 1.250 31.75 0.62 15.75
5.3 7.89 1.939 49.25 1.845 46.86 1.781 45.24 1.781 45.24 1.640 41.66 0.88 22.35
5.95 8.85 1.867 47.42 1.773 45.03
2 3/8 60.33 1.710 43.43 1.710 43.43 1.560 39.62 0.75 19.05
6.2 9.23 1.853 47.07 1.759 44.68
7.7 11.46 1.703 43.26 1.609 40.87 1.500 38.10 1.500 38.10 1.345 34.16 0.62 15.75
7.9 11.76 2.323 59.00 2.229 56.62 2.188 55.58 2.188 55.58 2.010 51.05 1.12 28.45
8.7 12.95 2.259 57.38 2.165 54.99
2.125 53.98 2.125 53.98 1.937 49.20 0.88 22.35
8.9 13.24 2.243 56.97 2.149 54.58
2 7/8 73.03 9.5 14.14 2.195 55.75 2.101 53.37
2.000 50.80 2.000 50.80 1.881 47.78 0.88 22.35
10.4 15.48 2.151 54.64 2.057 52.25
11 16.37 2.065 52.45 1.971 50.06
1.875 47.03 1.875 47.03 1.716 43.59 0.88 22.35
11.65 17.34 1.995 50.67 1.901 48.29
12.95 19.27 2.750 69.85 2.625 66.68 2.562 65.07 2.562 65.07 2.329 59.16 1.38 35.05
15.8 23.51 2.548 64.72 2.423 61.54
3 1/2 88.90 2.313 58.75 2.313 58.75 2.131 54.13 1.12 28.45
16.7 24.85 2.480 62.99 2.355 59.82
17.05 25.37 2.440 61.98 2.315 58.80 2.188 55.58 2.188 55.58 2.010 51.05 1.12 28.45
11.6 17.26 3.428 87.08 3.303 83.90 3.250 82.55 3.250 82.55 3.088 78.44 1.94 49.28
4 101.60
13.4 19.94 3.340 84.84 3.215 81.66 3.125 79.38 3.125 79.38 2.907 73.84 1.94 49.28
12.75 18.97 3.958 100.53 3.833 97.36 3.813 96.85 3.813 96.85 3.725 94.62 2.12 53.85
13.5 20.09 3.920 99.57 3.795 96.39
3.688 93.68 3.688 93.68 3.456 87.78 2.38 60.45
4 1/2 114.30 15.5 23.07 3.826 97.18 3.701 94.01
16.9 25.50 3.754 95.35 3.629 92.18
3.437 87.30 3.437 87.30 3.260 82.80 1.94 49.28
19.2 28.57 3.640 92.46 3.515 89.28
15 22.32 4.408 111.96 4.283 108.79 4.125 104.78 4.125 104.78 3.912 99.39 2.75 69.85
5 127.00
18 26.79 4.276 108.61 4.151 105.44 4.000 101.60 4.000 101.60 3.748 95.20 2.38 60.45
17 25.30 4.892 124.26 4.767 121.08
4.562 115.87 4.562 115.87 4.445 113.16 2.85 72.39
5 1/2 139.70 20 29.76 4.778 121.36 4.653 118.19
23 34.23 4.670 118.62 4.545 115.44 4.313 109.55 4.313 109.55 3.987 101.27 2.62 66.55
15 22.32 5.524 140.31 5.399 137.13
6 152.40 5.250 133.35 5.250 133.35 5.018 127.51 3.50 88.90
18 26.79 5.424 137.77 5.299 134.59
6 5/8 168.28 24 35.72 5.921 150.39 5.795 147.22
5.625 142.88 5.625 142.88 5.500 139.70 3.50 88.90
28 41.67 5.791 147.09 5.666 143.92
17 25.30 6.538 166.07 6.431 163.35
20 29.76 6.456 163.98 6.331 160.81
23 34.23 6.366 161.70 6.241 158.52
5.963 151.46 5.963 151.46 5.770 146.05 3.75 95.25
7 177.80 26 38.69 6.276 159.41 6.151 156.24
29 43.16 6.184 157.07 6.059 153.90
32 47.62 6.094 154.79 5.969 151.61
35 52.09 6.004 152.50 5.879 149.33 5.875 149.23 5.875 149.23 5.750 146.05 3.75 95.25
7.050 179.07 7.050 179.07 6.925 175.90 5.25 133.35
8 5/8 219.08 36 53.57 7.825 198.76 7.700 195.58 7.250 184.15 7.250 184.15 7.125 180.98 5.25 133.35
7.450 189.23 7.450 189.23 7.325 186.06 5.25 133.35

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.51: API Tubing Tables
SL 4.51: API Tubing Tables

Nominal Weight Threaded Coupling Joint Yield Capacity
Tubing Size T&C Wall Coupling Outside Dia. Col- Internal Strength Table
Non- T&C Thick- Inside Drift Non- Upset Upset lapse Yield T&C Barrels Linear
Nom. OD Upset Upset ness Dia. Dia. Upset Reg. Spec. Resis- Pres- Non- T&C per ft
in. in. lb/ft lb/ft Grade in. in. in. in. in. in. tance sure Upset Upset Linear per
psi psi lb lb ft Barrel
H-40 7,200 7,530 6,360 13,300
J-55 9,370 10,360 8,740 18,290
3/4 1.05 1.14 1.20 0.113 0.824 0.730 1.313 1.660 0.0007 1516.13
C-75 12,250 14,120 11,920 24,940
N-80 12,710 15,070 12,710 26,610
H-40 6,820 7,080 10,960 19,760
J-55 8,860 9,730 15,060 27,160
1 1.315 1.700 1.800 0.113 1.049 0.955 1.660 1.900 0.0011 935.49
C-75 11,590 13,270 20,540 37,040
N-80 12,270 14,160 21,910 39,510
H-40 0.125 1.410 5,220 5,270 0.0019 517.79
H-40 0.140 1.380 5,790 5,900 15,530 26,740 0.0018 540.55
J-55 0.125 1.410 6,790 7,250 0.0019 517.79
1 1/4 1.660 2.300 2.400 1.286 2.054 2.200
J-55 0.140 1.380 7,530 8,120 21,360 36,770 0.0018 540.55
C-75 0.140 1.380 9,840 11,070 29,120 50,140 0.0018 540.55
N-80 0.140 1.380 10,420 11,810 31,060 53,480 0.0018 540.55
H-40 0.125 1.650 4,450 0.0026 378.11
H-40 0.145 1.610 5,290 19,090 31,980 0.0025 397.14
J-55 0.125 1.650 5,790 0.0026 378.11
1 1/2 1.900 2.750 2.900 1.516 2.200 2.500
J-55 0.145 1.610 6,870 26,250 43,970 0.0025 397.14
C-75 0.145 1.610 8,990 10,020 35,800 59,960 0.0025 397.14
N-80 0.145 1.610 9,520 10,680 38,180 63,960 0.0025 397.14
H-40 5,240 5,290
J-55 6,820 7,280
2 1/16 2.063 0.156 1.751 0.0030 335.75
C-75 8,910 9,920
N-80 9,440 10,590
4.00 H-40 0.167 2.041 1.947 4,880 4,920 30,130 0.0040 247.12
4.60 4.70 H-40 0.190 1.995 1.901 5,520 5,600 35,960 52,170 0.0039 258.65
4.00 J-55 0.167 2.041 1.947 6,340 6,770 41,430 0.0040 247.12
4.60 4.70 J-55 0.190 1.995 1.901 7,180 7,700 49,450 71,730 0.0039 258.65
4.00 C-75 0.167 2.041 1.947 8,150 9,230 56,500 0.0040 247.12
4.60 4.70 C-75 0.190 1.995 1.901 9,380 10,500 67,430 97,820 0.0039 258.65
2 3/8 2.375 2.875 3.063 2.910
5.80 5.95 C-75 0.254 1.867 1.773 12,180 14,040 96,560 126,940 0.0034 295.33
4.00 N-80 0.167 2.041 1.947 8,660 9,840 60,260 0.0040 247.12
4.60 4.70 N-80 0.190 1.995 1.901 9,940 11,200 71,930 104,340 0.0039 258.65
5.80 5.95 N-80 0.254 1.867 1.773 12,890 14,970 102,990 135,400 0.0034 295.33
4.60 4.70 P-105 0.190 1.995 1.901 13,250 14,700 94,410 136,940 0.0039 258.65
5.80 5.95 P-105 0.254 1.867 1.773 17,190 19,650 135,180 177,710 0.0034 295.33
6.40 6.50 H-40 0.217 2.441 2.347 5,230 5,280 52,780 72,480 0.0058 172.76
6.40 6.50 J-55 0.217 2.441 2.347 6,800 7,260 72,580 99,660 0.0058 172.76
6.40 6.50 C-75 0.217 2.441 2.347 8,900 9,910 98,970 135,900 0.0058 172.76
8.60 8.70 C-75 0.308 2.259 2.165 12,200 14,060 149,360 185,290 0.0050 201.72
2 7/8 2.875 3.500 3.668 3.460
6.40 6.50 N-80 0.217 2.441 2.347 9,420 10,570 105,570 144,960 0.0058 172.76
8.60 8.70 N-80 0.308 2.259 2.165 12,920 15,000 159,310 198,710 0.0050 201.72
6.40 6.50 P-105 0.217 2.441 2.347 12,560 13,870 138,560 190,260 0.0058 172.76
8.60 8.70 P-105 0.308 2.259 2.165 17,220 19,690 209,100 260,810 0.0050 201.72
7.70 H-40 0.216 3.068 2.943 4,070 4,320 65,070 0.0091 109.37
9.20 9.30 H-40 0.254 2.992 2.867 5,050 5,080 79,540 103,610 0.0087 114.99
10.20 H-40 0.289 2.922 2.797 5,680 5,780 92,550 0.0083 120.57
7.70 J-55 0.216 3.068 2.943 5,290 5,940 89,470 0.0091 109.37
9.20 9.30 J-55 0.254 2.992 2.867 6,560 6,980 109,370 142,460 0.0087 114.99
10.20 J-55 0.289 2.922 2.797 7,390 7,950 127,250 0.0083 120.57
7.70 C-75 0.216 3.068 2.943 6,690 8,100 122,010 0.0091 109.37
9.20 9.30 C-75 0.254 2.992 2.867 8,530 9,520 149,140 194,260 0.0087 114.99
3 1/2 3.500 4.250 4.500 4.180
10.20 C-75 0.289 2.922 2.797 9,660 10,840 173,530 0.0083 120.57
12.70 12.95 C-75 0.375 2.750 2.625 12,200 14,060 230,990 276,120 0.0073 136.12
7.70 N-80 0.216 3.068 2.943 7,080 8,640 130,140 0.0091 109.37
9.20 9.30 N-80 0.254 2.992 2.867 9,080 10,160 159,090 207,220 0.0087 114.99
10.20 N-80 0.289 2.922 2.797 10,230 11,560 185,100 0.0083 120.57
12.70 12.95 N-80 0.375 2.750 2.625 12,920 15,000 246,390 294,530 0.0073 136.12
9.20 9.30 P-105 0.254 2.992 2.867 12,110 13,330 208,800 271,970 0.0087 114.99
12.70 12.95 P-105 0.375 2.750 2.625 17,200 19,690 323,390 386,570 0.0073 136.12
H-40 0.226 3.548 3.423 3,580 3,960 72,000 0.0122 81.78
H-40 0.262 3.476 3.351 4,420 4,580 123,070 0.0117 85.20
J-55 0.226 3.548 3.423 4,650 5,440 99,010 0.0122 81.78
J-55 0.262 3.476 3.351 5,750 6,300 169,220 0.0117 85.20
4 4.000 9.500 11.000 4.750 5.000
C-75 0.226 3.548 3.423 5,800 7,420 135,010 0.0122 81.78
C-75 0.262 3.476 3.351 7,330 8,600 230,750 0.0117 85.20
N-80 0.226 3.548 3.423 6,120 7,910 144,010 0.0122 81.78
N-80 0.262 3.476 3.351 7,780 9,170 246,140 0.0117 85.20
H-40 3,930 4,220 104,360 144,020
J-55 5,100 5,800 143,500 198,030
4 1/2 4.500 12.600 12.750 0.271 3.958 3.833 5.200 5.563 0.0152 65.71
C-75 6,430 7,900 195,680 270,240
N-80 6,810 8,430 208,730 288,040

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.51: API Tubing Tables
Common Tubing/Nipple sizes
STD
OD wt./ft ID Drift Seal Bore No-Go Nipple
V-Packing
2 1/8 4.6-4.7 1.995 1.901 1.875 1.791 X STD 91V310
2 1/8 6.4-6.5 2.441 2.347 2.313 2.205 X STD 91V318
3 1/2 10.3 2.922 2.797 2.750 2.635 X STD 91V3376
3 1/2 10.3 2.922 2.867 2.813 2.760 X OPT 91V1330
4 109.11 3.476 3.351 3.313 3.135 X STD 91V3317
4 13.4 3.40 3.215 3.125 2.907 R SDT
4 1/2 12.75 3.958 3.833 3.813 3.725 X and R 91V320
4 1/2 13.5 3.920 3.795 3.688 3.456 R STD 91V3334
5 13 4.494 4.369 4.413 X STD 91V3422
5 13 4.494 4.369 4.125 3.913 R STD 91V375
5 13 4.408 4.283 4.125 3.912 R STD 91V375
5 1/2 17 4.892 4.767 4.562 4.455 X and R 91V3309
5 1/2 23 6.670 4.545 4.313 3.987 R STD 91V3422
7 17-32 5.926 5.750 R STD 91V322

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.52: English to Metric Conversion Chart
SL 4.52: English to Metric Conversion Chart

Acre = 43,560 square feet Foot per second = 0.68182 mile per hour Mile per hour = 1.4667 feet per second
Acre = 4.047 square meters Foot pound = 0.001286 British Thermal Unit Ounce (Avoirdupois) = 28.3495 grams
Acre foot = 7,758 barrels Foot pound per second = 0.001818 horsepower Part per million = 0.05835 grain per gallon
Atmosphere = 33.94 feet of water Gallon (U.S.) = 0.02381 barrel Part per million = 8.345 pounds per million gal
Atmosphere = 29.92 inches of mercury Gallon (U.S.) = 0.1337 cubic feet Pascal (Pa) = 0.000145 pound per square inch
Atmosphere = 760 millimeters of mercury Gallon (U.S.) = 231.000 cubic inches Pound = 7000 grains
Atmosphere = 14.70 pounds per square inch Gallon (U.S.) = 3.785 liters Pound = 0.4536 kilogram
Bar = 14.504 pounds per square inch Gallon (U.S.) = 0.83267 gallon (Imperial) Pound per square inch = 2.309 feet of water @ 60oF
Barrel = 5.6146 cubic feet Gallon (U.S.) = 0.003785 cubic meters Pound per square inch = 2.0353 inches of mercury
Barrel = 42 gallons Gallon (Imperial) = 1.20095 gallons (U.S.) Pound per square inch = 51.697 millimeters of mercury
o
Barrel of water @60 F = 0.1588 metric ton Gallon (imperial) = 277.274 cubic inches Pound per square inch = 0.0703 kilograms per sq. cm
o
Barrel (36 A.P.I) = 0.1342 metric ton Gallon per minute = 1.429 barrels per hour Pound per square inch = 0.0689 bar
Barrel per hour = 0.0936 cubic feet per minute Gallon per minute = 0.1337 cubic feet per minute Pound per square inch = 0.006895 Mega Pascal (MPa)
Barrel per hour = 0.700 gallon per minute Gallon per minute = 34.286 barrels per day Pound per square inch = 6.895 Kilo Pascal (KPa)
Barrel per hour = 2.695 cubic inches per second Gram = 0.03527 ounce Pound per square inch = 6895 Pascal (Pa)
Barrel per day = 0.02917 gallon per minute Horsepower = 42.44 B.T.U.’s per minute Pound per million gals. = 0.00700 grain per gallon
British Thermal Unit = 0.2520 kilogram calorie Horsepower = 33 foot-pounds per minute Pound per million gals. = 0.11982 parts per million
British Thermal Unit = 0.2928 watt hour Horsepower = 550 foot-pounds per second Quart (Liquid) = 0.946 liter
B.T.U. per minute = 0.02356 horse power Horsepower = 1.014 horsepower (metric) Sack cement (set) = 1.1 cubic feet
Centimeter = 0.3937 inch Horsepower = 0.7457 kilowatt Square centimeter = 0.1550 square inch
Centimeter of mercury = 0.1934 pound per square inch Horsepower hour = 2.547 British Thermal Units Square foot = 0.0929 square meter
Cubic centimeter = 0.06102 cubic inch Inch = 2.540 centimeters Square inch = 6.452 square centimeters
Cubic foot = 0.1781 barrel Inch of mercury = 1.134 feet of water Square kilometer = 0.3861 square mile
Cubic foot = 7.4805 gallons (U.S.) Inch of mercury = 0.4912 pound per square inch Square meter = 10.76 square feet
Cubic foot = 0.02832 cubic meter Inch of water @60oF = 0.0361 pound per square inch Square mile = 2.590 square kilometers
Cubic foot = 0.9091 sacks cement (set) Kilogram = 2.2046 pounds Temp. Centigrade = 5/9 (Temp. oF) -32
Cubic foot per minute = 10.686 barrels per hour Kilogram Calorie = 3.968 British Thermal Units Temp. Fahrenheit = 9/5 (Temp. oC)+32
o
Cubic foot per minute = 28.80 cubic inches per second Kiologram per square cm = 14.223 pounds per square inch Temp. Absolute (Kelvin) = Temp. C +273
o
Cubic foot per minute = 7.481 gallons per minute Kilometer = 3.281 feet Temp. Absolute (Rankine) = Temp. F +460
Cubic inch = 16.387 cubic centimeters Kilometer = 0.6214 mile Ton (Long) = 2.24 pounds
Cubic meter = 6.2897 barrels Kilo Pascal (KPa) = 0.145 pounds per square inch Ton (Metric) = 2.205 pounds
Cubic meter = 35.314 cubic feet Kilowatt = 1.341 horsepower Ton (Short or Net) = 2,000 pounds
Cubic meter = 1.308 cubic yards Liter = 0.2642 gallon Ton (Metric) = 1.102 tons (short or net)
Cubic meter = 264.20 gallon U.S. Liter = 1.0567 quarts Ton (Metric) = 1,000 kilograms
o
Cubic yard = 4.8089 barrels Mega Pascal (MPa) = 145.03 pound per square inch Ton (Metric) = 6.297 barrels of water @ 60 F
o
Cubic yard = 46,656 cubic inches Meter = 3.281 feet Ton (Short or Net) = 7.454 barrels (36 A.P.I.)
Cubic yard = 0.7646 cubic meter Meter = 39.37 inches Watt-hour = 0.907 ton (metric)
Foot = 30.48 centimeters Mile = 5280.000 feet Watt-hour = 3.415 British Thermal Units
Foot = 0.3048 meter Mile = 1.609 kilometers Yard = 0.9144 meter
o
Foot of water @ 60 F = 0.4331 pound per square inch
Conversion Factors
Multiply By To Obtain
Centimeter 0.3937 Inches
Foot 0.3048 Meters
Gallon 0.0238 Barrels
Gallon 3.785 Liters
Inch 2.54 Centimeters
Mere 3.281 Feet
Kilogram 2.2046 Pounds
Kilometer 0.6214 Miles
PSI 6.895 Kilopascal
Kilopascal 0.1451 PSI
Gallon US 0.8327 Gallon (Imperial)
PSI 0.0703 Kgs/sq. cm.
Kgs/sq. cm. 14.22 PSI

Downhole Pressures
To find the downhole pressure, multiply the surface pressure by the Correction
Factor corresponding to the well depth and the Gravity of the gas.
Gas Table
Well Depth Correction Factors
ft m 0.6 Gravity 0.7 Gravity 0.8 Gravity
4,500 1371.60 1.099 1.116 1.132
5,000 1524.00 1.110 1.130 1.149
5,500 1676.40 1.120 1.141 1.163
6,000 1828.80 1.132 1.155 1.181
6,500 1981.20 1.143 1.175 1.195
7,000 2133.60 1.155 1.184 1.211
7,500 2286.00 1.171 1.195 1.227
8,000 2438.40 1.181 1.210 1.241
8,500 2590.80 1.190 1.230 1.260
9,000 2743.20 1.202 1.240 1.273
9,500 2895.60 1.215 1.250 2.285
10,000 3048.00 1.225 1.265 1.305
To find the pressure at the bottom of a column of fluid, multiply the depth of fluid
by the Pressure Gradient and add the result to the pressure at the surface of the
fluid.
API Conversion Table
Density Pressure Gradient

Specific*
API Gravity
Gravity
lb/gal kg/m3 psi/ft bar/m kPa/m
15% HCl 1.0750 8.962 1075.00 0.4654 0.1055 10.547
10 (water) 1.0000 8.337 1000.00 0.4330 0.0981 9.807
12 0.9861 8.221 986.10 0.4270 0.0967 9.670
15 0.9659 8.053 965.90 0.4182 0.0947 9.472
18 0.9465 7.891 946.50 0.4098 0.0928 9.282
20 0.9340 7.787 934.00 0.4044 0.0916 9.159
22 0.9218 7.685 921.80 0.3991 0.0944 9.044
24 0.9100 7.587 910.00 0.3940 0.0892 8.924
26 0.8984 7.490 898.40 0.3890 0.0881 8.810

API Conversion Table
Density Pressure Gradient

Specific*
API Gravity
Gravity
lb/gal kg/m3 psi/ft bar/m kPa/m
28 0.8871 7.396 887.10 0.3841 0.0870 8.700
30 0.8762 7.305 876.20 0.3794 0.0859 8.592
31 0.8708 7.260 870.80 0.3771 0.0854 8.539
32 0.8654 7.215 865.40 0.3747 0.0849 8.487
33 0.8602 7.171 860.20 0.3725 0.0844 8.436
34 0.8550 7.128 855.00 0.3702 0.0836 8.385
35 0.8498 7.085 849.80 0.3680 0.0833 8.334
36 0.8448 7.043 844.80 0.3658 0.0828 8.284
37 0.8398 7.001 839.80 0.3638 0.0824 8.235
38 0.8348 6.960 834.80 0.3615 0.0819 8.187
39 0.8299 6.919 829.90 0.3593 0.0814 8.139
40 0.8251 6.879 825.10 0.3573 0.0809 8.091
41 0.8203 6.839 820.30 0.3552 0.0804 8.044
42 (diesel) 0.8156 6.800 815.60 0.3532 0.0800 7.998
43 0.8109 6.760 810.90 0.3511 0.0795 7.952
44 0.8063 6.722 806.30 0.3491 0.0791 7.907
46 0.7972 6.646 797.20 0.3452 0.0782 7.818
48 0.7883 6.572 788.30 0.3413 0.0773 7.731
50 0.7796 6.500 779.60 0.3376 0.0765 7.645
55 0.7587 6.325 758.70 0.3285 0.0744 7.440
60 0.7389 6.160 738.90 0.3200 0.0725 7.246
*For heavier fluid weights, pressure gradient in psi/ft = 0.05195 x density (lb/gal)
or pressure gradient in kPa/m = 22.626 x density (kg/m3), 1 lb/gal = 119.841 kg/
m3

Slickline Operations Manual SL 4.53: Handy Formulas and Data
SL 4.53: Handy Formulas and Data
Amount Wireline Will Fall Back When Broken

The following table originated with measurements during fishing exercises in a
3000-ft. well. While it cannot be totally accurate under all conditions, field experi-
ence has proven the table to be a reasonable guide in calculating the depth of the
top of the broken wire.
Table 4.53 - 1: Amount Wireline Will Fallback (per 1,000 ft.)
Tubing Size Wireline OD Feet of Fall Back

(in.) (in.) (per1,000-ft. wire length)
2-3/8 .082 8
2-3/8 .092 10
2-7/8 .082 10
2-7/8 .092 12
3-1/2 .092 16
3-1/2 .108 15
3-1/2 3/16 20
4-1/2 .108 27
4-1/2 3/16 35
5-1/2 .108 40
5-1/2 3/16 50
7 .108 90
7 3/16 100
Other Formulas and Data

1. Circles
Circumference of a circle = 3.14 x Diameter (π x D)
Diameter of a circle = Circumference ÷ 3.14
Radius of a circle = Diameter ÷ 2
Area of a circle = 3.14 x Radius x Radius (π x R2)
2. Force From Pressure on a Surface
Force (pounds) = Pressure (psi) x Area (sq. in.)

3. Volume of Rectangular Tank

Volume = Length x Width x Depth (Height)
Use the same units (inches, etc.) for each dimension.
4. Volume of a Sphere
Volume = 3.14 x Radius x Radius x Radius (π x R3)
5. Volume of Circular Tank
Volume = Area of Round Base x Height
Use the same units (inches, etc.) for each dimension.
6. Fresh Water
Weight 8.33 Pounds per US gallon
Density 62.4 Pounds per cubic foot
1000 kilogram per cubic
meter
1 kilogram per liter
Gradient 0.433 psi per foot
Specific Gravity 1
AP Gravity 10°
7. Fill-up Volume of Any Size Pipe - Approximate

Inside pipe diameter squared = barrels per 1,000 feet of length
Example: Schedule-40 4-in pipe inside diameter = 3.826 inches
Barrels per 1,000 feet = 3.826 x 3.286 = approximately 10.8 barrels per 1,000
feet
8. Approximate Hydrostatic Head
Approximate Head = 0.052 x weight of fluid per gallon x depth in feet
(Annulus Calculation)
9. True Hydrostatic Head = Gradient x True Vertical Depth
10. Convert API Gravity to Specific Gravity
Specific Gravity = 141.5 / (131.5 + API)
11. Convert Specific Gravity to API Gravity
API Gravity = (141.5 / Specific Gravity) - 131.5
12. Convert Specific Gravity to Gradient
Gradient = Specific Gravity 0.433

13. Bottom Hole Pressure of Gas Column

Bottom Hole Pressure = Surface Pressure x Gas Correction Factor
14. Fahrenheit = (Centigrade x 1.8) + 32°F
15. Centigrade = (Fahrenheit - 32°F) x .5556
16. Drawdown = static BHP - flowing BHP
17. Productivity Index (PI) = BBLS per day / (static BHP - flowing BHP)
18. 1 Pascal = 1 Newton / Square meter
19. Using S.I. Units
Approximate Hydrostatic Head in kPa = kg/L x Depth in Meters x 9.81
20. Weight required to make a tool string fall - neglecting friction.
Weight Required = Area of Wire x Well Pressure
21. Approximate weight per foot of round bar stock or stem.
Approximate Weight = (Diameter squared x 8) / 3
22. Maximum working strength of wirelines.
Slow Pull - 75% of Breaking Strength
Fast Jarring - 50% of Breaking Strength
23. Wire areas and approximate wire strengths.
Min. Breaking
Area
Wire Size (in.) Strength,
(square in)
API 9A (lb)
.066 811 0.0034
.072 961 0.0041
.082 1239 0.0053
.092 1547 0.0066
.105 1966 0.0086
.108 2109 0.0092
.125 2794 0.0123
3/16 Galvanized 9/6/1 4960 0.0275

Section
5
Safety
SL 5.1: Wellhead Safety Requirements
In the offshore environment and on some land locations, the surface wellhead,
commonly referred to as a Christmas tree, may incorporate surface safety valves
(SSVs) to provide automatic well closure when surface problems are detected.
Since tree configurations vary according to working pressure, customer require-
ments, and regulatory requirements, there is not a set tree configuration. In most
applications there are two valves (master valves) located below the wing or cross,
where the flow is diverted from the vertical bore into the flowline. Above the
cross is normally a top valve called the swab or crown valve. There will almost
always be at least one valve located on the wing or cross. Normally, this is diago-
nally away form the vertical bore. For offshore applications, an actuated fail-safe
API-14D surface safety valve (SSV) normally replaces the second manual master
valve. Some operators will also place a wing SSV with or without an additionally
manual valve on the flowline.
On offshore installations, the surface safety valves are normally incorporated as

part of the emergency shut down (ESD) system. When performing slickline and
other well servicing work, the SSV mounted above the lower master valve is nor-
mally taken out of service by installing of a fusible lockout cap to maintain the
valve in the open position. The control panel can be locked out of service and
tagged. During rig up of slickline surface BOPs, the SSV middle valve and the top
crown valve should be closed along with the flowline SSV and the flowline man-
ual valve prior to pressure bleed off. It is required that at minimum, a manual
valve on the tree and a manual valve on the flowline be closed.
It is important that in closing each manual valve the number of turns to open and
close each valve be counted. Counting the number of turns will help to determine
the relative position of the valve gate and can be used to detect tools and other
constructions that might prevent full closure or opening of the valve.
During slickline or other well intervention operations, the SSV should never be
used as the primary valve to open or close in the well. If the SSV has to be used
due to an inoperable master or crown valve, the working manual valve will be
used as the primary barrier. In the event the manual with the valve is inoperable,
the next valve downstream on the flowline must be closed.

Slickline Operations Manual Safety
Prior to removing the tree cap for slickline rig-up, rig-up for pumping in or
unloading to a tank, or other well intervention work, there will be a minimum of
one manual valve isolating wellbore and flowline pressure. A two wellbore bar-
rier rig-up is desired. The valve combination will vary, but should consist of the
following valves being closed: lower manual master valve or SSV, top manual
crown valve, and manual wing valve.
There are several safety reasons for not using the SSV as a primary barrier. Surface
valves are designed to be fail-safe (normally closed). A supply source of either air
or hydraulic pressure is required to operate the valves and maintain these in the
open position. While working on or around the tree during slickline rig-up or
other well servicing operations, the valve could be inadvertently opened.

Manual Halliburton en English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Halliburton en English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Halliburton en English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Slickline Operations Manual

Section 1 ..............................................................Surface Operations

Section 2 ....................................Downhole Service Operations

Section 3 .............Advanced Slickline Service Operations

Section 4 ........................................................ Technical Information

Section 5 ............................................................................................... Safety

February 9, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-1

SL 1.33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H2S Procedures and Precautions (formally WL 1.28)

February 7, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-2

SL 1.0: Standard Job Procedures

Local operational area and customer requirements, or government regulations

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-3

SL 1.1: Pre-Job Information

2.0 General Information

Minimum Information Requirements:

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-4

SL 1.2: Pre-Job Preparation

2.0 General Information

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-5

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-6

SL 1.3: Wireline Unit and Accessory Equipment Selection

2.0 General Information

Accessory equipment as defined here will be nonpressure control equipment that

Note Under no circumstances should a piece of equipment with a problem that

February 9, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-7

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-8

SL 1.4: Wire Selection

2.0 General Information

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-9

2. Determine if the well is corrosive.

February 7, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-10

SL 1.5: Spooling Wire

Note It is recommended that braided line be spooled stet by an experienced per-

2.0 General Information

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-11

2.1 Equipment Considerations

2.1.1 Spool-Off Devices or Spooling Tensioning Units

2.1.2 Other Wireline Service Units

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-12

2.1.3 Manila Rope

2.1.4 Load Cell/Weight Indicator

2.2 Spooling Methods

2.2.1 Spooling 90o Between Units

2.2.2 Spooling Between Units Side By Side

2.2.3 Spooling Direct

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-13

2.2.4 Spooling Using the Same Unit

2.2.5 Spooling Direct from Storage Spool

3. Wireline Unit Drum Requirements:

February 7, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-14

•The drum should be checked to determine if it has sufficient strength to han-

We do not recommend smooth wrapping slickline all the way up on the

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-15

SL 1.6: Wire Use and Inspection

2.0 General Information

2. Wire Use Log Book

February 4, 2000 Halliburton Company (Dallas, Texas) 1-16

Documents also can be ordered by mail:

Or the document can be ordered by telephone:

5. Wireline Inspection Instrument